Fresh Starts and Gotham Bats

by Some_Stupid_Reckless_Idiot

Summary:

After being gravely injured after his fight with Pariah Dark, Danny hangs up the proverbial cap and moves on with his life. Without being a ghost, space was now impossible due to his injury, so Danny puts to use the long hours he was forced to work in his parent's lab to use, gaining an internship at Wayne Industries. All he wants is to put his past behind him and move forward. But old traditions and new threats get in the way.

And another thing, why did his coworkers think he was about to be adopted? His parents weren't that bad, let alone the fact that he wasn't a minor anymore.

Chapter 1: Off

"We're-we're just worried about you Danny,"

The words bounced around his head, on a never-ending loop. Of course, they were worried, who wouldn't be? All his parents knew was that he had been caught in the ghost fight and ended up with a broken back, all Jazz, Tucker, and Sam knew was that something went really wrong during the fight. He didn't tell any of them that he had intended to have gotten caught, that had intended to be broken over Pariah Dark's knee while sucking him up into a Fenton Thermos. It was the only way he would have gotten through his defenses otherwise.

Everyone was already upset enough about the situation, he didn't see the need to tell them that it could have been so much worse. As it was, it was still a rarity for an hour to pass before someone checked in on him, if he was in pain or if he needed anything, even after all of the months that had passed since.

Half of the town had been raised to the ground and the school wasn't spared. Learning turned to remote and once the distractions of the school building and the more flexible schedule were established, Danny flourished. Taking every class he could and getting special permission to take extra classes. It certainly was a surprise to his teachers, even leading the principal to come to his house with a stack of tests in different subject areas and make him take them to prove he wasn't somehow cheating. (He wasn't, it was just the fact that if a ghost decided to interrupt class he could pause the prerecorded videos and start them once he was back.)

It was a surprise for everyone when he secretly applied for an internship at Wayne Enterprises and an even bigger surprise when he was actually accepted. Now the only problem was that he most definitely didn't live in Gotham and that was where his internship was offered.

"I'm going a few states away, not the moon," No, never the moon. Not now. Danny thought bitterly.

"But-but how will you get around!?" Jazz asks, voice near frantic.

"Probably with the wheelchair I'm sitting in. Guy's, you do know that I'm not actually going to stay here for the rest of my life, right? Amity might be a great place, and I will always love you guys, but just because I'm in this chair now doesn't mean I need to be stuck in this house,"

It was a concept his friends and family were struggling to accept. Once it became obvious that he was going to be permanently injured, they seemed to think that he was suddenly inferior or crippled. He wasn't! He felt like they suddenly saw him as weak and while his parents and Jazz hated that he was somehow caught up in ghost fights, they seemed downright terrified of him even leaving the house.

"Well, yes, but I thought that would have changed, now that you can't exactly...do what you planned on doing," Maddie tries to put as gently as she can manage and feels like she still screwed it up with the way Danny's face twisted.

"You can say it, Mom. I'm not going to be an astronaut, but that doesn't mean I can't be anything! Dr. Yang has tried to tell you all, but you won't listen! I'm not-not incapable because of this chair, I still have my mind and my hands, and apparently, Wayne Industries think that they are enough. I was stuck in that mindset for so long, I pitied myself so much, and I'm just starting to see that I don't need fully functioning legs to still be a person! I don't need any of you bringing me back there. I'm leaving today. The car service Wayne Enterprises is sending is going to be here in a few hours, I have some last minute packing to do,"

While Danny couldn't exactly storm away, he gripped the wheels of his chair and swung himself away from the breakfast table, making his way over to the new lift installed in the stairs. While his parents weren't great at accepting his second bid for freedom, they were at least still good at making great inventions from random crap around the house. Danny wouldn't have known what to do if he suddenly couldn't get up the stairs to his room, currently the only place he could actually freely move around anymore.

Phantom died the day of the last fight, the whole town had seen him fade away, in actuality, Danny had barely managed to turn himself invisible and half bury himself in some rubble before truly passing out and losing all memories after that. The next memory he has is of waking up in a hospital and being told he had an incomplete spinal cord injury.

He was so hyped up on painkillers and the shock that it took a few days for it to truly sink in, some insane hope tried to tell him it was just swelling as one of the doctors had suggested. After it had, and not just for him, everyone kind of spiraled, in their own way.

Maddie and Jack descended into the lab, Jack intent on making some sort of walking suit and Maddie convinced she could find a biological way to regenerate the damage done to Danny's spine. Jazz dove into research, looking for ways of protecting and helping Danny's mind deal with the new situation. Tucker seemed to think that he could distract Danny with video games and memes. Sam brought new smoothie concoctions every day, convinced she could heal him that way.

And Danny? Well, he went ghost. When he locked himself in his room once being discharged, he changed, even if he knew the consequences. Pain radiated from the still-damaged spine and when he finally went back to being human, his muscles locked in spasms and ached. His vision was blurry and every sense felt like it was assaulting him. It was always a shock to return to being human, but it was so much worse. Still, he continued to change, even knowing the pain he was setting himself up for was terrifying. Those few minutes of freedom were what Danny had lived for months. Where he could move where he wanted to, where he could almost pretend the fight never happened.

And then Jazz convinced him to see Dr. Yang. He already had bad experiences with mental health professionals, the high school "counselor" being enough of a traumatic experience, thank you very much. But the pleading look in Jazz's eyes made him cave and by ghosts was he thankful for that.

While the rest of the people around him seemed to continue spiraling, Dr. Yang became his anchor point. While everyone else spun out, he finally accepted the fact that he was in the wheelchair and it was most likely going to stay that way. It was actually Dr. Yang that lead him into thinking that a break might be a good thing for him.

What was more of a surprise was that he actually got the internship. The small theoretical generator schematics he sent in must have impressed at least someone because next thing he knew he had a fully paid for travel invitation to Wayne Enterprises, courtesy of one Lucius Fox.

While it took weeks for him to decide to actually apply, he was packing within an hour of getting the news. It...did not go well when Maddie found the letter before he grabbed it. Shock, anger, and overwhelming coddling followed, as if they felt like they didn't do enough for him. It was maddening and while he knew they did it because they cared, he was about to snap if someone brought him one more cup of calming tea.

Over the past week or so, a steady pile of bags was building up next to the door, an ominous sign that the ever-approaching date of his departure. While his family and friends see it as ominous, Danny saw it as a sign that his independence was fast approaching.

And then it was finally there and they were doing their best to convince Danny to actually stay. It was infuriating that way they brought up the things they thought he wouldn't be able to do as if someone's doubt ever stopped him before.

Slinging the last two bags onto him, one on his lap and the other thrown over his shoulder, he makes his way back down the steps as fast as the lift will take him. Danny can practically feel his patience thinning as he spots his parents and Jazz waiting at the bottom of the stairs, and without his bags.

"What happened to my bags?" Danny asks, looking at what he could from his spot on the still descending platform.

"The car service is here early, they loaded your bags already," Jazz says and Danny's eyes narrow on the duffle bag thrown over her shoulder.

"Not all of them," Danny points out, frowning. That wasn't one of the bags he had packed.

"We figured you wouldn't want them seeing this. I don't know Wayne Enterprises' opinion on home brought inventions, especially weapons, you want to be ready for those spooks," Jack says, trying to force an air of cheer into his voice. 

Danny, well Danny couldn't say it made everything better, and he really didn't like the fact that Jack and Maddie still seemed hellbent on hating ghosts, but it settled something inside him. They supported him and his desire for a break, even if they had been hesitant at first. 

"Thank you," Danny says, taking the bag and slinging it over to hook onto the back of his chair. 

"Now, we know you'll be busy, but try to call once in a while? I'm sure that if you introduce some of our inventions to Bruce then he'll take interest," Jack says, chest puffing up in pride. 

And there it was, Danny thought bitterly. There was always an angle with his parents, always something they wanted, what they were driven towards. And they really didn't care who was in their way. The town, public and private property, or their own kids. Danny's eyes flicker towards Jazz and take note of the small scowl there, somehow feeling better that she was just as annoyed with his parents as he was. 

"Sure, I'll call when I get settled," Danny says, forcing his way to the door and out, letting himself pick up speed on the ramp for the hell of it. 

With one last wave goodbye, he rolls himself up to the van and the man standing besides it. He was not what Danny was expecting, at all. He expected someone his own age, dressed in a basic polo uniform and utterly done with his job. What he got was a posh, older gentleman. Dressed in a nice pair of slacks and white button down shirt, tie neatly tied. 

"Hello Mr. Fenton, my name is Alfred Pennyworth. Would you like assistence getting situated or would you prefer to do it yourself?" 

Danny blinks at the mans words. It wasn't often that someone suggested he could do something for himself, at least after the wheelchair became a part of his life. It wasn't often someone thought, or at least expressed the fact that they thought he seemed capable of getting himself what he needed. 

"I can do it, but thank you for the offer. This whole thing in really unnecessary, I could have taken the train like planned," Danny says and watches as the door slides open and the ramp comes down. 

"The rail company the tickets were too are known for being ableist and non-accomidating for their disabled passengers. Besides, Mr. Wayne understands the struggle of traveling with someone who uses a wheelchair. No, this was much simpler and acceptable. Now, since it is a few hour's ride, I took the liberty of packaging some light travel food, I do hope you enjoy it," Alfred says and Danny pauses briefly when he gets up in the van to look at the truly massive cooler that seemed packed into the back of the vehicle. 

"That wasn't necessary," Danny finds himself saying while strapping himself in. 

"Nonsense, I know a few boys around your age and am aware of their appetites. There are also a few options for drinks so please help yourself. Now, if you are secured, we can set off," Alfred seems to ask and Danny nods after testing the restraints, pleased that they seem ten times more secure than the rushed ones installed into the GAV. 

"Sure, and um, thank you Mr. Pennyworth, all of this really wasn't necessary," Danny says, but still opens the cooler, finding a variety of labeled sandwiches, cold drinks, and other types of snacks. His eyes stray towards the thermos and finds coffee when he cracks it open, smiling. 

"It is no trouble, Mr. Fenton," Alfred says and Danny is too preoccupied with the food to argue and its for the best, no one had yet to win an argument against Alfred Pennyworth, not even the great Bruce Wayne. 

 

 

Chapter 2: Settling In

Notes:

I am hopefully going to be updating this every Tuesday since my other book is updated every Thursday and I like the sound of updates on Tuesday’s and Thursdays.

While they did end up stopping a few times over the multiple hours it took to reach Gotham, most of the ride was spent in comfortable silence, something that was entirely novel to Danny. If his dad wasn't shouting off after ghosts, then the GAV was making truly disturbing noises. He actually found himself checking to see if they were actually moving or if the car was on in the first place. 

 

Entering Gotham was another thing entirely. It felt as if one minute they were driving normally and the next, buildings loomed over them and cast dark shadows, only accenting the already dark atmosphere with the large clouds of pollution already hanging in the sky. 

 

"Well, it is dark," Danny finds himself commenting and is surprised when Alfred chuckles. 

 

"Gotham gets that a lot. But really, there are very kind people here. As you know, your living arrangements ended up being shuffled around," 

 

 

"Yeah, I don't really get that?" Danny interrupts, asking what he had been wondering since getting the phone call. 

 

"The apartment you were set to stay in was completely inaccessible. You were on the third floor, with no elevators, and your chair wouldn't have fit through the majority of the doorways. Wayne Industries has since cut that contract," Alfred explains, tone annoyed but for once it wasn't directed at Danny. 

 

"But where am I staying now? I don't think Mr. Wayne would be happy with me turning the corner of one of the labs into my new home," 

 

Although, if his parents were any indication, he could simply sleep in the lab and claim he was working late and fell asleep, thus solving the sleeping problems. 

 

"Yes, well, Bruce decided to make everything in-house and converted an empty floor of Wayne Tower into apartments. And before you give me that look, there are a few others who need housing arrangements, so it isn't just for you," Alfred corrects, catching the guilt flash over Danny's face. 

 

"Okay? How many are going to be living there?" Danny asks, wondering just how many people he would be dealing with. While grateful, Danny was actually looking forward to having his own apartment for once. 

 

"Three consistently, either partnered from Star Labs, Queen Consolidated, or a representative from the Justice League. There are five more apartments for people who drop in, like you who were offered a long-term internship," 

 

"Why apartments in Wayne Tower? I mean, I get why mine wasn't possible anymore, but I doubt everyone else has the same limitations," Danny hates himself for saying it, but it was true, he was rather limited in the chair. 

 

"You being in a wheelchair does not limit you, it does not make you any less capable. But the reason they live in secured apartments is that all are typically a part of top-secret or dangerous projects. Some of them take work home with them and they would be in danger otherwise. In all honesty, this was a move Bruce was going to make anyways, your presence simply sped it up a bit," Alfred explains, voice kind.

 

"So we're going to Wayne tower now?" Danny asks, shifting in the chair uncomfortably. 

 

"Yes, but there is no need to worry. You'll still have until next Monday, just because you're moving into your workplace doesn't mean you actually have to get to work. And if this arrangement doesn't work out Bruce would be happy to set you up in an accessible apartment," Danny nods to Alfred's words, accepting them. 

 

"You call Mr. Wayne Bruce, are you two close?" At Danny's words, a laugh is startled out of Alfred, seeming to surprise both Danny and the man himself. 

 

"I raised him after his parents were killed. Did you not do any research on him?" Alfred asks, knowing for a fact that he and his role to Bruce was mentioned numerous times. 

 

"Not really? I mean I checked to see if he was a good guy, I'm not about to go work for some guy like Lex Luthor, but when I figured out he wasn't an evil billionaire and treated his employees nicely, I kind of left it alone?" Danny sounded so confused that it pulled another chuckle out of Alfred. 

 

"And why would you do that? I'm sure knowing your boss's likes and dislikes would be useful," Alfred asks, testing the waters. 

 

"Eh, I figured if he wanted me to know he would tell me. He probably has enough crazy people stalking him anyways. And besides, I'm a low-level intern, when would I realistically be meeting Bruce Wayne?" 

 

 

 

 

***********************************

 

 

 

 

It seemed he would realistically be meeting Bruce Wayne thirty seconds after exiting the van outside Wayne Tower. It was only for a few seconds, but the way that his eyes snapped towards Danny had him on edge. It was almost the same reaction other ghosts gave him, warning bells going off and telling him to be careful. Although the interaction did give him a small insight, Alfred and him knew each other and very fondly at that. Alfred's look reminded him of when Mr. Foley caught sight of Tucker unexpectedly. 

 

"He's your son, isn't he?" Danny finds himself saying, and hates himself for a moment when he realizes that he's never seen his own dad give him that look and that he's jealous. 

 

"He might as well be. I can appreciate the fact that you've respected his privacy, but enough of that now. I'll have an assistant bring up your bags, for now why don't I show you to your room and let you get settled in? Rio, one of the partnered scientists, is planning on making dinner soon," Alfred says and Danny can't help but frown. 

 

"Why would you know that? And why exactly are you the one handling me? I'm pretty sure you have better things to do, shit, I didn't mean to offend you, or swear" Danny rushes and cringes when he swears. 

 

"It's fine, Danny. I am well versed with young men putting their feet in their mouths. And I am not 'handling' you. Lucious Fox was made aware of your situation when you contacted HR. He passed it on to Bruce since they are friends. I volunteered to get you when I overheard him discussing options. He was rather concerned when he saw your submission and the possible applications of it," Now Danny was actually worried. 

 

"It was a battery? Trust me in the fact that was maybe the least dangerous thing I could have submitted," Danny mutters, thinking back. 

 

He really didn't see how a battery could be all that bad. It was basically what his parents had developed except instead of using ectoplasm, it used regular old electricity, it just had greatly increased storage capacities. 

 

"While you applied the concept in the form of a phone or laptop battery, if it were modified slightly it could be used for countless things, including weapons. While no one wants to stunt your ingenuity or undermind you, the implications of the technology you created could be quite dangerous," Alfred says while gathering part of his luggage, strapping one of the lighter ones to the back of Danny's chair. 

 

"Please don't tell me that is why I got the internship. I wasn't going to like, take revenge or something if you went with someone else," Not to mind the fact that he wouldn't need a single piece of his technology to do so. Danny decided against mentioning this as he followed Alfred on his path into Wayne Tower. 

 

"Oh no, nothing like that. The ingenuity was astounding and showed your promise. No, if anything, the acceptance board along with Lucius and Bruce decided that if they were to attempt to keep you from going down the path of criminality, then they would do their best to nurture you and your inventions, not punish you for something you haven't done," Alfred states, voice turning firm. 

 

"Oh," 

 

And its partly stunned from the older mans words, and partially because of the lobby he just walked into. While it was clearly older and grand, there were touches of modern thrown in. The floor was old looking marble, with marble pillars going up. But it was a frosted glass set of stairs that wound up to the second floor. It was somehow startling bright compared to outsides, tones of whites, silvers, and even bits of gold mixed in. It was almost blinding compared to the dull exterior. Screens were spread throughout, and each seemed to represent a branch of Wayne Enterprises. Engineering, chemistry, and even a fashion line. It was interesting to see how many pies Wayne Enterprises had its fingers in. It suddenly made Danny feel very small and very very lucky. To think he was going to be a part of all of it, and in the main building nonetheless. 

 

"Come now, Mr. Fenton, your apartments await," Alfred interrupts Danny's thought and he blushes, wheeling over to where Alfred had ended up waiting next to an elevator. 

 

"Right! Sorry," 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

************************************

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

When the elevator doors open, it is to a common space of sorts. There are various chairs, couches, and bean bags scattered around, some of them facing a coffee table and TV and some of them in their own clumps. Separated from the common room slightly were a kitchen and dining area, separated by a half wall but still very open. It was clear that it had been either modified or built, with the idea of wheelchairs in mind. There wasn't a single space Danny could see that he couldn't get to, a good portion of the kitchen cabinets was accessible, and there was a table missing at the currently empty dining room table. The kitchen, however, contained a single occupant. 

 

"Mx. Rio, it is a pleasure to see you again, dinner smells simply delightful," Alfred greets cordially, and Danny takes note of the title. 

 

"Mr. Pennyworth, nice to see you too. And you must be Danny," The figure turns, and Danny takes stock. 

 

Dressed in ripped jeans, an old AC/DC t-shirt, pierced ears, lips, eyebrows, and messy blonde hair, Danny couldn't say they was the first thing Danny expected a well-respected scientist to look like. They was also younger than Danny expected them to be, maybe late twenties, but that was a stretch. Clearly Asian, but Danny couldn't even begin to guess which nationality and didn't want to make an ass out of himself by trying to guess. 

 

"Yeah, that's me, good old Danny. I'd get up to shake your hand but that's not exactly possible and it looks like you've got your hands full," Danny says, looking at their dough-covered hands. Rio just laughs. 

 

"Nice to meet you, Danny, I'm Rio, just Rio. He/Them," Rio looks at Danny expectantly, and if Danny wasn't sure what he was looking for was to not be insulting, but respectful, Danny might just be a little wary. 

 

"Danny Fenton, gender neutral. I really don't care what pronouns are used," He finds himself saying, forcing himself not to look at Alfred in question. With how freely Rio introduced himself, Danny figured he would be fine, but you never know. 

 

"Well, nice to meet you Danny. If you have some free time after you unpack, I wouldn't mind talking while I cook, all the others are working," Danny felt his core warm at the invitation. 

 

"Sure, sounds great," 

 

"This way Danny," Alfred says, walking down a hallway. 

 

Danny wheels himself after him, stopping at a door that had a plaque beside it that had his name with 06 below it, just like what you would find in a hotel with the addition of his name. The door was a nontraditional one, seemingly sliding instead of a normal hinge one. There was also a small screen at a lower level, more easily reached. 

 

"Your door and room have both been modified to fit your need. The keypad will be set to your biometrics as well as a keycode can be used. With either an eye scan, voice print, thumbprint, or keycode, you will be able to access your room, whichever you find easiest. Inside is another keypad which you can physically shut the sliding door with a push of a button or a voice command, again, please use whatever you find easiest," Alfred says, punching in a code that Danny doesn't catch. 

 

"You can set it to your specifications once you get inside," Alfred explains, stepping inside the room. 

 

 

If Danny thought that the commons and kitchen were accessible, his room was on another level. There was an ideal-height bed, desk without a chair, dresser as well as wardrobe, all set to accessible heights. Peering into the attached bathroom showed a similar setup, an easily reachable bathroom cabinet, sink, and toilet with support bars. The shower was even a specialized one that Danny could already tell would be way easier to use than the bath/shower at home. 

 

"Please let either myself or one of your supervisors know if anything needs to be altered, Bruce is aware of how difficult accessibility can be and wishes for you to be as comfortable as possible," Danny just finds himself nodding dumbly. 

 

"Would you like assistance with your belonging, or should I just put the bags on the bed?" Alfred asks, a small smile on his face at the wonder on Danny's. 

 

"The-the bed is fine. Thank you, Alfred, and please thank Mr. Wayne, you have no clue how meaningful this is," Danny says faintly, still taking in the room. 

 

"Nonsense, Barbara Gordon is a regular guest at Wayne Manor, we both understand what it is like to have special needs in order to be comfortable in a space. Now, I'll leave you to unpack what you have and I'll have someone else bring the rest up. If you want, it can wait for later if you would like to talk with Rio," Alfred says kindly, unhooking the bag from behind his chair. 

 

"Thanks, I think I'll unpack later," Danny says and Alfred nods. 

 

"I do not know if I'll see you again, but it was a pleasure to meet you, Danny," Alfred says and Danny nods with a smile. 

 

"You as well, I really wasn't looking forward to traveling on the train with everything plus my chair," Danny jokes and Alfred chuckles. 

 

"Yes, well, I am glad I could be of service. Do have a pleasant evening," Danny nods. 

 

"You as well, Mr. Pennyworth,"

Chapter 3: Dinner

Danny took a few minutes after Alfred left to collect himself, hastily using some tissues found in the bathroom to dry his eyes before his eyeliner was ruined. Sue him, it took forever to get it right, he wasn't about to mess up his work with some tears. When he had finally pull himself together, he quickly imputed his information into the keypad and secured the room behind him, not that he actually thought someone in Wayne Enterprises would actually steal his stuff. 

After Danny had collected himself, he opened his door and rolled back out to the kitchen, Rio still working in the kitchen. Now that he was able to pay attention to them, Danny saw that he seemed to be stuffing some kind of dough with a filling, and from what he could tell, there was already a batch steaming in a steamer on the stove.

"Hey, there! I know it can be a little overwhelming moving in here," Rio says and Danny nods.

"Yeah, I didn't think I'd ever really leave Amity, Gotham is really something else," Danny says, wheeling closer into the kitchen, and situates himself at the island counter, pulling himself up with a small amount of ghostly assistance.

"Amity?" Rio asks, going back to pinching dough.

"Yeah, small town in Illinois, known for being the 'most haunted town in America'. While its no real small town town, its certainly smaller then here," Danny explains, chuckling.

"Huh, how'd you get here then? I mean, what made you want to upend your life to get you here?"

"My accident, well, my most recent one anyways. My parents and town were mothering before, but afterward it became unbearable," Danny explains, picking at his nails. He would need to do them again, the paint was chipping.

"You're accident? How you ended up in the chair?" Danny can't help but snort at the bluntness of the question.

"I think I'm going to like you, Rio. No one else I've met has been so blunt. Yeah, there was an attack and I ended up buried in a pile of rubble with my back broken. Ever since then, people have treated me as if I was going to break if they so much as breathed in my direction," Danny explains and Rio laughs.

"Well, that's just one more thing you have in common with Mr. Wayne,"

Danny makes a questioning noise, and Rio sighs.

"Black hair, blue eyes, same common build. Mr. Wayne broke his back a few years ago in a car crash," Rio explains, lifting a lid off of the steaming pan.

"Huh, well that's interesting. I didn't know he got hurt that bad," Danny says, and it's honest.

"Yeah, Brucie Wayne is a bit of an airhead as well as a klutz. It's more common to see him injured than uninjured,"

Rio proceeds to pull out a series of steamed buns, placing them on a plate while he reloads the steamer with the next batch he made. Danny watches in fascination, never having seen someone cook with so much confidence or lack of mess.

"You seem interested in what I am doing, want to try?" Rio offers, bringing over some dough balls, some sort of meat mince, flour, and a small rolling pin without the handles.

"Sure, I've never seen someone really cook before," Danny says and Rio can't help the look of shock that comes over his face.

"What, are you some rich kid? How can you have never seen someone cook before?" Rio asks, slowly demonstrating how he rolls out the dough, puts a small amount of meat in the center, and crimps the edges together, making a somewhat complicated design.

"Oh god no! We actually struggled a lot, my parents weren't exactly employed for the most part. Our expenses were barely covered by minor research grants and my sister working. No, my parents were mostly focused on their research and as much as my sister will deny it, she can't exactly cook. And it didn't really make up for our food being contaminated by samples most of the time," Danny explains and Rio actually scowls.

"And what about you? What were you doing while your sister cooked and worked? Were you just sitting back and letting everyone else work? Is that how you got here?" Rio's words are sharp, and Danny gets the feeling that this is more personal than he could have thought.

"I was dealing with nerve damage as well as neurological damage from a previous accident, as well as other personal issues from when I nearly died before. I wasn't exactly sitting around on my butt, and besides that, I was only fifteen and trying to figure out some revelations," Danny can't help but snap back.

Danny got that this could be a sore subject for Rio, but it also wasn't fair for him to make assumptions. What Danny decided against mentioning was the fact that he found out he was half dead, fighting ghosts, and somehow became ghost king, all within two years.

"I-I'm sorry," Rio says, voice going soft and apologetic.

"I snapped, I shouldn't have. What I mean is, I had my own issues, and I get sort of defensive about people claiming that I don't do enough, it's a personal sore spot I guess," Danny tries to explain and Rio nods.

"Were your revelations about your identity? Did your parents not take it well or something?" Rio asks and Danny can't help but shrug.

"They were confused, I was confused. After my first accident, I came to realize that it didn't much matter what I identified as, or how I expressed myself. I can't really get into it, but it was completely out of the blue, there was no indication to either my parents or I," Danny tries to explain and Rio frowns in somewhat confusion.

"Just out of the blue? I'm not doubting your feelings or invalidating them, but that isn't exactly usual," Rio says and Danny shrugs, attempting to make his own dough balls. They end up looking like the meat Lunch Lady used against him in their first fight.

"When I had my accident when my body failed me and I only had my mind and emotions. It was honestly terrifying. It was like I ended up disconnected from everything, and I was just Danny, and it didn't matter whatever else I was," Danny's words were modified, he couldn't exactly tell Rio that he became ectoplasm and he technically was just his consciousness and emotions. But he figured that he got his point across when Rio smiles.

"Yeah, the physical doesn't really matter, I can get that. Is it the same for who you are attracted to?" Rio asks, and at this Danny shifts slightly uncomfortably.

"I guess. It doesn't really matter who it is, as long as they are a good person it doesn't exactly matter what is or isn't between their legs,"

"That's a very enlightened way of thinking. No, you want to pinch it this way, then it won't open while cooking, there you go,"

Rio then proceeds to walk Danny through the versions of cooking steps, from sealing the meat inside the dough to steaming it for the right length of time to make sure the meat is cooked, but not overcooked, Rio also showed him how to make rice and nearly had an aneurism when Danny attempted to add everything together all at once, particularly when he tries to dump the unwashed rice in, which is apparently a sin.

"Honestly Danny, we aren't going to fix this problem in one session. As long as you want, I wouldn't mind giving you more cooking lessons," Rio offers hesitantly as he wipes the counters down and finishes cleaning up.

"I'd like that. Currently the extent of my cooking knowledge is sticking microwave dinners in the microwave, I'd like to be able to make something besides coffee and microwave meals, Jazz'll be happy about that anyways," Danny jokes and Rio smiles.

"Are you alright having dinner with everyone tonight? I know Alfred told you that it's a welcome dinner, but you don't have to go if you aren't feeling up to it," Rio offers and Danny smiles, hiding a yawn behind his hand.

"No, I'm good. I guess I'm just not used to being away from Amity," And it was true. Danny was feeling the lack of natural ambient ectoplasm in the air. It wouldn't be any danger to him, and easily supplemented with a few quick trips to the ghost zone. He would maybe need to eat more and get an hour or two more sleep, and that's if he didn't decide to visit the zone.

Still, it was interesting being outside Amity. While they had left before for short trips, the GAV was always equipped with something powered by ectoplasm that he could siphon off of it if he needed to. Maybe he would have to collect some ectoplasm when he goes to the zone next. Then again, maybe bringing slightly radioactive material into Wayne Enterprises wasn't a really great idea.

"I do have a question though, can I get access to a lab tonight?" Danny asks, shifting around on the stool.

"I mean, sure? But you don't even have to start until Monday, it's Thursday," Rio tries to suggest and Danny laughs.

"It's a personal project. I just figured that Wayne Enterprises would like me working in a lab instead of my room, less chance of accidents," Danny explains himself and Rio nods.

"Yeah, they're fine if you bring theoretical work in, but they don't exactly like physical builds. What are you thinking of making?" Rio asks, and at this point, he's transferring everything to serving dishes. Danny would help, but thought that Rio wouldn't be that appreciative of either him getting in the way with his wheelchair or using telekinesis.

"I don't know, but it'll be interesting. I might work on a phone I've been tinkering with, I can't get it to work with what I've been working with at home," And it was true, he was trying to figure out how to get the Fenton phone to actually work, it had never worked consistently and sometimes it just turned to a brick for no apparent reason.

"I just, a phone? We've kind of already got that," Rio points out and Danny snorts.

"It would be more accurate to call it a communication device, not exactly a phone. It's supposed to be able to be used anywhere, anytime with an almost unlimited power source. I still haven't gotten it to stop exploding or catching fire. That or turning to mush," Danny shudders, remembering when the ectoplasm he attempted to bond to it had simply dissolved it instead of powering it. It was too similar to the clones destabilizing than what he was comfortable with, even if it was only a phone.

"Really? Should you really have been messing around with it if it was unstable?" Rio asks and Danny shrugs.

"No, but lab safety has always been more of a suggestion in my house,"

"Well, not here. Before you even start in on the lab, there's about a three-foot stack of paperwork you need to sign and ready, acknowledging that you know and will follow lab safety. We are not in the business of making any more rouges," Rio turns serious and Danny nods.

"Yeah, I've had enough lax lab safety to last a lifetime. I know better than anyone else that lab safety is important if you don't want weird shit happening," If you could call dying and then coming back half alive 'weird shit'.

"Well that's good to know, although I do have to wonder what lab would allow your parents carelessness," Rio wonders aloud, grabbing a set of glasses from the cabinets.

"It wasn't a lab run by people, it was our basement, hence the sample contaminated food. They liked using the upstairs fridge to hold samples once storage in the basement ran out," Danny misses Rio's look of horror in exchange of watching the elevator doors open, a group of people streaming out.

These were the people Danny expected to see. Dressed in more formal clothes, although pretty laid back in jeans and various polos. There were four of them, three men and one woman. Danny tried to take them in, but once everyone started talking at once, he became a little lost.

"Hey Danny, nice to meet you, I'm Angela," The woman says.

Soft, honey brown hair tied up in a bun with burgundy glasses. Forest green eyes and a motherly look, Danny couldn't help but feel comfortable around her. She was maybe in her late forties, and dressed in a sensible set of pants and long sleeves.

"Nice you meet you as well, I'm excited to be able to work here," Danny says and everyone laughs.

"There's no need to be so formal, we know you're just a kid," Angela says and Danny can't help but pout.

"I'm not a kid, I bet I've done loads of things you haven't," And it was true, he doubted they had fought ghosts and ran an entire dimension after school and on the weekends.

"You're barely eighteen, they had to hold off on the internship for a few months before you were actually of age. Not that I think they minded, I think they would have given you almost anything to get you to come here instead of going somewhere else," Angela mutters the last part.

"I'm sure they were over-exaggerating. Although I am sorry if I've made any kind of trouble, I'd have my friend make me older, but I'm pretty sure there's a limit to his hacking capabilities," Although they haven't exactly found it yet.

"Trust me, kid, the way the higher-ups were talking, you're a bonafide genius," One of the guys, a blonde-haired man comments, chuckling.

"I got C's and D's, not exactly genius level," Danny grumbles, still remembering the hell courses he had to go through to actually graduate high school, that somehow let him graduate early of all things. Once he made the decree that no one was supposed to bother him during certain study hours, he actually got better grades, not that the damage to his GPA was undone.

"Yeah, but I'm pretty sure that there were extenuating circumstances involved there. Look kid, I get that you don't think much of yourself, but the board obviously saw something in you if they not only hired you but waited until you could actually come. I wouldn't be surprised if you were working on bigger projects within a week," Angela pipes in, sitting down at the table.

Danny smiles and manages to plop himself down from the bar stool back into his chair, rolling over to the table and getting himself situated in the empty space without a chair. Everyone ends up sitting around him and food is passed around the table, everyone serving themselves up.

"So, how are you liking it so far? I know you've just got here, and haven't really gotten to experience a lot, but do you think you'll like it?" Angela asks and Danny nods.

"Yeah, it's really interesting here! Since Wayne is involved with a lot of different avenues, I think this is the best place I can be. Besides, you work with both Batman Inc. and the JL," Danny says excitedly and half the table chuckles while the other half smile.

"So you're interested in superheroes?" Rio asks and Danny nods, figuring it couldn't hurt.

"Yeah, they just do so much, more than I could ever hope to do. I think that if I could manage to help them, then maybe I could in a way help as well," Danny softly suggests and the table falls silent.

"I think that's an amazing reason. And you never know, maybe you could become one, it's a new age after all," Rio says and Danny laughs.

"I wouldn't put myself on the and level as the Justice League, at most I would be a small-town protector," Danny is struggling not to slip up and start laughing. He couldn't imagine what he would do if they found out the truth about him. It would be odd, to leave Amity alone and without him. At least he knew his rogues wouldn't tear the place up too much with Valerie, Sam, and Tucker to watch the town.

"You never know, I hear Signal was a regular guy before his metagene activated," One of the darker-haired guy's comments and Danny shrugs.

"Yeah, his metagene, which I'm pretty sure I don't have. If I did, it probably would have activated with all the shit I've been through," Dannys thinks with a smile.

"Yeah, you've had a few accidents, right? We were given the basics in case you had any medical emergencies while working with us," the blonde-haired guy asks and Danny nods, already feeling sound in the cover story he had come up with Sam and Tucker.

"You're right. When I was fourteen, I was in a lab accident and ended up electrocuted, I'm pretty sure I was dead for a good five minutes. That left me with some nerve damage as well as neurological, I kind of became obsessed about certain things and everything else fell to the wayside. My left hand still sometimes bothers me, I guess I don't have to worry about tripping anymore," Danny tries to joke, patting his chair.

"Then a few months ago, there was an attack on our town. Our local hero Phantom stopped it, but I ended up buried beneath some rubble with a broken back. I had an incomplete spinal cord injury and while I have most of my feeling, I don't have a lot of strength in my legs, so I have the chair. It isn't the best, but I like to think that with enough physio and healing, I could recover a bit more," Danny explains, fiddling with his silver wear.

"I think that's great, and who knows, Wayne Enterprises are making advancements every day in medical technologies, maybe there will be a breakthrough," Angela offers and Danny forces himself to smile.

"Yeah, maybe. Hey um, not that there's anything wrong, but I think I'm going to head to my room. Dinner was amazing Rio, thanks," Danny says, putting his utensils down and wheels back from the table before turning around, practically zooming out of the commons area and back to his room, thoroughly overwhelmed.

He feels slightly bad for bailing, but in all honesty, he was edging towards this for a while, probably halfway between Amity and Gotham. It was way too much all at once. Stick him in a ghost fight and he'll be fine, but ask him to be in a social setting and he'll run for the hills.

No, even before the portal accident, Danny had prefered perfecting his parents inventions and video games over people, Tucker and Sam being the rare exceptions. 

Chapter 4: Apologies

Danny remained in his room for the next two days, practically hiding. Well, there was no practically about it, he was hiding. He had enough of social interactions, thank you very much. And while he understood why, and had consented to it, he really wished that they hadn't exactly shared his medical information with everyone. While he understood that in case he had one of his 'episodes' they needed to know, it still felt a little personal. Then again, the last thing he needed was another subject who came to him when he managed to scare them to death with his seeming corpse when he went off as Phantom.

When he finally did emerge from his room, the common area was empty, not a soul in sight. Even though he could go days, even a week or two without food, it still wasn't pleasant going so long without food, especially when he doesn't have as much ectoplasm to feed off of. So he was really surprised to open the fridge to see various plates wrapped in saran wrap with post-it notes with his name on them. Grabbing the first one, he pulls it out to see some kind of a stew, or more accurately, a curry based on the smell and the fact that there was rice with it. He felt bad, there was a plate from every meal with his name on it. They had saved him a plate from every single meal after meeting him once and having him run out on them.

He peels the rest of the saran wrap off and places the plate into the microwave to reheat with damp eyes, sniffling. It felt strange having someone other than Jazz care for him. Even his parents didn't do this. They were always too busy. When Danny was hurt, or sick, it was always Jazz who took care of him, who stayed home from school when he was too sick to stay alone, because his parents in the basement certainly didn't count as supervision.

So it was strange, having someone, probably multiple someone's, care about him that way, complete strangers at that, was certainly an unknown situation. He had no clue how to show his appreciation. But he couldn't really do anything at the moment. He started work tomorrow and he really didn't want to end up passing out. It became more and more apparent as time went on that Gotham wasn't going to feed him what he needed without tapping into the power of negative emotions. And he really didn't want to do that, so he was left to either figure out how to get himself ectoplasm or eat normal food. And since he wasn't figuring out how to get ectoplasm in the next 24 hours, normal food and sleep it was, as boring as that was.

"Danny," Danny jumps in surprise, his chair jumping off the floor and Danny forces it back down.

Turning around, Danny finds a sleep-deprived-looking Rio. He was dressed similarly as too when Danny first met him, although it doesn't look like he's slept since then.

"Rio, I-"

"Danny, I am so sorry. I know we pushed too hard, I'm sorry we made you so uncomfortable," Rio apologizes, surprising Danny.

"What? No! I really shouldn't have lost it like that. I know it was rude," Rio laughs at Danny's words.

"You did what you had to in order to protect yourself, don't blame yourself for doing what you needed to do to keep yourself safe. We honestly get it, good in the labs we are, in social situations, we are not," And now it's Danny's turn to laugh.

"I get that. Um, is there anything I can do for you all? I know I haven't been the best person to deal with so far," Danny offers and Rio shakes his head.

"No, you've done nothing wrong. We get it, we honestly do," Rio tries to reassure, but gets the feeling he misses the mark when Danny frowns, seeming deep in thought.

"I've got to go back down to the labs, I've got a time test running that I need to stop and analyze the data for. Feel free to use the common space if you want, if not, no big deal," Rio says, quickly grabbing a granola bar and nearly running out of the kitchen.

It was clear from the groups limited interaction with Danny that he was enhanced. Either through the more traditional lab accident method, or the newer, almost more terrifying method of spreading being more with the metagene, just waiting for it to activate. His eyes blazed just a little too bright, the air was just a little too cold around him. And when he frowned like he did at Rio, the air just dropped colder. Rio wasn't exactly afraid of Danny, from what he had observed, Danny was sweet, and kind, if him feeling bad about taking care of himself indicated anything. But it didn't change that fact that a chill went up Rio's spine, it didn't change the fact that all he wanted to do was run as far away from him as he could get. Because Rio had the feeling that when Danny eventually lost it, anyone in the blast radius would be obliterated. So yes, while Rio wasn't exactly afraid of Danny, he was afraid of what he could do, if provoked.

But Rio couldn't even guess what could cause that. Because he didn't really know a single thing about Danny. He knew that he came from a small town, he knew that he had an uncanny resemblance to Bruce Wayne. He knew that the accident that put him in the wheelchair wasn't the only accident he had been involved in. I mean, you couldn't exactly blame Rio for not knowing, he had only interacted with Danny for maybe an hour, but it still was somewhat unsettling. Rio didn't even want to think of what Mr. Wayne's reaction to Danny would be. 

So, if Rio ran out of the kitchen to escape Danny's upset presence, you couldn't blame him, right?

 

 

*****************************

 

Watching Rio flee the kitchen, Danny sighs. He knew he had a strange presence, even more unsettling for those who do not have any experience with Amity or ghosts of any kind. It also appeared as if Danny had to work on reigning in his presence, judging by the slight frost covering the armrests of his chair. 

"Damnit," 

 

Chapter 5: Late Night Lab Nights

Three days later finds Danny in the engineering labs around two in the morning, the majority of the lights shut off, save for the lamps on Danny's workbench. If you were to walk into the room as it was, a chill would wind up your spine and your mind would tell you to run. The room was pitch black, a lone figure seated at a table, face lit with green light, casting shadows that almost seemed to move. It was exactly what Tim Drake-Wayne walked in on. 

It was only observing Jason, with his particular brand of otherness, that allowed Tim to walk through the labs and up to the lit station, taking note of the strewn-about pieces of what looked like a Wayne phone laying around, certain parts glowing an eerie green. 

Now that he was closer, he could actually take stock of the boy sitting at the table. Dressed in what looked like pajamas, pitch black hair ruffled and out of place, eyebags larger than his own, and an intense look of concentration on his face, Tim could almost guess what he looked like when he was on one of his binges. 

"What do you need? The labs are closed to other departments now," The boy questions, not looking up from his project. 

"I could ask the same of you, you are currently in the labs after hours," Tim rebukes, crossing his arms in slight amusement but majority in concern. 

"I had a breakthrough, figured you wouldn't want this done in the private rooms," The boy says, gesturing to the disassembled phone. 

"And why the glow-in-the-dark paint? I'm pretty sure you have enough light," Tim tries to joke, but can't help the curl of fear when he notices how eerily similar the color is to that of the Lazarus Pits. 

"Not paint, I'm a little busy," The boy gestures with a soldering iron and Tim snorts. 

"You wanna look up for a second?" Tim asks, fighting a grin. 

The boy does, catches sight of him, freezes, and seems to struggle to reboot his brain as he struggles to take in the new information he was given. 

"Mr. Drake-Wayne, I am so sorry! But um, what are you doing here?" Danny questions in confusion. 

He was wildly out of his depth at the moment. He had only been allowed into the lab earlier in the day, after hours of paperwork and safety briefings. And then he woke up in the middle of the night with a brilliant idea of how to get the Fenton phones to work, wheeled himself down to the labs, and got to work, disregarding anything and anyone else.  He did not expect anyone at two in the morning, let alone the co-CEO of the company. Sue him, he was slightly sleep deprived and more focused on the Fenton phone than anything else at the moment. 

"I sometimes utilize this set of labs for my own projects when I either run out or do not have sufficient materials. I thought that now would be a good time to come, so as not to disturb anyone, but well..." Tim trails off, looking at Danny pointedly. 

"Oh! Sorry! Danny Fenton, new intern. I guess I figured the same, that I wouldn't be bothering anyone," It is at this point that something occurs to him and he attempts to subtly hide what he was doing before, attempting to hide the green glow. Now didn't that scream suspicious?

"What are you working on?" Tim asks, trying to peer closer. 

"An old project I've been working on for a while. It's...finicky. Boy am I glad for the supplies here," Danny motions towards a few blackened and burnt phone carcasses sitting off to the side, looking as if the battery had exploded. 

"Jesus, what are you trying to do?" Tim asks, looking closer. 

He wasn't even aware that Wayne phones could explode like that, he distinctly remembers several all-nighters with the development teams making sure it wouldn't happen. So what on earth could Danny be doing that would make them explode without meaning to. 

"Nothing that makes actual sense. The problem is that the two powers are mingling, causing the surge of power," Danny taps the current phone he was working on with his finger. 

Tim watches Danny work for a moment, fusing parts and ripping apart others. He has no clue what Danny's goal is, he's not even sure Danny does. 

"What if you got rid of one of the powers? Then there would be no mingling," Tim suggests, a deep frown on his face. 

Danny freezes, frowns, and proceeds to rip out the battery, diving into a series of mutters Tim couldn't hope to understand. It seems as if Tim had sent him down the rabbit hole again, losing his two am conversation buddy once again to the world of circuit boards and power sources. Sighing, Tim leaves Danny, quickly gathering up his own equipment necessities and leaving before Danny snapped out of his trance again. 

Glancing at Danny again, Tim can't help but shudder. He had fallen back into the quiet of his work, sitting all alone at his table. The green glow was still there, if not even stronger. And his eyes blazed just a little too bright to be natural. While Tim could say he tried, there was always something about metas that rubbed him the wrong way. He had long gotten used to Duke, he was his brother after all, but the sense of other always remained. He knew, logically, that the only thing that seperated him and any metas was the singular metagene. But if Tim thought Duke was other, then Danny was on a whole other level. He also knew that he would be doing his best to avoid any more two am visits alone with Danny. The chilled air around him and his blazing blue eyes were just a little too much, at least without actually being necessary. 

 

**************************************

 

The actual morning found Angela gently shaking Danny awake after numerous unsuccessful attempts at calling his name. Angela couldn't help but breathe a sigh of relief when Danny actually woke up, her racing heart calming. If Danny had one of his episodes without anyone there, it wouldn't have been good. And in the way that it looked as if he was barely breathing...well, Angela was more than thankful when Danny opened his bleary eyes and regarded her with an unimpressed look. 

"Wha?" Danny slurs out, rubbing his face. 

"Did you stay late, or come down early?" Angela asks with a soft frown on her face. 

Danny blinked up at her and shrugged, rearranging some of the tech laid out on his workbench. A personal project if she had to guess, given the fact that it had nothing to do with the minor hydraulic supports he was given to work on the day before. 

"It was about midnight, take your pick. I actually left for about an hour, so I came back?" Danny seems confused, rubbing the back of his neck while trying to adjust to being awake again, "But I guess it doesn't really matter. I got it working!" Danny then proceeds to practically shove what appears to be a phone in Angela's face. 

And what a phone it was. There were symbols etched on the back that made zero sense, wires peaking out of the port holes, and Angela could swear it was glowing green. Touching it was the last thing Angela wanted to do, afraid that one of the wires would actually shock her. 

"And that is?" She questions, backing away slightly as Danny continued to wave the phone around. 

"A communications device! Able to work anywhere!" Danny proudly cawed, and Angela knew it wasn't her imagination when his cheeks were dusted with a light lime green. 

"We already have those?" Angela questions, puzzled. 

"Well yeah, we have phones, but this is better! No data is needed, no charging, no limit! This thing will work on Mars, not that I've actually gotten a chance to test it," Danny seems to pout at this, frowning. 

"Wait, hold on," Angela pauses his animated explanation, hitting the urgent call button embedded into each of the worktables, designed to call a rapid response from the supervisor. Something that Danny had learned not to press unless he was needed right now. 

"Angela, what's up? Why are you calling Mr. Evans over?" Danny asks, nerves leaking into his voice. 

He may be the high ghost king of the infinate relmes, but even he understood that it wasn't exactly a good thing having a supervisor be called over. 

"I really don't think that's necessary! I filled out all of the approval paperwork, Mr. Evans approved all of the materials I used, and I wasn't counting it towards my hours, it was a personal project!" Danny attempts to reason and Angela snorts. 

"You're not in trouble, but you just made a very big claim seeming very confident. If this actually works, and at this point, that's a huge if, it would be very beneficial to the league, let alone anyone else," Angela says and Danny's mouth pops open in understanding. Angela was the Justice League's liaison.  Oh shit, the Justice League liaison, a set of people that really didn't need to have accsess to ectoplasm, and who certainly shouldn't have any clue that Danny was connected to ectoplasm. 

"Theoretically! No actual proof of concept!" Danny yells, startling the entire lab. 

Without hesitation, he quickly snatches the completed Fenton phone from the workbench and phases it into his thigh, along with the small vile of pure ectoplasm. Instead, he switches out the phone for one of the earlier prototypes, which had quite literally exploded on him, and channeled a little energy into it, making it smoke, pop, and crack, destroying it further. 

"Shit!" He curses, hoping to sound convincing as he aimed a small fire extinguisher at it, coating it in thick, white foam, thus obscuring it. 

"What the hell Danny?!" Mr. Evans yells, storming over into the chaos. 

"Sorry! I got too excited!" Danny blurts out, rubbing the back of his neck. 

"Jesus Danny! I get that it's a great opportunity to work here, but reign yourself in a little, won't you?" Mr. Evans asks and Danny nods quickly, flushing again. 

"Sorry for the commotion everyone," Danny apologizes, raising his voice to allow it to carry to those around him he had disturbed. 

"It's fine kid, just think before you do it again," Angela says, but can't help the frown on her face. 

She was certain that the foam-covered phone currently on the desk wasn't the one that Danny had shoved in her face, but for the life of her, she couldn't figure out where the real one had gone. It was nowhere to be seen, and even with the mess on the desk, Angela had grown to adapt to finding things on cluttered desks. 

"Right! Of course!" Danny chirps out, still looking sheepish. 

Angela sighed. Whatever Danny had done with the phone, she knew that something was up. No one cried out like that unless they were sure they were right, that they were sure that whatever they had was the next big thing. The second Danny got cagey when the Justice League was mentioned sent warning bells off in Angela's head. Maybe it was a bad experience, but that was pure fear she had seen on Danny's face. 

"Say, Danny, how would you feel about visiting the Wayne offices in Metropolis? Mr. Wayne has to attend a meeting with a possible partner on the pump you've been working on. You know that pump better than most of us, and the team that originally designed it...well they're at Lex Corp. now," Mr. Evans asks and Danny perks up, looking excited, and then panicked. 

"Wait, me?! I-I don't think I would be the best to do that," Danny tries to back peddle, wheeling away from the table. 

"Well, if you aren't, then we're screwed. We don't have anyone else," Rio points out, raising their eyebrows. 

"Fine, I guess I'm going to Metropolis," Danny grumbles, already having a feeling that something was bound to go wrong. 

 

Chapter 6: Metropolis Day 1

Notes:

Hi everyone! I have no clue where I want this story to go in the one aspect of Danny's disability. I've been trying to decide if I should make Danny be able to walk again with the help of Tim developing a chip like Falicity Smoke in Arrow, still disabled to a degree, maybe using crutches, or have him remain in his wheelchair. I want him to 'get better' but I've also heard from people that they really appreciate Danny being disabled, both as something they can identify with, and also because they haven't seen him written this way. Below is a link to a Google form that I would love to hear your opinions on.

https://forms.gle/r1pD5pdo19NtcKoG6

Danny wasn't exactly thrilled to be in his current position. That happened to be sitting in the lobby of a hotel, listening to the manager apologize and tell him that the room that was supposed to be for him, the very wheelchair-accessible room, wasn't actually available due to Superman crashing into the building a few months prior and them not getting a chance to fix it yet. 

"I don't understand why its even listed on your website if it's a current construction sight," Danny grumbles, perhaps unfairly taking his frustration out on the man. 

"We do have an accessible room-"

"No, you don't. You have a construction sight. I'm tired, and pissed off, and swear I can feel every nerve ending in my body. Just fucking tell me you don't have a room for me and let me find another hotel," Danny snaps, struggling to keep his eyes an even, unglowing blue. 

"We do hav-" 

"Angela, can you please hook my bag on the hook on the back of my chair?" Danny interrupts the frankly stupid man.

"Sure, but I'm sure we can figure this out," Angela says while placing Danny's duffle bag on the back two hooks of his chair. 

"I looked at the rooms online here, my chair won't fit. There's another hotel a few blocks down, I'll get a room there," Danny insists, starting to move his chair back. 

And then the hotel manager had the audacity to grab onto the back of it, halting his movement. This is when Danny loses control of the very fine thread of his sanity, eyes flashing a toxic green, reflected in the eyes of the manager and briefly illuminating his horrified face. Danny slams his eyes closed but can tell that at the very least Angela saw, if he could judge by the gasp he heard from her general direction. 

"Let go, now,"

Surprisingly, it wasn't Danny who spoke, but rather Bruce Wayne. And he sounded rather pissed off, a supposedly rare occurrence for the playboy, but then again, Danny didn't know much about him. Right now though, he seemed thoroughly pissed off, glaring at the manager who still had his hands on the handles of Danny's wheelchair. 

"If you will just listen sir-" the man tries to wheedle, and Bruce seems to snap. 

"No, you will listen. Take your hands off him and cancel our rooms. You will be having a complaint filed against you and your hotel, both for grabbing Mr. Fenton and for falsely advertising that you had an accessibility room available. We will be leaving now, in the future, I suggest you brush up on your manners and your knowledge of the ADA Act. A hotel this size is required to have more than one room, I would educate yourself on the law. Danny, would you like me to grab your other bag?” Bruce asks and Danny nods dumbly, not understanding. 

“Excellent. Do you want to walk the few blocks or have the car take us, I can still see it outside,” Bruce asks and Danny swallows thickly. 

“Walk, it's too much work,” Danny mumbles, thinking back to the extreme buckling the valet had done to secure his chair the first time around in the van, even more than what Alfred had done when picking him up. 

“Okay. Angela, you can stay here if you would like, or you can move hotels, it’s up to you,” Bruce offers and Angela nods, picking up her bag. It seemed as if she would be following them. 

Bruce hesitates for a moment, looking at the handles of Danny’s wheelchair before shaking his head and continuing on his way, motioning for Danny and Angela to follow him. 

“I’m sorry about that Danny, we should have vetted the hotel more,” Bruce apologizes once they reach the outside. 

Danny can’t help his look of surprise, looking up at Bruce from his wheelchair. It was actually kind of rare, as he had found, that someone apologizes for not having accommodation. It was honestly surprising how many people acted like it was some big inconvenience to accommodate to him, even if they really didn’t have to do anything. 

“It's fine, you couldn’t have known. You didn’t have to come with me, I know it isn’t as nice of a hotel,” Danny’s voice is guilty, and he clears his throat. 

“Are you okay? You said you could feel your nerve endings,” Bruce asks and Danny can’t help but smile, rotten mood be damned. 

“Just some phantom pain,” He can’t help the pun that slips in. Bruce makes a questioning noise and Danny laughs. 

“It's from my first accident. I had some nerve and cardiac damage. The nerves between my left hand and heart are pretty much shot but that doesn’t stop them from thinking they’re still burning,” To prove his point, he pokes at his hand roughly, leaving crescent-shaped indents on his skin from his nails. The only thing he feels is the pressure. 

“Are most days like that? I know biomedical is trying to develop something to help nerve pain,” Bruce offers and Danny shrugs. 

“Depends on the day, sometimes stress. But I still wouldn’t be a good candidate, too much radiation,” 

Bruce can’t help the surprise he feels at that statement, hoping that Danny will elaborate. A few seconds after he falls silent, it is apparent that he will not be elaborating. Which makes Bruce worried. Was he working with radiation? Was he radioactive? Was he somehow exposed to radiation and it somehow contaminated him? Bruce’s only reassurance was that Danny hadn’t set off any of the inconspicuous sensors in Wayne tower, one of which he knew alerted him to heightened radiation from a set baseline with allowances for certain events, like the arrival of a certain reporter. 

He…had no idea what to think of Danny. The physical similarities they shared were astounding. The same hair, the same hairline, a similar chin and jaw, and a nose that looked somewhat similar, multiple broken noses included. What was even more suspicious was his eyes. The color may match Bruce’s, but the distance apart, the slant and angle, they were all Martha’s. Maybe Bruce was seeing things, and making connections where there weren’t any, but that didn’t change the fact that as soon as he had a chance, he was grabbing a DNA sample. 

 

***********************************************

While the Charlin wasn’t nearly as famous as the Metropolis Met, nor quite as luxurious, they were much more accommodating. They had accessible rooms and were quick to ask if Danny needed anything else, which he had actually asked, quite embarrassed, for some sort of hot pack for his back, which was apparently acting up more than he let on. With assurances that something would soon be brought up, the three of them were allowed up to their rooms, Bruce of course taking the presidential suite, but also surprisingly reserving both Danny and Angela junior suite rooms, as ridiculous as it was. 

“It’s because we had to change hotels at the last second. Plus we are going to be here awhile,” And Bruce wasn’t wrong. The entire trip was almost two weeks long. Besides, Danny couldn’t argue against more space, he was just surprised that there was a junior suite designed with wheelchair users in mind with handlebars for the bathroom and lowered countertops. 

“Do you need anything else, sir?” A hotel attendant hands off a heating pad, which was still rather warm with the instructions to heat it in the microwave to reheat it. 

“No, thank you,” Not knowing what else to do, Danny hands the attendant a ten-dollar bill, feeling rather awkward. But judging by the man's smile, it is appreciated. 

The man shows himself out, making sure the door shuts behind him. The second he is gone, Danny goes lacks, slumping over in his chair. He was utterly exhausted. The stress of the travel of the day, even if it was only a ferry ride across the bay, in addition to the manager's actions, made everything worse. Danny hadn’t had a chance to consume any of the ectoplasm stored in one of the thermoses, and with being away from Gotham’s ridiculously high concentrations of ectoplasm was draining him further. 

Gotham and ectoplasm together was a surprised, but after some consideration (and consultation with Frostbite), Danny discovered that it was almost as strong as a hotspot as Amity was before the Fenton portal ripped a hole in dimensions and flooded the entire town in the Infinite Realms unique brand of radiation. 

Reaching into his chest, a Fenton thermos is pulled free, sloshing slightly from the liquid ectoplasm held inside. Not bothering with the provided glasses, and knowing the horror stories, Danny drinks straight from thermos, relaxing at the warmth the ectoplasm brought to his body. His version of a hot cup of coffee slid down his throat, warming his body from the inside out, slightly acidic taste burning on the way down. If a normal human were to attempt to drink it, they would be painfully reminded of battery acid. Thanks to the sheer amount of previous ecto contamination Danny and his sister were exposed to, not to mention his own accident, it was closer to a pleasent burn for the both of them. 

“God would they be surprised,” Danny mutters to himself, returning the thermos to his chest. 

He sometimes wondered what ‘normal’ people would do if they were exposed to the insanity that was Amity. After the information blackout was lifted, and Amity citizens were exposed to the outside world, it quickly became apparent that adding their unique brand of crazy wasn’t the best idea. The madmen and women of the world already had enough crazy shit to play with, they did not need ectoplasm and everything that came with it.  

 

 

Chapter 7: Metropolis Day 2

Notes:

Life has been a bitch. But! This is still going to be updated for anyone that is interested! Instead of an every-week thing, it will be updated when I have chapters when the creativity muses bless this humble mortal. Here is a chapter!

Any and all comments are appreciated, and the positive ones really help let me know that someone is reading and enjoying this fanfic.

“My brain’s going to explode,” Danny groans, leaning back in his chair. 

 

Danny had fulfilled his duity for the day, explaining, yet again, the functionality of the pump to a set of high up management, all of whom had no idea of what any of the words coming out of his mouth meant. So yet again, Danny was explaining the functionality using as small of words as possible. The only bright spot of the meetings were the amused smiles Bruce gave whenever the executives asked truely stupid questions. 

 

“Well, lunch breaks here. We can go get lunch and take a break from the stupidity,” Angela reasures, and Danny slumps. 

 

“Can I go on my own? I’ve had enough of people for right now,” Danny asks, and Angela nods, an understanding look on her face. 

 

“Do you need any help?” Angela asks and Danny shakes his head. 

 

“Nah. I just wanna look around for a bit. Find something tasty to eat,” Danny jokes and Angela looks worried. 

 

Danny could understand. Angela had somewhat been asked to be his right hand, someone to assist in the pumps dementration. While Danny could do a lot, lifting five gallon pales without ghostly assistance was not part of that. While the executives didn’t understand a word of the explanation of how the pump worked, they loved watching what exactly it could pump. Apparently, the capacity and strength of the pump was revolutionary. Danny knew it was strong, but he helped finish it by basing it on the pumps he helped build for moving ectoplasm. His reasoning being, if it can stand up to ectoplasm, it could handle anything. 

 

“Be careful, Danny. Big blue might be here to protect the city but that doesn’t mean he’s able to stop everything that happens,” Bruce warns and Danny snorts. 

 

“Don’t worry, I’ll be fine. I know the chair doesn’t inspire confidence, but I guarantee that if anyone bothers me, they’ll be the one walking away hurt,” If Danny’s personal upgrades were worth anything, it was better then anything Bruce or Angela could do. 

 

“Alright. You’ve got three hours until the next meeting. Take this and go get yourself something nice, you’ve earned it from dealing with the bullshit of dumb people,” Bruce suggests, handing over a wad of cash. Danny dumbly takes it, not knowing what else to do. He had no idea what type of lunch Bruce thought he was getting, but over a hundred dollars seemed a bit excessive. 

 

“Thanks? I’ll bring back the change,” And with that, Danny rolls away before Bruce can object. 

 

It doesn’t take long for Danny to make his way out of the nondescript office building emerging onto the busy sidewalk below. It was an odd place to be, a busy street. Sure, Amity had their fair share, but it had been so long since he was last on a busy sidewalk. During his time in Gotham, the full week he had before coming to Metropolis, he spent the majority of his time in Wayne Tower, the only time he was on the street was when he arrived and when he left for Metropolis. It was a nice change for once, being an anonymous person around hundreds of other anonymous people. 

 

It felt nice to just be able to breath, to pretend that for one moment, he was any normal person going out for lunch. That he wasn’t holding the weight of an entire dimension on his shoulders, that he was constantly torn in two, that he both had a duty to the human world he came from and the infinite realms where he ruled. It was a nice fantasy, but an impossible reality. 

 

It was times like this that Danny wondered if Aquaman and Wonder Woman felt anything similar. Aquaman was king of Atlantis but had also sworn to protect the world as a member of the Justice League. Wonder Woman was the same. Both had their homes, but both also swore to protect others, sometimes the two sides being at odds. How did they manage it? How did they decide which side to choose? 

 

Because while he knew he needed to protect the human world from rough ghosts, he also knew that most ghosts were unfairly targetted and attacked by humans. So which side does he pick? Did he have to? Was there any possibility of peace between the two sides?

 

Because he wasn’t convinced. Humans will always struggle against death, and death will always want to claim the living when their time came. It was an eternal struggle between eventuality and denial. 

 

“Are you alright?” 

 

Danny startles, realizing that he had stopped in the middle of the sidewalk, causing others to go around him. The man who had posed the question was standing in front of him, looking down in deep confusion and concern, the emotions radiating from him stronger then any of the others on the side walk. His voice was rich and accented, and felt comforting. The sharp bones and sweat building on his dark skin concerned Danny, if anyone needed to be asked if they were ok, he would have guessed it was the man. He looked exhausted and like he was struggling to stand up straight. 

 

It is at this point that Danny notices his emotions projected, spilling out and affecting those around. Danny wouldn’t be surprised if the man was especially empathetic and Danny’s poor control of his emotions were affecting him. Danny immediately felt bad before forcefully pulling his emotions back, keeping a barrier between him and anyone else. Almost immediately, the man relaxes and the tension he carried melted away. 

 

“Uh, yeah. Sorry about that Mr…” 

 

“John, John Jones. It is perfectly alright, I can understand being overwhelmed by your emotions from time to time. I am just glad that you…seem to have it under control now,” The man’s speech was halted, as if unsure what to say. 

 

Danny could understand. There had been a few times he helped others overcome a panic attack and had to explain how exactly he knew they needed help, especially when he wasn’t in eyesight and had sought them out, running through breathing and grounding exercises until they felt better. Somehow always knowing which exercise was best for the individual person. 

 

“Well, thank you for checking in. I know not a lot of people can notice and if they do, they don’t really care, it’s nice to see someone taking time and checking in on someone,” Danny remineses, frowning.

 

He sometimes considered if the Fenton’s…unique…brand was checked in on, if his life would have gone the way it did. There wasn’t any chance his life would have been the same if someone, literally anyone, would have stepped in any time before his final fight with Pariah Dark. A teacher, another parent, social services, literally anyone could have stepped in and changed things, or at least tried. But no, they chalked it up to the Fenton’s being Fenton’s. That it was just their unique brand that they brought to Amity Park. 

 

“You know, you remind me of my niece,” Mr. Jones mentions and Danny smiles. 

 

“I bet she’s a great girl. I uh, I hate to roll, but I’ve only got an hour before I have to be back at the office,” Danny apologies and Mr. Jones smiles. 

 

“Oh? Is it bring your kid to work day? Out to get some lunch for your parent?” 

 

Danny can’t help it, and he turns bright strawberry red. 

 

“Um, I’m actually working? I’m eighteen and interning at Wayne Enterprises,” Danny explains and it is Mr. Jones’ turn to look embarrassed, although he doesn’t turn bright red. 

 

“I am so sorry,” 

 

“It’s fine, I haven’t looked my age since I was fourteen. I really do have to go though,” Danny apologizes, giving a smile. 

 

John Jones is left to stare dumbly at the boy as he wheels himself away. The entire situation had thrown him for a loop. First, the boy was projecting his emotions to the entire city, practically acting as a beacon of confusion and confliction. Then, when John went to check if he was alright, all of the emotional broadcasting ended and John couldn’t feel a thing from him, even when he was purposefully looking. 

 

A very odd boy, to go from an unhuman amount of broadcasted emotions to absolutely nothing. It distinctly reminded him of when Megan would do something wrong, blast her guilt on accident, and then immediatly cut it off. John wasn’t one to question and demand ones status of being human without any enhancements. But he was rather curious. It wasn’t often he met someone with such emotional capabilty and he was certainly one to watch, if not just for the effects he could have on others accidentally. 

************************************

Once he had a handle on himself, Danny realized how long he had been sitting in the middle of the sidewalk. His lunch hour had been drastically reduced and he was left to duck into the nearest place that seemed to sell ready made food. Judging by the sign in arabic and the delicious smells coming out of the open door, it was a middle eastern based restaurant, something that was still somewhat of a novelty for Danny. 

 

Amity Park wasn’t all that known for being culturally diverse, the most nonamerican restaurants being a small Mexican restaurant and the fancy Italian place only people like the Manson’s ate at. The rest was good old American food, mainly the Nasty Burger. Danny had spoiled himself by ordering in a number of food from different restaurants from Gotham, but it had truely been forever since he went into restaurant other than the Nasty Burger. 

 

Besides, the restaurant was actually open to the street beside the small lip of the doorway. It certainly made getting in and out a lot easier. 

 

Wheeling himself inside brought another level of confusion. While he had originally assumed that it was purely a restaurant, he found that it was actually a grocery store with a dining section off to the side. The atmosphere was warm and welcoming, heightened by the delicious smells and easy music most likely in Arabic. If Danny focused, he could make a few words out before his attention was grabbed by the food yet again. 

 

The store was empty besides the man behind the glass shield, already serving a customer. Both talked easily with each other, an air of familiarity hung between as they both chatted, Danny’s enhanced hearing catching facts about boyfriends and swords, whatever the hell that meant. Danny waited for the previous customer to finish and pay, nodding as the customer passed him and wheeled himself up to the counter. 

 

“Hello hello! What would you like?” The man behind the counter asks jovially, and Danny feels a tickle in his throat and practically groans. 

 

“Whatever you would have, and two coffees?” The foreign words tumble from his lips, almost tying his tongue as they were ripped out unbidden. 

 

When Danny met someone new, ghost speech tended to kick in, demanding he speak in their native tongue or whatever language they were most comfortable in. It could be controlled, but some days it slipped beyond his control. The stupidity of the potential partners was obviously affecting Danny’s brain more than he had assumed. 

 

While Danny was happy to be accommodating and speak in someone's preferred language, it also created a situation like this, mainly confusion on his conversation buddies' part. Judging by the surprised look on the man's face, he had thoroughly startled the man, who was somewhat frozen while staring at him, blinking in a stunned stupor. 

 

“Of course! It is not often someone comes in here speaking Arabic. Where did you learn? Your accent is amazing,” The man responds, the Arabic words automatically translating to English in Danny’s head. 

 

“Self study? With talking with friends?” Danny fumbles for an excuse, knowing that in no way shape or form could he tell the nice man he was half dead and thus could understand any language as long as a single speaker had died. 

 

“Ah! Your Arabic is very good! You have good friends. You must practice a lot. What are you doing today? You seem dressed up,” The man comments, grabbing a to go box and starting to load it with food. 

 

“I have a set of meetings for an internship. I worked on a pump and need to explain how it works and how effective it is. I-” Danny was going to finish, but was rudely interrupted as a man in a ski mask rushes through the door, gun in hand. 

 

Now, don’t get Danny wrong, he understood just how dangerous guns could be, earlier in his life if he wasn’t shot at at least five times a week he got antsy, but he couldn’t help but be exasperated. It felt like grocery store hold-ups were so last season. 

 

It seemed as if the man behind the counter thought the same as he simply sighed, already looking beyond done with the situation at hand. Danny could relate, all he wanted was some food and coffee. He could guess that the man behind the counter only wanted to do his job. 

 

“Get the register hold man! Stay there if you know what’s good for your, kid,” The robber demanded, swinging the gun around wildly before resting it on Danny, who decides to make his move. 

 

With a twist of his hand, the gun is crushed and twisted, making it an absolutely useless piece of junk. The (attempted) robber's hands are yanked behind his back with another twist, and with a clenched fist, shackles of ice hold his hands there. Danny raises his eyebrows and the man is flung back onto a chair, held in place by yet more ice.  

 

A stunned silence descends onto the restaurant, the man behind the counter because he has no clue what to say, the robber already entering shock at the quick takedown, and Danny who has nothing to say. 

 

“Huh, guess the wind picked up some chill. How much for the food and two coffees?” Danny asks, hoping to ignore the inevitable questions. 

 

The man behind the counter blinks a few times before shrugging and continuing to fill the takeout box. 

 

“$10.78”

 

Danny pulls out his wallet and his own money, leaving Bruce’s money alone. He didn’t want the man to have to break a hundred, besides, while Danny appreciated Bruce’s generosity, he could pay for his own food. 

 

“Should uh, should I call someone?” The man asks, pointing towards the tied-up robber who still sat still and silent in the chair Danny put him in. 

 

“Probably, yeah. Do you mind waiting until I leave and saying you don’t know who I am?” At this, the man smiles before turning around and filling two to-go cups full of coffee. 

 

“I do not know you. You are a blue-eyed, black-haired boy who speaks Arabic. A robber walked in while you were ordering. Suddenly, the gun was gone and he was tied up. You remained in your wheelchair the entire time and then ordered. I exchanged the food for your money and you left because you were running late,” The man says, sliding over the food while Danny gives him a wad of cash. 

 

“Thanks! And I really am running late!” 

 

Somehow, Danny manages to carry both drinks and his food while wheeling out of the restaurant, already speeding back to the headquarters where the earlier meetings were held. The man wasn’t wrong, he was going to have to rush if he wanted to finish his food and coffee and manage to deliver Bruce’s as well. 

 

Thankfully, after the fiasco of the hotel, Bruce made sure that wherever the meetings were easily accessible to Danny, which included ramps and automatic doors. When Danny did make it up to the meeting room, he wheeled himself up to Bruce and offered the coffee. The scent of it seems to catch Bruce’s attention from the paperwork in front of him and he smiles, blindly reaching out for it without looking up. 

 

“ Thank you, son, ” The Arabic words spill out and Danny momentarily freezes before answering back. 

 

“ You’re welcome? ” The puzzlement was clear in Danny’s voice. 

 

While he would expect the man at the restaurant to know Arabic, Danny had no clue Brucie Wayne of all people would know Arabic, although given his biological son and his mother…

 

“I am so sorry, Danny. Damian, my son, often makes me coffee the same way and it was just an automatic response!” Bruce hurriedly explains, looking up at the voice that was not his son’s and a voice that was laid heavily with confusion. 

 

“It’s fine, you seemed rather distracted,” Danny tries to assure, although not really understanding. Bruce’s accent was far better than what Danny would have assumed it to be. 

 

“Yes, well-” 

 

Bruce is cut off by a thunderous roar, and the entire building shaking, dust falling from the ceiling, and lights flickering. It was, sadly, a familiar sound to everyone in the room. It was usually accompanied by a major attack, one that neither Bruce nor Danny were prepared to deal with at the moment, both turning to look at each other, as if looking for answers. 

 

“That…that doesn’t sound good,” Danny remarks and Bruce grimaces. 

 

“No, no it does not,” 

Chapter 8: Metropolis Day 3 (Attack)

Danny, well Danny had no idea what to do. Bruce seems to have taken it upon himself to become Danny’s personal guard, going so far as to practically sprint across the room when Danny couldn’t help but cough at the dust in the air. If Danny were back in Amity, he would have found an excuse to leave the room and then go fight whatever could cause so much damage. But as Danny was painfully reminded, he wasn’t in Amity anymore. 

 

One more annoying thing was that the building they were in had actually competent security. The whole building had been put on lockdown, with no one in or out. It frustratingly made it impossible for Danny to sneak out, and Bruce had noticed. 

 

It didn’t take a genius to notice Danny’s restlessness, Bruce reasoned. Anyone could notice his continuous shifting and frequent glances at the door. Bruce couldn’t help but feel bad. Danny had grown up in a small town away from any superhero craziness. He had never had to deal with rouges, aliens, or men dressed up as bats. He certainly wouldn’t be used to attacks of this level, enough to shake buildings and rain ceiling dust down on them. 

 

“It’ll be fine, Danny. Superman is one of the strongest beings on this planet. He’s one of the best people to fight a threat like this,” Bruce tries to reassure, placing a hand on Danny’s shoulder. 

 

Danny takes a deep shuttering breath and forces himself to smile shakily. 

 

“Yeah, yeah. Kinda weird to not have Phantom around for big things like this,” At this, Danny pauses and glances once again to the door, shifting around nervously once again. 

 

“Um, I know this is really bad timing, but I need to use the restroom,” 

 

Danny certainly seemed nervous, and Bruce had to hold back a smile. There was something impossibly amusing about there currently being an attack going on, and Danny needed to use the bathroom. Biting his lip, Bruce nods. 

 

“I can work that out, wait a second?” Bruce asks and Danny nods in agreement. 

 

Bruce was thankful Danny was giving him something to do. There wasn’t anything Bruce could do in this situation, he left most of his gear in Gotham, and it wasn’t his city in the first place. Not to mention that whoever was attacking was a heavy enough hitter to be causing Superman some trouble, judging by how long the battle was going on. 

 

It took some bargaining and assurances, but Danny was released from the room to use the bathroom. While Bruce had no reason to think anything would go wrong, he trusted the building, his own company helped build it after all, and he certainly trusted Danny. But he couldn’t help but think something was going to go wrong, although he couldn’t exactly justify following Danny to the bathroom. While emotionally dense most of the time, even he could figure out that was a little extreme. 

 

Danny couldn’t help but feel both thankful and apologetic. While he was well-versed in what was about to happen, Bruce, and everyone else, would have no idea of what was going on. Then again, there would most likely be more damage if Danny didn’t ask. There wasn’t really a choice between scaring some people or saving lives. 

 

Wheeling out of the room towards the bathroom, Danny glances behind him once he turns the corner to ensure he was out of sight before changing, the lack of a flash still disturbing him. No one was in sight to be bothered by the truly disturbing sight. Slowly, Danny peeled himself out of his physical body. Shuddering as the last connection was severed. Danny didn’t hesitate from there, the clock ticking. 

 

Although, Danny did take one brief look back at his body, already slumped in the chair, and his vital signs already fading. He knew he had maybe forty-five minutes until his body’s heart rate flatlined, twenty minutes from that until rigor set in. It was at that point that long-term pain set in once he returned to his body, lasting days and even weeks depending on how long past that hard limit he went past. 

 

Weeks of painful tests with Sam and Tucker proved as much. 

 

The point is, Danny doesn’t have time to wonder about what will happen when Bruce or someone else discovers his unresponsive body. Instead, he turns himself intangible and invisible, flying out the nearest wall. 

 

The city directly outside of the building is chaotic but calm enough for Danny to realize that whatever fight may have happened, had moved on. Even if the fighting had moved on, Danny realized there were still people to save. Every other building seems to be on fire in some way, and those not on fire were structurally damaged, the risk of collapse increasing every second. 

 

Focusing, Danny splits into as many clones as he can manage while also keeping each one powerful enough on its own. And while the seven he does manage is less than what it used to be, it’s still six more bodies helping out than otherwise. While past instinct had demanded that he go find the cause of all the damage and beat it into the ground, Danny now understood that the rescue was just as important as the fight. And since it seemed as if Big Blue had the fight handled, Danny would start the rescue operations. 

 

Danny had found that there were a few constants in any rescue operation. Stabilize rescuee, evacuate, and then triage. You couldn’t move someone with a spine injury before stabilizing them, or you would risk paralyzing or killing them. It was at this point that he was endlessly thankful for the emergency response trainings Jazz had sent him. 

 

While Danny, the original, focused on extracting people from buildings, his clones worked on stabalizing structures and putting out fires, and also serving as a traffic control for the dozens of people that were in a safer position out on the street instead of in crumbling buildings. It seemed as if Danny and those in the meetings really had gotten lucky, being one of the only buildings in the area to avoid a majority of damage. 

 

As more and more people were evacuated, it became clear that there was an issue. While the Danny clone he had tasked with traffic control was doing a great job keeping the street mostly cleared, there was the issue of the triage area. The issue was that it was completely overloaded. While it brought immense joy to Danny to see citizens assisting those more heavily injured, it also didn’t make up for any official medical treatment. 

 

There were dozens of red tag-worthy citizens and no clear way how to help them. While he would prefer to send them all to hospitals in the city, he knew there would be hundreds, if not thousands, of other patients. The hospitals are just unable to handle the sheer load of cases. Internally, Danny could see one of two answers, and neither was great, and both would almost completely incapacitate him. 

 

Slowly floating up and fading to visibility, he received gasps from the crowds below, his other clones continuing to rescue and herd the civilians to his makeshift station. Each person he rescued was completely different, but all seemed to be under the same impression, he was a new superhero there to help. It seemed to calm them, so who was Danny to correct them? And technically he kind of was a new superhero to them, no one outside of Amity knowing about him. 

 

“Everyone! Could I please have your attention? The hospitals here are going to be overloaded with patients. If you agree to it, I can send you all to multiple hospitals to receive treatment. That way, each of you will receive prompt and immediate treatment while also not overloading the hospitals here in Metropolis. You would be leaving the city at least but will remain in the country. For those who are unconscious, I will be transporting them regardless, for their own safety. If you agree to the relocation, please gather to the left, those who do not wish to leave, gather to the right. If anyone wishes to not be transported at all, please remain where you are. To reassure those who are unsure, the mode of transportation I will use will be portals, completely safe for all those involved,” Danny’s voice echoed around the street and he was immediately unnerved when almost everyone conscious turned to look at him, shifting restlessly. 

 

Slowly, people make their way to where they felt comfortable. Not surprisingly, most of those who were least injured wondered to the area designated for those who wished to stay. Danny couldn’t blame them. They seemed mostly injury free and even he would be wary about stepping into random portals. 

 

It is at this point that Danny starts feeling the strain of being separated. The almost physical tie connecting him to his body grew tighter and tighter. Danny could add the creating multiple clones reduced his time. Which was logical when he thought about it. 

 

Slowly, Danny gathered his remaining energy, calling back the rest of his clones. It was one of the most extreme things he would be trying. He couldn’t just dump all of them at the same hospital, that would overload them. So he had to divide them across several hospitals, which meant several portals. Not to mention those who didn’t want to leave the city so he had to make portals to hospitals within the city for them. In total, he was left trying to make up to fifteen portals. Already he could tell that it wasn’t going to go well, even if he drew upon the emotions around him. 

 

“I will take care of those unable to move, but I need everyone who has agreed to be transported to move as quickly and safely as possible. There won’t be much time, and I need everyone to work together,” Danny asks and gets nods from those down below. 

 

Instantaneously, he opens the portals. While four of them remained stationary, he moved the rest around to gather those that are unconscious. While Danny would have liked to be more delicate about transportation, he only had the time and energy to simply transport them to the floor of ER waiting rooms, sending a burst of green light to alert anyone who didn’t notice the glowing green portal that there were patients in need. 

 

Already Danny could feel the train of the portals, each one causing more strain on his already strained energy reserves. Slowly, each person either entered the portals or the portals scooped them up. Danny couldn’t even contemplate how constipated he must look, exhaustion dragging at him. 

 

The second the last person Danny had to transport safely got through their portal, Danny released his strained hold on his ghost form and felt himself snap, the line he fought against snapping him back into his body, only to be met with blinding pain. 

****************************************

Bruce knew when Danny didn’t come back within twenty minutes that something was wrong. While he understood that using the restroom may take some time, twenty minutes seemed extreme in an emergency situation. So Bruce felt perfectly justified when he went looking for Danny once twenty minutes passed without Danny reappearing. 

 

And once Bruce found Danny, he couldn’t have been more thankful for his paranoia. Danny was slumped over in his chair, looking lifeless and pale as a sheet. Shouting, Bruce ran forward, desperately looking for a sign of life as he moved Danny from his chair to the floor. Only the extremely shallow and short breaths that barely escaped along with the faint pulse he had convinced Bruce he wasn’t already dead despite the pale color and blue lips Danny supported. 

 

Bruce had no idea what could have happened. The area Danny was found was undamaged and Danny didn’t have any trauma on his body. All Bruce could do was guess that it had something to do with his medical history. Bruce was trained in emergency medicine. Not whatever happened to Danny. All Bruce could do was settle him on the floor, ensure his airway was open, and remove his suit jacket to try and make Danny more comfortable. Bruce knew the steps to take, but it didn’t make him feel any less helpless. It didn’t change the fact that Bruce had to wait for emergency services to arrive before Danny could receive help. 

 

Just when it seemed as if Danny had stabilized, his breathing shuddered once, twice, and then stops, and when Bruce searches for a pulse, he can’t find one. Quickly and efficiently, Bruce removes the suit jacket from under Danny's head, tilts his head back, and starts compressions, calling out for an AED. 

 

“Danny, I swear to god you are going to kill me,” Bruce pants, unable to hold back a wince when he feels Danny’s ribs break under his hands. 

 

Danny reminds Bruce too much of Jason. Too small, a baby face. Even if Jason came back, he wasn’t the same. The fragility of Danny, how he shouldn’t be lying on the floor, Bruce artificially pumping his heart. It reminded Bruce too much of the night Jason died. When Jason stopped being a kid when he died at the hands of a madman. 

 

“Here, I’ve got the AED. Keep going and I’ll get his shirt off,” Angela demands, AED in hand. 

 

Working together, Bruce continues compressions and rescue breaths while Angela first opens and sets up the AED. Taking the pair of scissors in the AED kit, she cuts away Danny's shirt before stopping suddenly, staring at his chest. Bruce doesn’t stop his compressions, but there is hesitation when he sees what Angela does. 

 

Danny’s entire chest is covered in scar tissue. Everything from barely visable nicks to fist sized patches of burn tissue. If Bruce was forced to guess as to what made them, he would say it was from some sort of energy weapon. What concerned Bruce was both the amount of injuries, and the fact that it looked like they were spread out over years. His only consildation was the fact that the newest looked to be about a year old. 

 

“Get the patches on, we can worry about this once we get his heart beating again,” Bruce snaps and ignores Angela’s hurt expression. Danny’s heart wasn’t beating and the only thing keeping him alive was the compressions and rescue breaths Bruce was providing. 

 

It was clear Angela had training, as was standard for all those who worked in the labs at Wayne Enterprises. She managed to get Danny’s shirt out of the way, attach both pads in the correct way, and then connect them to the AED in under thirty seconds, even with her brief pause at the surprise at seeing the damage to Danny. 

 

“Clear, do not touch patient, analyzing,” Bruce backed off, holding his hands in the air while the machine does what it was designed to. 

 

“Shock advised, stand clear of patient. Administer shock,” Angela makes sure neither are touching Danny before she presses the shock button, Danny’s body twitching and electricity courses through it. 

 

Instantaneously, he jerks up, chest heaving as he tries to make up for the lack of oxygen. Both Angela and Bruce relax marginally, Danny was up and breathing, looking around wildly. Bruce quickly helps stabilize him by grabbing his shoulders and Danny looks to him, eyes wide and surprised. 

 

“So, uh, that just happened,” 

 

Bruce and Angela couldn’t help their looks of incredulation at Danny’s rather blase words. 

 

“Yeah, yeah it did. You do realize that you are going to kill us with stress, right?” Angela asks and Danny nods sheepishly, face flushing. 

 

“I’m sorry. I’d say it won’t happen again, but I can’t exactly control that,” 

 

Angela and Bruce just sigh, the extreme tension both were carrying lifted. While neither were under the impression that Danny was completely out of the woods, the fact that he was joking around seemed to be a good sign. 

Chapter 9: Aftermath

Danny was currently fuming, and unable to do anything about it. 

 

“I don’t care. The whole thing is covered by the Wayne Enterprise insurance coverage since it happened during business dealings. You won’t pay for anything. Please let me just call a helicopter,” Bruce’s voice was kind, if not insistent. 

 

Danny was once again in his chair, broken ribs protesting fiercely as he waited for them to mend. Metropolis had way less ectoplasm than Gotham, and Danny was feelings it, especially with the clones and portals he had already made. He was stuck injured until he got his hands on ectoplasm, which he left in Gotham, or visited the Zone. Gotham’s natural ectoplasm could heal him, but it would only cut the time a normal human would need to heal in half, not fast enough to satisfy Danny. Suffice to say, Danny wouldn’t be leaving home without a small portion of ectoplasm from now on. 

 

And Danny couldn’t even be upset about Bruce’s insistence. If he came across someone in his condition and then had to ‘restart’ their heart, he too would insist on medical intervention beyond what had already been done. But he couldn’t exactly tell Bruce he would be fine once he chugged a vial of interdimensional, radioactive goop. If he had, he was sure he would find himself at a mental institution, if not a dissection table. 

 

But if he was seen by a medical professional, the broken ribs would most certainly be noted, leaving Danny to heal like a human, purposefully cutting his healing off, to keep suspicion off of him, let alone the fact that they might find more than broken ribs. Then again, refusing medical care would cause suspicion as well. Not everyone can just walk, or wheel, away from their heart stopping. 

*******************************

Bruce could not understand Danny’s stubbornness. For god's sake! He was still extremely pale and unsteady, his surely broken ribs clearly paining him as he leans over in his chair, teeth clenched. The attack had ended roughly twenty minutes ago, Clark reporting over secure channels that the Mechatron had been taken out somewhere near the docks, pieces scattered. 

 

It was reassuring to know that the threat was dealt with, but Bruce couldn’t help but continue to feel uneasy. It usually took a few days after an attack at this scale for most heroes in the Justice League to calm down. Not to mention the task of dissecting the remaining debris of the Mechatron, which still had an unknown origin and mission. It would have to be transported to a secure League bunker, only after being thoroughly inspected in the field to ensure there were no security leaks. 

 

“I’m fine, I’m sure there are dozens of other people needing more urgent medical care. If it makes you feel better, I’ll get it checked out when we get back to Gotham,” Danny offers up in placation, in no way placating Bruce’s worry. 

 

“And what happens in the meantime? You have another heart attack?” Angela shoots back, drawing Bruce’s attention back to the fact that she was there to begin with. 

 

The decision to bring Angela along had been the right one. First, to help in demonstrations, but also for the fact that she was the one to bring the AED when Bruce was too busy keeping Danny’s heart beating. And now Danny seemed to want to undo all of their hard work by refusing medical care and possibly having another heart attack. 

 

“I’ve had this happen a few times, there has never been a secondary event. I’ll be fine. Waiting a day or two until going to the doctor will be fine. And I don’t even need to go anyways!” Danny desperately tries to wiggle out of the situation. 

 

“And what happens when something goes wrong in the lab, huh? You have broken ribs! I heard them break! You are in pain, and don’t even try to deny it! I can see you grimacing,” Angela scolds and Danny looks properly chastised. 

 

“We’ll be going back to Gotham today, as soon as transportation is open. I trust that you can make your own decisions. Will you go to a hospital in Gotham?” Bruce asks, desperately looking for any way to convince Danny to see a medical professional, he was entirely too much like all of his sons, insisting he was fine when he clearly wasn’t. 

 

“I’ll go to a clinic, ok? It’s not worth a hospital clinic. I know injuries enough to know they are only fractured. There is literally nothing they can do for me besides telling me to take it easy. I shouldn’t even be going to the clinic,” Danny mutters the last sentence to himself, most likely not intending Bruce and Angela to hear him. 

 

Bruce doesn’t know how to argue against his assessment, knowing it was most likely correct. Compressions would break ribs, but not cause any further damage that would need to be treated. Danny would be in pain for a few weeks, but there was nothing else to do, besides prescribe pain medication. 

 

“And what about your heart? The thing literally stopped beating! Bruce had to fucking breathe for you!” Angela was truly upset, judging by the cursing and yelling coming from the typically mild-mannered employee. 

 

“I know that too. All that has ever happened when I go to the hospital is insistence on taking my medications. Ok? I know it sucks, but they can’t do anything else. It sucks knowing my heart can and will stop at any time, but there isn’t anything I can do!” Danny finishes with a yell, frustration bubbling over. 

 

“And what about a pacemaker? They’ll restart your heart,” Angela asks and Danny shrugs. 

 

“Maybe, but technology doesn’t work well in Amity. And there’s no way any doctor would put in a modified pacemaker. It is what it is, I’ve accepted it. And besides, if I haven’t died yet, I’ll live forever,” Danny tries to joke, but there is a heavy weight to his eyes, dragging to mood down. 

 

Both Anegla and Bruce don’t know how to respond to that, unable to formulate any other argument or persuade him in any other way. It seemed as if medical care wasn’t the best where he was from, but he was right. Neither knew any other option for Danny. Neither were medical professionals, and neither had the experiences Danny had. They would just have to trust him to know enough about himself to make those decisions, he was eighteen afterall. There wasn’t much they could do, and even if he was underage, he held no relation to either of them. They would have no say anyway. 

 

“I know how hard this is on the people around me, I understand the mindset of ‘make it better’. But there isn’t anything to make this better, not now at least. Maybe in the future, maybe if a doctor would be willing to risk their medical license to implant an altered pacemaker, but not now. I’m fine, you guys don’t have to worry for now, I’ll be fine,” Danny tries to reassure them, and while Bruce doesn’t feel great, he knows that there is nothing that they can do about it right now. 

***************************************

Bruce was exhausted, he had somehow arranged transportation back into Gotham through the chaos of the aftereffects of the attack. Everything was originally locked down, with no one in or out who wasn’t there to provide aid. But Bruce had managed to get all three of them, himself, Angela, and Danny, back to Gotham within a few hours. Bruce had managed to convince Angela to go home, and now only Bruce and Danny were waiting for Alfred to come pick them up. 

 

“I can get to a clinic by myself, you know. And I can wheel myself as well,” Danny points out with a smile and Bruce shrugs. 

 

“You have broken ribs, I’m not letting you wheel yourself if you’ll let me do that job. And besides, I know you’ve just survived your first major attack, but Gotham at night is still dangerous,” Bruce insists and Danny relents, lifting his hands off of the wheels. 

 

Even he wasn’t dumb enough to go wheeling around Gotham now. Oh, sure, he could keep himself safe. Out of trouble was another question. Danny had no doubts he could take care of himself on the streets of Gotham, whether he would maintain his position as a somewhat normal intern was the question. He can’t help but doubt that if he had to deal with trouble, that Wayne Enterprises wouldn’t question how he managed that while being in a wheelchair, with broken ribs no less. 

 

“So, do you know any good clinics or should I pull out my phone?” Danny asks, drumming his hands on his armrests, fidgeting in the somewhat chilled air. 

 

“If you agree, there is a clinic my family and I have been going to since Wayne Enterprises helped open it. It’s run by Doctor Leslie Thompkins. She was good friends with my father and has treated me since I was a child. As long as you don’t object to her relationship to me as your employer, she can be trusted. I can understand how you might be wary of the medical system, with your insistence on avoiding it, but Leslie is one of the good ones,” Bruce insists and Danny frowns. 

 

Ever since he went into the portal, and then his stay at the hospital, he did everything in his power to avoid them. Too many false promises or bad experiences lead him to believe that the best medical care he could receive came from a giant yeti. Ever since he had met Frostbite, after his first round with Pariah Dark, Frostbite was the only medical professional Danny truly trusted, the only one he would tolerate. He is not the only one he could trust personally, but who knew how he would function as a halfa. 

 

“If you trust her, I’m sure she’s good,” As long as she doesn’t figure out what exactly is ‘wrong’ with me . 

***********************************************

Bruce could tell Danny was anxious. He hadn’t stopped fidgeting since the idea of Leslie’s clinic was brought up, and only marginally relaxed once Alfred forced a thermos of coffee into his hands, insisting that both get something warm in them once he picked them up. Alfred was, of course, in the van they specially bought for Barbara after her injury. It didn’t take long to get Danny locked in and for Bruce to take up the front passenger seat, stealing glances back at Danny as they drove through Gotham. 

 

Danny certainly didn’t seem happy, but he also wasn’t trying to escape or protesting too hard. At this point, Bruce was convinced he was simply playing along, allowing Bruce to express his worry for him, while also not taking much stock in whatever the outcome of the upcoming appointment would be. 

 

He was too much like his children in that way, likely ignoring medical advice given to them. 

****************************************

When they finally did arrive at Leslie’s clinic, it was well past its usual hours, but Leslie was waiting by the doors to let them in. It wasn’t unusual for her to spend nights at the clinic, prepared for any emergencies that might come her way, and Bruce was yet again thankful for her dedication to her job and her clinic. 

 

Once Alfred has parked, Bruce starts the process of getting Danny out of the car, lowering the ramp, and unlocking Danny’s wheelchair. Danny for once lets him take over the control of his wheelchair, thankfully Danny knew enough to know he shouldn’t be attempting to wheel himself in his condition. 

 

It doesn’t take long for them to arrive at the door to the clinic, and Leslie is already opening the door, a smile on her face as she welcomes them. 

 

“Bruce, it’s been too long, you know you were supposed to have a check-up,” Leslie scolds lightly, trying to lighten the situation. It seems to work as Danny stifles a laugh. 

 

“Yes, well it’s going to have to wait for a while, Danny here needs to get checked out for broken ribs,” Bruce offers up, although he already let her know why exactly they were disturbing her Saturday night. 

 

“Is that right? Well, it shouldn’t take too long. I do want you to know that you can trust me, and I will meet you wherever you are. Bruce, I’ll take over so you can wait in the car, I’ll bring Danny out when we’re done,” Leslie breezes and Bruce is once again reminded why he would always go to her for any medical emergency, she can handle herself and doesn’t take anyone’s shit. 

**************************************************

Danny got the impression that Dr. Thomkin doesn’t take anyone’s shit, judging by her curt dismissal of Bruce and Alfred. While Danny didn’t exactly understand why Dr. Thomkin was so insistent on Bruce not being a part of his visit, he was thankful. He had no desire for Bruce to be questioning why exactly he was avoidant of the X-ray machine, or why it didn’t exactly work on him. 

 

“Alright Danny, I know you’re not exactly happy to be here, so I’m happy to hurry this along. Bruce let me know that you had some sort of episode and he had to do CPR. He thinks he may have broken your ribs,” Dr. Thomkins offers up and Danny nods.

 

“Most likely fractured. The pain isn’t enough to be outright broken. I told him he was overreacting, but he insisted,” Danny shrugs, not seeming all that impressed. 

 

Leslie was thankful that Danny was currently facing away from her, and unable to see the shock on her face. While she was used to the batboys self-diagnosing, she was not used to the typical citizen doing so. And if they did so, it was typically to seek drugs and to exaggerate their symptoms and problems. Danny on the other hand was doing the opposite. 

 

“I can understand that, but you do have to admit that it is a little concerning. I’ll get you an X-ray and if you’re right, I’ll send you home with some painkillers and an order for rest,” Leslie tries to appease and Danny just huffs. 

 

“If you give me an X-ray, you’ll need to adjust the settings. You won’t get a clear picture otherwise,” Danny offers as Dr. Thomkins wheels him into the imaging room. 

 

“I’ll take that into consideration, but I am the one with the training,” Leslie replies and Danny snorts.

 

“Hey doc, I’m not trying to tell you how to do your job, it's just that I’m not your typical patient. We’ve learned over a dozen X-rays that normal X-rays won’t work. Try it your way, and then use these settings,” Danny holds a folded piece of paper out to Leslie, written on the way over for this exact situation. 

 

“We’ll give it a shot my way,” Dr. Thomkins insists, and Danny just shrugs. 

 

Danny simply watches as Dr. Thomkins goes about what seems to be a well-practiced routine. Starting up various machines, grabbing lead capes, and gathering what looks like a plate. It was a routine Danny recognized. It certainly wasn’t the first time Danny had gotten X-rays, and he had a sneaking suspicion that it wouldn’t be the last. 

 

“You can stay in the chair, I’ll just put the plate between you and the back. I’m just going to go over here, please take a deep breath and hold it for ten seconds when I ask,” 

 

Danny cooperates with Dr. Thompkinss's instructions and has to hold back a laugh when she asks for the settings that he suggested after five failed X-rays. Danny patiently waits as Dr. Thompkins finishes up and wheels him into another room, this one appearing to be a patient room. 

 

“Okay, we’ve got some things to talk about. You were right, you have fractured ribs, but nothing a few weeks of rest won’t fix. That does bring me to something you won’t be happy about,” At this, Danny freezes. Dr. Thompkinss had already probably figured out he was radioactive enough to disrupt an X-ray machine. He couldn’t think of what else there could be. 

 

“You need help, for the next week and a half, at the very least. If you weren’t in the chair, it would be one thing, but the mechanics you use in your daily life, for transferring and maneuvering, you won’t be able to do that with broken ribs. You’ve got what I’m assuming three options, stay in the hospital, have a home caregiver, or you stay with family or friends,” Dr. Thompkins seems to understand that none of the options are ideal, given the tone of voice she uses. 

 

“I don’t have any family or friends in Gotham, and there is no way they are allowing someone into Wayne Tower to take care of me, and I can’t leave work for that long. I’ll figure it out,” Danny protests and Dr. Thompkins pins him with a stern stare. 

 

“I don’t think you understand, Danny. You don’t have a choice. Right now, your ribs aren’t so bad, but if you attempt to transfer yourself, you could break them, completely. They will break, and you could end up with a punctured lung or bone fragments floating in your chest cavity. You could die and stay that way. As for being out of the lab for so long, Bruce will be giving you at least three weeks off, paid. You need to take this seriously, Danny,” Leslie admonishes and is somewhat pleased to see the chastised look on Danny’s face. 

 

“I know it isn’t a great situation, and I know you’ve already lost your independence once, but this is medically necessary. I don’t necessarily have the contacts you need, but I am sure Alfred would know who to call. If you give permission, I can inform them of your situation and ask for assistance in getting you what you need,” Leslie offers, and Danny only hesitates a moment before agreeing. 

*************************************************

Bruce and Alfred met them in the lobby of the clinic, Dr. Thompkins deciding that the mechanics of them all fitting into a patient room, especially with Danny’s wheelchair, wasn’t going to work very well. 

 

“Danny’s going to be just fine, as long as he doesn’t decide to go against my advice. He needs help, for at least a week and a half. If that's someone who’s family or friend, an in-home caretaker, or even a hospital stay, it doesn’t matter. He can’t self-transfer, and he can’t wheel himself in case he aggravates his ribs or makes them worse. As his doctor, I’m excusing him from work for three weeks and prescribing personal care. His insurance will cover it or you will,” Dr. Thompkins demands, and both Bruce and Alfred nod quickly. 

 

“Of course. Danny won’t be expected back in the lab until he is completely recovered,” Bruce insists and Dr. Thompkins nods in satisfaction. 

 

“Next, Alfred I believe you might have some contacts that might be useful. Danny needs to figure out how he wants this to go, and I figured you might be able to help him in that department. I believe you assisted Barbara when she was first injured,” Leslie suggests and Alfred nods. 

 

“It would be my pleasure,” Alfred offers, and Danny nods in thanks. 

 

“He’ll need to go somewhere tonight though. A hospital or have someone to take care of him temporarily,” Dr. Thompkins insists and Bruce nods. 

 

“If he’s alright with it, he’s welcome to stay at the manor until Alfred can arrange something else,” Bruce offers, looking at Danny with a strange, hopeful expression on his face. 

 

“I don’t want to be a bother. I’m sure one or two nights will be fine,” Danny tries to negotiate, but one look from Dr. Tompkin has him backtracking. 

 

“Or I would love that, if you are sure,” Danny quickly changes his answer and Bruce nods enthusiastically. 

 

“It wouldn’t be any trouble at all,” Bruce insists and Alfred nods his agreement. 

 

“Alright then. Danny, it was nice meeting you, but, and I mean no offense at all, I don’t have to see you again,” Dr. Thompkins smiles and Danny nods. 

 

“Yeah, I really hope I have no need for your services any time soon,” Danny insists and Leslie nods, reminded all too much of the batboys. 

 

“We should get going, It’s already getting late, and I believe that the boys will be back home by now,” Alfred suggests and Bruce nods. 

 

“Of course. Leslie, I’ll see you around. Thank you for tonight,” Bruce thanks and bids Leslie ado. 

 

Danny is just as quickly loaded back up as he was unloaded, the pair of Alfred and Bruce working as an effective team. 

 

“Are you sure it is alright I’m staying over? It isn’t going to be like a normal person staying over,” Danny tries to convince them that this wasn’t exactly the best of ideas. 

 

“We are aware of the unique necessities you might face and are prepared to accommodate. Mr. Fenton, I am aware how you may be hesitant to impose upon on, but we are happy to have you over,” Alfred offers up and Danny relents, nodding in acceptance. 

 

“Thank you,” 

 

“It’s no trouble. I’m sure my kids will appreciate having someone around their own age around the manor,” Bruce suggests and Danny forces himself to smile. He wasn’t exactly thrilled to have to further interact after the day he had but would be fine. Bruce was already letting him stay and was willing to take care of him. The least he could do was interact with his kids. 

 

Danny grimaced slightly as the car lurched forward and breathed out a shaky breath, already mentally preparing himself for the social interaction he was about to face. 

Chapter 10: Wayne Manor, Night One

The drive to Bruce’s house took longer than Danny would have thought. It made sense, now that he thought about it, none of the rich folk of Gotham would want to live in the middle of the crime and pollution-ridden city. Danny was surprised by the Wayne estate though. 

 

“And here it is, home sweet home,” Bruce says, even if Danny hadn’t seen the house yet. 

 

There was a giant gate built into a wrought iron fence which was at least fifteen feet tall, and Danny wondered what exactly was outside that required such a tall fence to keep it out. Then again, it was Gotham and Danny wouldn’t put anything past the city. Alfred opens the gate by clicking a garage door opener and they set down the long twisting road that Danny guessed led up to the house proper. 

 

The driveway was long and lined with trees, which gave way to what Danny would guess was an immaculate yard, from what he could see beyond the darkness. As the van crested a small hill, Danny was able to see the house proper, if it could even be called that. It may have been a castle or palace with its grand size and opulence. 

 

At least four stories tall, it towered into the night, every window lit and warm light spilling out onto the front entrance and lighting the gravel on the driveway. It wasn’t anything like Danny was expecting. It wasn’t dark and silent, Danny could practically hear the building singing from where he was. It seemed as if Wayne Manor had its own ghost already, protection and warmth spilling forth. Danny needed to be careful, he didn’t know how to explain to Bruce that he couldn’t come inside because the ghost of the house had decided that he wasn’t worthy of entering the halls. 

 

The building was alive and determined to protect the occupants inside of it, judging by the slight hostility it was radiating toward Danny at the moment. 

 

Protect, no harm. Your people will be safe . Danny responds, letting his aurora flare, putting enough power behind it to show he wasn’t going to be easy to fight, but that he didn’t want to. It was a strange skill he had developed with Clockwork. As it turned out, he was missing the majority of communication with Ectoentities simply because he was unable to hear them properly. 

 

“I know it can be intimidating for some, but I would like you to consider it like any of your friend's houses,” Bruce admits, a hint of embarrassment in his voice. 

 

“Now then, Master Bruce, let’s get Mr. Fenton inside and settled for the night. I assume that most of the children have returned and gone to bed?” Alfred asks and Bruce nods. 

 

“Jason’s still up, but everyone else has turned in for the night,” Bruce agrees, and Alfred nods in approval. 

 

“Jason?” Danny asks in confusion, not knowing who was now being mentioned. 

 

“One of my son’s. Most of my children either live at the manor full-time or pop in and out. Jason’s apartment had a bit of a flooding issue and he’s staying here while it’s sorted out,” 

 

Danny knew that he would be interacting with the Wayne children, but had assumed that it would be limited to those still underage. He was unaware that the adult children would be there as well. It was yet another set of people he would most likely have to interact with tonight. 

 

“You don’t have to worry, Danny. Jason isn’t one to leave the library while at the house. I can understand wanting to turn in for the night,” Bruce alleviates and smiles to himself when he notices a level of tension leave Danny. 

 

Bruce could understand Danny’s hesitance. He too sometimes wished for solitude, but he would never trade his family for his life before Dick. He could also identify with Danny wanting to go to bed after such a long day. 

***********************************************

“Are you sure you are alright?” Bruce asks, fretting outside of the bathroom. 

 

Danny had firmly denied any help, and Bruce wasn’t in any position to refuse. Danny was still an adult and had the right to make decisions for himself. Although Bruce couldn’t help his worry that Danny would injure himself further. After all, Bruce had his ribs broken before and knew how delicate they could be for a few weeks afterward. 

 

“I’m already done, Bruce. I appreciate the worry, but both you and Dr. Thompkin worry too much,” Danny calls through the door. 

 

Bruce didn’t think he was overreacting. While he knew there was a difference between returning to Batman to soon, and Danny getting ready for bed, he also knew how bad it hurt to reinjure himself. 

 

“Old man? What the hell are you doing outside Barbara’s bathroom?” Jason calls down the hall, exiting the library, most likely due to Bruce’s raised voice, concern easily made out. 

 

“Jay, we have a houseguest tonight, or did you not read the text? His name is Danny Fenton, he needs some help for a day or two,” Bruce asks, tiredness leaking into his voice. 

 

He had sent out a mass text to all of his children but knew enough that at least half wouldn’t take a glance at it unless he marked it urgent, which seemed a bit extreme for the situation. He should have known that Jason would be part of the half who didn’t check their phone half the time. 

 

“And you’re yelling at them? Not cool, Old Man,” Jason scoffs and Bruce grunts in frustration, but his attention is drawn away from Jason when the bathroom door opens and Danny rolls himself out, pausing when he spots Jason. 

 

Bruce swears the air becomes electrified, both boys staring at each other, and Bruce is terrified when Jason’s eyes become pit green. Danny keeps staring though, completely calm as he stares Jason down, cocking his eyebrow when Jason moves to take a step forward. Jason hesitates, and slowly, the green fades back into his natural blue, and Jason shakes himself, looking put out. 

 

Danny seems to be satisfied by that and returns his gaze to Bruce. 

 

“Bruce, I can promise you that I know how to take care of broken ribs, not my first rodeo after all,” 

 

And didn’t that frustrate Bruce. He had spent his younger years (and later) as Batman downplaying injuries and he was paying for it now. He didn’t like the fact that Danny seemed used to being injured and brushed off others' concerns. 

 

“Why don’t you let me check your ribs again? Just to make sure,” Bruce asks and it is Jason’s turn to cock his eyebrow at Bruce. 

 

“I am fine, I just want to go to bed,” Danny huffs and Jason laughs, genuinely seeming amused. 

 

“Bruce being an overbearing father?” Danny nods hesitantly, “It’s fine, he just cares. You probably need help transferring, right? Do you want me to help?” Jason offers, and Bruce just about objects when Danny nods, seeming appreciative. 

 

“Sure, Bruce would just over-worry,” Danny mumbles, but both catch it, and Jason laughs. 

 

“He’s like that, you should see him after Damian or Tim get in a scuffle, or any of his kids for that matter,” Jason points out and Danny smiles, slowly relaxing from his tensed position, which was probably better for his ribs. 

 

“Come on, I’ll show you to the room Barbara usually stays in,” Jason suggests and Danny nods, following after Jason. 

 

“Goodnight Bruce,” Danny calls back and Bruce quickly responds, still distracted. 

 

There had never been an instance of Jason’s eyes turning Lazarus green without him flying off into a rage, although he seemed perfectly content now, not a hint of rage present. Somehow, he seemed even more relaxed, which was odd given the new person, let alone the Lazarus episode. 

 

It was something to note, and investigate. Danny seemed to have made him back down with simply a look, Bruce didn’t know anyone who could do that besides Alfred, and while Jason was in a pit rage episode at that. Danny was certainly odd, and Bruce wanted to know how. 

******************************************

Jason’s Jane Austen novel was interrupted by Bruce’s worried voice, drawing him from The Watsons. It was an uncompleted work, but that never stopped Jason from rereading it. While it wasn’t unusual for Bruce to use that tone of worried voice, usually when one of them was injured, it was unusual given the fact that everyone else was out tonight, and so far, uninjured. 

 

Jason regretfully puts his book down and sighs before opening the door. If one of them were injured, Bruce would be an overbearing worry wart until said injury healed. It wouldn’t be Jaosn’s first time playing interference to let one of his siblings have some peace from Bruce’s excessive worrying. 

 

However, when Jason exits the library, he is surprised to see Bruce standing outside of the bathroom which has been specially remodeled for Barbara and her wheelchair, looking like he just swallowed a lemon. 

 

“Old man? What the hell are you doing outside Barbara’s bathroom?” Jason calls out, walking up the hallway as Bruce develops a constipated look on his face. 

 

“Jay, we have a houseguest tonight, or did you not read the text? His name is Danny Fenton, he needs some help for a day or two,” Bruce asks, and Jason will admit that he hadn’t checked his phone in hours, lost in the library. 

 

“And you’re yelling at them? Not cool, Old Man,” Jason scoffs while crossing his arms, looking not the least bit impressed. 

 

Bruce’s attention is pulled away from Jason when the bathroom door opens, and Jason freezes. 

 

Objectively, the young man in the wheelchair looks exactly like the person Bruce would bring home, young, slightly looking underfed, pale, blue-eyed, and possessing the signature black hair, but there is something decidedly other about him. The air thickens around Jason, and before he can even consider it, green is flooding his vision and he’s stepping forward, to do what, he doesn’t know. 

 

The boy calmly sits in his chair and raises a single eyebrow, as if daring Jason to do something stupid. Internally, he feels the pit recoil at the look and the green fades, taking the rage with it. It was an unsettling feeling, something he wasn’t used to. The pit never stopped, not unless Jason managed to beat it back, and he hadn’t even had the time to attempt to do so before in slunk away, and distinct feeling of shame and fear around it. 

 

“Bruce, I can promise you that I know how to take care of broken ribs, not my first rodeo after all,” 

 

The boy says, and Jason can’t help but feel bad when he hears that. This was a civilian, and sure, there were plenty of reasons someone would have broken their ribs, but Jason got the distinct impression this wasn’t some sort of football misadventure or falling out of a tree. 

 

Bruce clearly looked frustrated at this and even if the situation wasn’t ideal, Jason couldn’t help the zing of Bruce’s frustration of yet another uncooperative injured boy who seemed to want nothing to do with Bruce’s help. 

 

“Why don’t you let me check your ribs again? Just to make sure,” Bruce asks and Jason raises his eyebrows. Once one of them made it clear to Bruce that his medical help was unwanted, Bruce usually left them alone. There must be something truly concerning going on with Danny. 

 

“I am fine, I just want to go to bed,” Danny huffs and Jason laughs, amused by the deadpan tone. It seemed as if Danny had run out of any patience he might have once had, and Jason could tell he was close to snapping. 

“Bruce being an overbearing father?” Danny nods hesitantly, “It’s fine, he just cares. You probably need help transferring, right? Do you want me to help?” Jason offers, trying to defuse the situation. Really, Bruce should know better about pushing by now. He had five official kids and two other unofficial ones. It had never worked out well when he pushed any of them. 

 

“Sure, Bruce would just over-worry,” Danny mumbles, and Jason laughs, catching it. 

 

“He’s like that, you should see him after Damian or Tim get in a scuffle, or any of his kids for that matter,” Jason points out and Danny smiles. 

 

Jason watched as he slowly relaxed, now that Bruce wasn’t being, well, Bruce. 

 

“Come on, I’ll show you to the room Barbara usually stays in,” Jason suggests, and waves Danny down the hall, which he follows. 

 

“Goodnight, Bruce,” Danny wishes and Bruce quickly responds, although Jason can hear how distracted he is. 

 

Jason can’t exactly blame him, Danny was enough to distract anyone. And that's before you took into account how he basically made the pit rage run off with its tail between its legs. Jason wouldn’t lie to himself, Danny was attractive, in anyone's opinion. Now that Jason was able to get a better look, Danny’s hair was laced with gray, and his eyes were a swirl between green and blue, creating circular heterochromia, green at the center and fading to blue. The gray was certainly an odd look for someone so young, but it didn’t look dyed, the gray to irregular and spaced out for a salon job, or at-home job. 

 

“So, you’re staying with us for a few days?” Jason asks as he walks down the hall, glancing over to Danny. 

 

Danny looks decidedly put off by that, and Jason gets the feeling that it isn’t exactly what Danny wants. 

 

“Yeah, docs orders. Dr. Thompkins worried I’ll break my ribs worse,” Danny grumbles, and Jason has to muffle his laugh at the cute frown on Danny’s face. 

 

“Leslie’s like that, I suppose. She just wants the best for her patients,” Jason offers and Danny looks decidedly less put out. 

 

“Yeah, I guess. Damn doctors and their good ideas,” Danny grumbles and Jason can’t help the bark of laughter that escapes. 

 

“Yeah, all their good ideas, like not making broken ribs worse,” Jason comments and Danny smiles, blushing slightly. 

 

Jason and Danny continued down the hallway until Jason paused in front of an open door, inside was a bedroom, the bed noticeably lower than the typical bed. 

 

“Can I help you transfer, or do you want to do it yourself?” Jason asks and Danny pauses, a thoughtful look on his face. 

 

“Help? I should probably listen to the doc,” Danny admits, although doesn’t seem enthusiastic about it. 

 

“‘Course,” Jason walks into the room and positions himself at the bed once Danny has parked himself and put on the brakes. 

 

“You ready? You’re the one leading this,” Jason asks and Danny nods. 

 

On the count of three, Jason carefully lifts Danny from the chair and pivots him to the bed, gently setting him down while Danny huffs in pain. 

 

“You good?” Jason asks, and can’t help but match the worry in Bruce’s tone. 

 

“Doc might have been right,” Danny winces and gently cups his side, slowly leveling out his breathing. 

 

“Can I take a look real quick? I took a paramedic course a while back,” Jason asks, and Danny hesitates before nodding. 

 

Slowly and carefully, Danny lifts his shirt, and Jason just about loses it. The entirety of his torso was scarred. Starbursts of burned tissue and large slashes, some long, some deep, some of both. There were also small nicks, less life-threatening. The most recent seemed to be the large bruise in the center of his chest, right where someone would perform compressions. The worst though, belonged to the red Y incision that ran from both collarbones and ran down past his navel. It was old and scarred, more white than pink but still raised and somewhat irritated looking. 

 

Jason was left staring in horror, feeling as if he was about to lose whatever left he had in his stomach. He knew what this was, it was a dissection scar, although given that Danny was alive, more likely a vivisection scar. It shouldn’t belong to someone like Danny, a civilian. 

 

He wanted to hunt down whoever did this to him and make them pay, wanted to put them in a hole where they would never be found. 

 

“Hey, Jason? You need to breathe, I’m pretty sure you still need to breathe,” Danny encourages, gently pushing Jason’s hands off his chest and replacing what Jason now recognized as one of Dick’s sleep shirts. 

 

With Danny’s encouragement, Jason takes a shuddering breath and reigns himself in, focusing on the fact that Danny was sitting in front of him, alive and safe for now. He wasn’t in any immediate danger, although he wasn’t sure about Bruce. Bruce had most likely already seen it, and Jason didn’t know how to feel about that. 

 

“I’m fine,” Jason chokes out, voice sounding strangled. 

 

“Yeah, you are, so am I. It’s late, you’ve seen my ribs, they’re fine. We should both go to bed and revisit this tomorrow. I’m pretty sure that Bruce is going to want answers as well, and I only have enough energy to explain it once,” Danny practically begs, and Jason nods, numbly agreeing. 

 

“Go to bed, Jason, I’ll be fine,” 

 

Going to bed was the last thing Jason wanted to do, but he couldn’t exactly demand that Danny allow him to stay in his bedroom, and certainly not when they had just met. Jason shakily stands and doesn’t allow himself to say anything else before leaving the room, too afraid of saying anything that would upset Danny. If Jason had learned anything from Bruce, it was when to stop pushing someone else. 

***********************************************

Danny watches as Jason practically flees the room, and Danny can’t help but feel bad. He knew that his chest wasn’t a pretty sight, that any normal person wouldn’t appreciate the scars. They were nasty, to anyone really. The only one that really bothered him at this point was the dissection scar, he had earned the others protecting those in Amity Park, those in his kingdom. He was proud of them at this point, all of them except his dissection scar. That was the one he regretted. The one he wished would go away, although, he knew it never would, not in a year and not in a millennium. It had become a part of him, just like his obsessions. 

 

The second he came back and noticed his shirt was cut open, he knew he would have to explain what exactly happened to him, why he had as many scars as he did. Now that Jason saw as well, he knew that he would be explaining to more people than just Bruce and Angela. He would need to figure out a plausible excuse or get really comfortable with more people knowing his secret. What he did know was that he was too tired to figure it out tonight. 

 

Whatever he would figure out, it would be tomorrow. 

Chapter 11: Early Mornings

When Danny woke up, the realization of last night caught up to him. He had not only forgotten about the fact that both Bruce and Jason had seen him shirtless but also the fact that Jason had a distinctly Infinite Realms feel to him. If Danny could convince himself that he felt wrong, he couldn’t lie to himself that Jason’s eyes glowed ectoplasm green and he had backed down when Danny pushed his ghostly aura out. 

 

Neither of these facts changed the fact that Danny had at least a few things to explain. And he had no idea of what he was going to do. He had no idea of what sort of lie he was going to make up to make all of the questions go away. 

 

It was early still, too early for anyone to genuinely be any form of awake. It did have the benefit that no one was there to insist that he have help with his transfer, and no one was there to see him hover himself from the bed to his chair, avoiding most of the pain that would be part of a manual transfer, either with or without assistance. He wasn’t fussy enough to change out of his pajamas, not that he had any clean clothes to change into anyway. 

 

Silently, he wheels himself out of his temporary room, creeping down the hallway with no destination in mind. He didn’t really have anything to do at the moment, Alfred having whisked away his suitcase with the promise of cleaning his clothes. Somehow, his phone had been lost in the chaos of the attack on Metropolis and his subsequent ‘heart failure’. All he had to do at the moment was sit around his room waiting for someone to come fetch him, or he had the option of creeping around the manor, exploring in the early morning hours. 

 

“Mr. Fenton, I do believe that you were given the advice of having someone assist you during transfers and transportation. And Don’t you believe it is a little early in the day to be up and about?” Danny freezes when he hears Alfred’s voice, knowing he was caught red-handed, or rather, wheelchair sat. 

 

Looking at a grandfather clock conveniently placed in the hallway, Danny could understand that four forty-five in the morning was a tad early, although, with the sheer levels of ectoplasm around the manor, he did not feel the need to sleep as much as a regular human. 

 

“I couldn’t sleep. I figured being up was better than laying in bed,” Danny shrugs, and Alfred smiles gently, knowing that Danny wouldn’t be the first young man to wander the manor, unable to sleep. 

 

“Very well, would you like to come into the kitchen to have an early breakfast?” Alfred asks gently, already thinking of what he could offer Danny while setting to work on the real breakfast of the day.  

 

“I don’t want to be a bother,” Danny quickly says, feeling bad about disrupting the mans early morning. 

 

“It wouldn’t be a bother. I was going to prepare something for myself anyways,” Alfred insists and notices the second Danny caves, nodding his head. 

 

Alfred takes it upon himself after Danny agrees to steer Danny into the kitchen, positioning his chair at a lower counter Barbara tended to sit at while in the kitchen. 

 

“Would you like anything special? I was thinking of slicing up some fresh fruit and having some tea,” 

 

Danny silently agrees, watching as Alfred moves about the kitchen fluidly. While his manors demanded that he offer Alfred help in getting breakfast ready, his common sense told him that if he tried to interfere with Alfred’s routine at this point he would only make himself more of a nuisance. His chair was enough of an obstacle, the fact he had no idea where anything was in the kitchen was another. 

 

“Here you are, if you would like your tea made another way, please let me know. I do understand that each individual likes their tea a certain way,” Alfred offers, placing a small tray in front of Danny. 

 

On it was a small bowl of fresh-cut fruit, a scone, and a small pot of what looked like whipped cream, but thicker and denser. Besides it was a milky cup of tea sitting in a nice china cup. Danny was almost afraid of taking it for fear of breaking the delicate drinkware. 

 

“Please do not worry yourself about the cup, it is one of many from long ago broken sets. Master Bruce was quite clumsy in his younger years,” Alfred encourages, noticing Danny’s hesitance. 

 

Danny slowly lifts the cup and takes a tip, hesitant about the flavor. Every time he had attempted to try tea, either drinking his own attempts or those of Jazz. Every single time it either ended up tasting like paper or ectoplasm, the second not being great, but tolerable. Coffee was almost always a guaranteed flavor, strong and bitter unless he added an ungodly amount of cream and sugar. 

 

But this tea wasn’t like that. It was rich and full of flavor, but a pleasant one. It was smooth and easy, even if it was only barely sweetened with milk and sugar. 

 

“I take it you enjoy the tea, I will take note for the future. Would you like some more?” Alfred asks, and Danny notices he has already almost drained his cup, even if it is rather small compared to the extreme sizes of thermoses he usually uses for his coffee. 

 

“Yes, please,” Danny asks, and Alfred refills his cup from a fancy pot. 

 

Alfred watches as Danny tucks into his breakfast and smiles. While he wasn’t pleased about the idea of Danny transferring and wheeling himself, he could appreciate someone who was an early riser. Due to their nightly activities, most everyone besides Duke woke up later in the day, and even Duke woke up later when his schedule allowed. 

 

Danny seemed to be enjoying his early breakfast at least, judging by the speed at which he was going through it, at least. It seemed as if Danny enjoyed the fresh fruit and clotted cream, judging by the way he loaded his scone with both of them. 

 

“You know, Mr. Fenton, you will have to find an excuse for the others. They might be kind, but they are also curious. They will not simply accept the fact that you do not wish to talk about it,” Alfred mentions, sitting at the counter with his own light breakfast. 

 

He did not wish to worry Danny, but he did hope that Danny would have an explanation, for the sheer fact that he would be the one to have to pull the family back from their obsessive tendencies when they decide that they need to discover something. And the fact that he had heard that Danny was heavily scarred, somehow made Jason back down from pit rage and had an unknown, possibly interesting past. Alfred wasn’t one to pry into someone's past, his own being interesting enough, but he did feel as if he had a responsibility to warn Danny that he was about to get grilled at breakfast. 

 

Judging by Danny’s rueful smile, it seemed as if he had already guessed he would be the subject of an interrogation. 

 

“I don’t suppose that’s going to be easy to avoid,” Danny asks and Alfred shakes his head. 

 

“No, as a word of warning, I advise you to either be very clear and confident in your story or tell the truth. There is nothing more fascinating to this family than a good mystery,” Alfred warns and Danny chuckles before sighing. 

 

“I suppose so. Do they take deferrals?” Danny asks and Alfred shrugs. 

 

“When there’s a need. I suppose if you have a real reason as to why you cannot answer, they may accept that, for a time,” Alfred offers and Danny nods, seeming to be deep in thought. 

***************************************************

Danny sat in his chair while Alfred sat in his, both enjoying the quiet early morning with nothing but the others' presence to disturb them. Occasionally, Alfred would make a fresh pot of tea and refill Danny’s cup, but until about seven, they sat in mutual silence. 

 

Once the grandfather clock in the kitchen struck seven, Alfred stood up and started preparing breakfast for the manor. While not overly complicated, breakfast was somewhat of a production. Depending on the day, Alfred could be feeding up to nine people including himself, more if one of the boys invited their friends or teammates. And they certainly didn’t possess the typical appetite, all of them serving as vigilantes and needing to make up the calories they burned during their activities. To say Alfred made large quantities of food for every meal would be an understatement. 

*******************************

Danny’s morning was confusing to say the least. He had anticipated spending hours on end alone, having a chance to get a good look at the house as a whole, at least the lower level he could actually access. And then Alfred had been awake, giving him a scolding look when he admitted to transferring himself. 

 

Danny couldn’t deny that the quiet morning had been bad, though. He enjoyed the food Alfred gave him and enjoyed the tea even more. It was honestly rare for him to be able to have a quiet morning. Before moving to Gotham, he was typically woken by his parent's experiments or tests, and once he did move to Gotham, he didn’t have any time in the morning to take time to sit and simply enjoy the silence. 

 

And now that was broken once Alfred seemed to start on a larger breakfast. Danny could guess that it meant everyone else was going to start waking up, and as Alfred had pointed out, they would want explanations. Explanations he wasn’t sure he could provide. 

*******************************

Danny was left sitting while Alfred made breakfast, trying to figure out exactly how he would explain both his scars and whatever moment had happened between Jason and him the night before. From what he could tell, both by observing Bruce himself and reading multiple articles, Bruce was a champion for metahuman rights, Wayne Enterprises, and Bruce himself donated to both the campaign for metahuman rights and the facilities used to benefit metahumans. If he could claim he was a metahuman, it might explain everything. 

 

“Mr. Fenton, would you mind terribly going to the dining room? I believe the other residents of the house will be coming down for breakfast soon,” Alfred asks and Danny nods, already wheeling himself out of the kitchen, and hopefully out of Alfred’s way. 

 

It doesn’t take much effort for him to locate the dining room, and can already guess his table spot judging by the lack of a chair. Alfred comes in soon after him, pushing a large cart as he goes. The cart was laden with food, most of which was covered underneath silver domes. Danny raises his eyebrows as Alfred leaves the cart and returns with another, equally large cart. 

 

“Can I help?” Danny asks, taking a deep breath and making up his mind. 

 

Alfred seems startled a moment but nods anyway, and before Alfred can ask how exactly Danny plans on helping, Danny gathers ectoplasm around his hands and guides it to wrap around the food dishes and lift them off the cart, guiding them gently to the table and sets them down without so much as a sound. Danny turns his attention to the other cart and lifts the pitchers as well, the liquid inside barely moving. Finally, Danny causes the dishware sitting on the cart to go flying, each plate, glass, and utensil finding itself a home on the large table. 

 

“Your control was quite impressive. I take it this is a factor to your explanation?” Alfred asks, eyebrow raised in cool consideration. 

 

Alfred wouldn’t be the first one to admit this, but Danny was not the first powered individual he had met, Bruce’s colleagues and Duke himself notably being a part of that. It was, however, the first time he had seen someone display such fine control over so many different objects with minimal disturbance. Every dish was on the table undisturbed, and every part of the place settings were in the correct positions. Somehow, Danny had gotten all of the food and drinks onto the table quicker than Alfred could have hoped to, while moving nothing more than his hands. 

 

“Yeah, but it would be easier to explain all at once,” 

 

Alfred nods, relenting at both Danny’s tone and words. He, unlike the rest of the family, could be patient. He knew when to let someone be and when to let them take the lead. Judging by the free display of power, Danny intended to explain some things about himself. Alfred wouldn’t unnecessarily push him. 

*************************************************

It doesn’t take long from the point of the table being set for the sound of the family coming down the stairs to be heard. Laughing, joking, cursing, and the sound of shoving echoed down the halls. Danny suddenly feels a spike of panic right before the closest person enters the dining room, hearing them hesitate a moment before coming around the corner revealing Jason. 

 

The first thing Danny notices is the fact that it looks like Jason hadn’t gotten a wink of sleep, dark bruises beneath his eyes, wild hair, and a slight manic look on his face. He almost took a step back in surprise once Danny noticed him catch sight of him, and Danny tried to smile, although he was sure it came off more of a grimace. 

 

Jason moved out of the way and sat down right across from Danny, and slowly, the rest of the table filled in. After he realized it might be a good idea to know who his boss’s family was, he made sure to know who exactly Bruce considered family. And it seemed just his luck that every single member, barring Duke, was present at the table that morning. 

 

“Good morning, Danny. I hope you slept well,” Bruce greets and Danny nods, suddenly a lot more nervous than before. 

 

He starts picking at his hands as the entire Wayne Clan sits at the table and starts passing around dishes, seeming to let Danny have a moment to collect himself. He wordlessly took dishes, grabbed some food, and passed it on, weirdly meshing into the morning routine. 

 

Only once the dishes and pitchers stopped being passed did a stillness settle on the table, and when Danny brought himself to look, he saw that nearly everyone was taking small glances at him, desperately trying to seem as if they weren’t. 

 

“So um, last night. I’m guessing you want an explanation?” Danny asks, ignoring everyone else and looking at Jason, who looked thoroughly unsettled when he nodded. Danny duly noted everyone else at the table nodding as well. 

 

“It all started right before my fifteenth birthday,”

 

Chapter 12: Breakfast

“Before you can understand what I say, you need to know that Fenton wasn’t my family's original last name, it was Nightingale,” Danny began, his voice hesitant and scared. 

 

While he hoped the Waynes believed that it was because he was nervous about his story, the truth was that Danny wasn’t sure his hastily thought-up lie would hold up. If it did, it would be the perfect excuse, if it didn’t, Danny would have to figure out something else, hopefully, more believable without getting to close to the truth. 

 

“My ancestors used to be witches, witches who made a lot of enemies over the generations. My great great great grandpa decided to change his name and leave the family business, thinking he could avoid the dozens of curses that belonged to the family at this point,” Danny paused at this point, both to take another drink of his tea and let the family process his words so far. 

 

“He ignored that they were blood curses, not title curses. The curses followed the family and only stopped when they completely left the magical world, forsaking their abilities for a chance at a normal life. We were normal until I found an old chest stuffed full of old books. I reawoke the curses while also awakening my family's abilities, but only in me. Because the rest of my family had forgotten who we used to be, I was the only one who had to face the consequences. I had a lot of nasty things after me, that's where the scars come from,” Danny finishes, already anticipating the endless questions that were soon to come his way. 

 

The entire table was staring at him, jaws practically hanging on the floor, which was to be expected. The one point of worry he had was Cassandra, who regarded him with a suspicious look as if she wasn’t buying what he was selling. Bruce slowly leaned back in his chair and closed his eyes, patience seeming to run thin as Danny barely heard his breath go through a calming breathing exercise he remembered Jazz trying to teach him. Danny couldn’t blame Bruce, it was a lot to drop on any normal person. 

 

“And the dissection scar?” Jason asks, voice tightly controlled, and Danny couldn’t tell if it was because Jason was trying not to yell or have his voice crack. 

 

“I’m human, for all intents and purposes. Someone witnessed me using magic and wanted to know what made me tick. They tried testing for a metagene or the fact that I might be from a different planet, but all tests came back that I was a regular human. So of course the next step would be slicing me open,” Danny simply explains, voice even and easygoing. 

 

It wasn’t like that all in reality, and even using the made-up story caused a bolt of pain to shoot through him, his body and mind still remembering the true pain he was put through, all for a bunch of scientists' satisfaction. 

 

“That is horrible,” Tim comments, and Danny shrugs. 

 

“That’s human. If they don’t understand something, they fear it and attempt to understand, and then destroy it,” 

 

Bruce looks decidedly uncomfortable at his most recent comment, but Danny can’t force himself to feel so bad. They were the ones who wanted to know the story behind his past and why he was scarred. 

 

“Tt, is that why you have heart problems? Because of a ‘curse’?” Damian asks and Danny raises his eyebrows, pursing his lips to hold back a most likely unwelcome comment. 

 

“No, yes? It’s not really clear. What I do know is that it can’t happen to anyone else,” Danny amends and Bruce sighs. 

 

“To be clear, you have magical abilities and a whole host of curses,” Dick asks and Danny nods smiling. 

 

“Yup,” 

***********************************************

It wasn’t even nine o’clock and Bruce was on his last straw. Not only did Danny have rather suspicious parents, but he also seemed to have literal curses out for him. Bruce was good at dealing with almost everything you could throw at him, but the supernatural never ended well. It was in part why he created Justice League Dark. Each group had its own specialties they thrived in dealing with, now Bruce was confronted with the fact that he might have made an error in letting like deal with like. 

 

Now, he had a most likely traumatized boy sitting at his dining room table, spilling the fact that he had been vivisected by unknown parties, having generational curses, and the fact that he was able to use magic. 

 

It seemed as if Constantine would have to be involved. 

******************************************************

Cass didn’t buy Danny’s lies for a second, but also didn’t detect any maliciousness from Danny. While he lied, it seemed as if he had no intentions of causing harm, and Cassc couldn’t find fault. While Cass would like to know the full, true story, Danny was under no requirement to spill his secrets to those who amounted to complete strangers. Danny carried a great deal of pain with him, both physical and mental. Cass could understand both. Her childhood hadn’t been much of a childhood. She had to grow up and learn more than most did in lifetimes. She had to bear the training of her biological father, she had to bear the long-term injuries her ‘failures’ brought her. Speaking still felt as if lava ran through her throat and knives tore at her flesh. 

 

She could understand Danny’s hesitation to share his full past, especially when she considered the scars reported by both Bruce and Jason. 

 

While she would not assist him in his lies, she wouldn’t speak and point them out. Everyone deserves their own secrets. Even if that means her family wasn’t fully informed. 

 

Cass couldn’t help but think this may come back to bite her one day, but that day wasn’t here yet. 

****************************************************

Tim was having a morning, to say the least. It had been officially over fourty eight hours since the last time he slept beyond long blinks. He, unlike some others (looking at you, Jason) actually checked his phone when Bruce sent out mass texts. He knew Danny would be staying over until another solution was found or he recovered. It was yet another thing to cause him to give up on sleeping and discovering facts.

 

From the moment he met Danny that night in the labs, he knew something was wrong with Danny. For one, no normal person’s eyes glowed toxic green, for another, no one emitted a chill, besides Victor Fries that is. For another, Danny just had a habit of saying concerning things, without any context, and no further explanation when asked. At least half of his coworkers had come to Tim with their concerns, and Tim couldn’t exactly do anything about it. 

 

Danny hadn’t broken one Wayne Enterprises rule or policy, and even if he had, Tim would have done his best to keep him on, while getting him any help he would need. As it stood, Tim had no good reason to ask Danny what exactly made him so strange. 

 

As it turned out, that strangeness was due to his family history. Although Tim wasn’t convinced it was that simple, if you could call Danny having magical abilities as ‘simple’.

******************************************************

Jason called bullshit. Was Danny strange? Yes. Did he think some sort of magic bullshit was going on? Also yes. Did he damn well know the magic bullshit had to deal with the pits? Abso-fuckin-lutly. 

 

He hadn’t slept since last night, too wired. Surprisingly, the pit had remained silent. Somehow, Danny had made it retreat with a simple look and a flash of his eyes. It was a feat Jason hadn’t been able to achieve in the three years he had been exposed to the pit. 

 

Anything that could make the pit backdown, unsettled Jason. Not even Ra’s Al Ghoul, in his hundreds of years alive, had figured out how to control the pits or those who came out of them out of their minds. So that left Jason wondering, who and what exactly was Danny? Because while Jason was out of it last night, he damn well knew he felt something similar to the pit inside Danny. Of that he was sure. 

*******************************************

Damian was thoroughly unimpressed. Fenton had managed to spin some tail that made absolutely no sense, in any way you looked at it. Not only was he foolish enough to freely give information, not only was he foolish enough to admit his foolishness, but he had also been foolish enough in the first place to go poking his nose around strange books and had brought curses down on himself. He was clearly incompetent and his dumb oblivious smile only contributed to Damian’s opinion of him. 

 

Damian could not understand why first Tim seemed so fascinated with Fenton, and then his own Father. It was simply not because of Fenton’s unique brand of strangeness, nor was it his intelligence, Damian’s opinion of his intelligence notwithstanding. 

 

It was certainly perplexing and vexing, and Damian knew one certain way of dealing with problems that came for his family. Whether they approved of it or not depended on the problem. 

******************************************

Dick sat back and watched each member of his family internally freak out. Each seemed to be having an internal crisis, stuck in their own processes of dealing with problems and those who cause them. His family's reactions ranged from Bruce’s cut-off, deep thoughts to the near murder Damian had in his eyes. Cass seemed to be the most put together, simply glancing between Danny and the rest of the family. Jason currently had the most amusing look on his face, and Tim looked ready to keal over, which was really typical for him. 

 

Dick wasn’t sure what to make of Danny, until that morning, he hadn’t even heard of him, Bruce and Tim keeping his presence to themselves, not that it made any sense for them to go shouting about Danny before they learned exactly how strange Danny was. 

 

Damian’s patience seems to have finally snapped, which was really impressive when you consider his upbringing, although Dick wasn’t sure Danny would take that into consideration once Damian threw his knife at him. 

 

Most of the table startles to attempt to stop the knife from making contact with Danny, the only ones not to move being Cass and Alfred. Before anyone can make contact with the knife, Danny waves his hand and the knife is encased in a spike of ice, effectively freezing it above the table, stuck in a rotation with the blade going straight towards Danny’s forehead. 

 

“Could you not?” Danny asks, seeming unfazed besides a slight annoyance. 

 

Dick was impressed at his restraint, even he would be more upset with Damian launching a knife at his head and Damian was his brother. 

 

“It’s not the first time I’ve been attacked at breakfast,” Danny comments, either guessing what Dick’s next question would be or Dick had spoken aloud. 

 

“Danny, I’ve got a friend who could help with your whole curse and magic situation, if you would like it?” Bruce asks and Dick has to hold back from groaning, knowing most likely that Constantine would be making a visit to the manor.

 

Now, don’t get Dick wrong, he didn’t have anything against Constantine himself. But Dick did have to admit he brought chaos wherever he went, and the last time he involved himself with the bats, the entire family was off for a month until they sorted themselves out again. Dick and Alfred were left trying to get the rest of them to act like reasonable human beings again. 

 

“I don’t think that’ll go well. The Nightingales weren’t well-liked when we were apart of the magic community, not any self-respecting magician will touch us with a ten-foot pole,” Danny remarks, bitterness coating his words. 

 

“Good thing Constantine doesn’t have any self-respect, huh B? Why don’t you call him out here,” Jason asks and Bruce scowls, knowing that Jason wasn’t wrong but wanting to object to his crass words anyways. 

 

“Fine, god knows if I’ll be able to get ahold of him any time soon,” Bruce grumbles, and Dick can understand his frustration.

 

While Zatanna didn’t go quite as off the map as Constantine tended to, it was always a challenge getting ahold of anyone apart of Justice League Dark. And since last Dick knew Bruce and Constantine were having a feud of some sort, it just made it that much harder for Bruce to contact Constantine, and made Constantine that much more petty when he did. 

 

Dick wasn’t exactly looking forward to the next few days, both dealing with Bruce’s frustration of trying to get ahold of Constantine and the rest of the family trying to figure out what exactly Danny was like. Sometimes it was frustrating being the only seminormal member of the family. 

Chapter 13: Constantine

Notes:

So, my laptop is acting up, which is why you might have noticed a bit of a break, especially when I published those two chapters so close together. For some reason, my computer will stop connecting to wifi and turn into a bit of a brick, or maybe paver is more accurate? Anyway, the point is I am struggling with my laptop and that is making it hard to write, let alone take my online college class. By the way, stats suck! I think I've figured out a workaround, but it might not last and who knows then.

I hope you enjoy the chapter and it was what you were thinking of, or a nice surprise twist 😘

Lots of love SSRI

Constantine had had it with good old Batsy. Sure, he was essentially the one who signed his paychecks, but that was beside the point. 

 

“You have a kid, with glowing green eyes and supposedly full of curses, living in your house?” Constantine’s cigarette bounced with every syllable, sending ash to the already ash-stained floor of the house. John couldn’t bring himself to feel bad about it at the moment, more pressing matters at hand. 

 

“He’s not living, just temporarily staying. The kid says he’s got magic in his blood, that's why he has all of the curses he does,” 

 

John cannot explain how much he would like to punch Bruce at that moment, his perfectly level tone driving him all the more mad. 

 

“If he’s telling the truth, he’s a damn Nightingale,” John grumbles, plopping onto his couch and summons a bottle of whiskey. 

 

“He mentioned you might take issue with that, I assured him you wouldn’t,” The minor threat isn’t concealed well, and John wonders once again why he decided to join the stupid Dark League in the first place. 

 

“The Nightingales were known for being ruthless, crossing anyone in their way. They managed to wrack up a load of curses, just like your boy said. As far as I know, they disappeared a few hundred years ago and anyone who knew them assumed the curses got to them. You need to be careful with him, Bruce. I mean it. If there’s any time for your brand of paranoia, its now. You have no idea what he’s done to survive this long,” John warns, glaring at the phone. 

 

“I’m sure it isn’t that bad. He seems like a good kid whose had a rough run of it. He’s in a wheelchair, I don’t think he could do that much,” Bruce off handedly points out and John groans again, lighting another cigarette. 

 

“May I remind you of Oracle?” The silence on the other side of the line is very telling, “Let me guess, he has black hair and blue eyes and enough trauma to fill a library?” The continued silence is even more telling. If Bruce had one weakness, it was to black-haired and blue-eyed kids, most of whom carried trauma matching Bruce’s own. 

 

“Just, leave the shadows alone until I get there,” John mutters before he can hang up, internally crowing at the fact that he finally got the last word, even if it most likely didn’t make any sense to Bruce. 

 

“Bloody hell,” 

 

John starts the long process Bruce just sent him on. He wasn’t a wanker, he wasn’t going to leave the poor kid with curses he had no responsibility for. But it did remind him how much of a pain in the ass decursing actually was. Transfering curses was easy, actually dissolving them was another question entirely. 

*************************************************

Danny was internally shitting himself. All he wanted to do was get Bruce and the rest of the family off his back. It seemed like his bogus story had done the exact opposite, Bruce taking it upon himself to contact his friend who may or may not know what to do about his supposed magic and curses. Danny could only hope that this ‘friend’ was one of those charlatines who pretended to understand and know magic, while taking every last dollar out of your wallet. 

 

Somehow Danny didn’t think that was the case. 

 

While Bruce pretended to be ‘Brucie’ Danny could tell he had real intelligence under the public mask he wore. There was no way he didn’t if he still had control of his company. And even if Tim helped run Wayne Enterprises, Danny had been close enough to Bruce during his visits to the lab to be aware that he knew what was going on and he was the one pulling the strings, at least partially. Danny could understand the decision behind Bruce’s ‘Brucie’ persona. It made him underestimate, he would be able to get the upper hand without the other party knowing he was even involved. That didn’t change the fact that Danny had a laugh watching the youtube videos of ‘Brucie's biggest fails’, which included drunk flirting with Lex Luthor and locking his keys in his car while Tim stood over to the side looking as if he either wanted to kill himself or his adopted father. 

 

“Tt, there’s no reason to look like that. You should be grateful father is extending his help,” Damian comments, sneering at Danny who raises his eyebrows, unimpressed. 

 

After Bruce offered to help, he left the rest of his kids at the dining room table while he went to go make calls, jumping on this issue a lot faster than Danny would have thought. 

 

“I just didn’t expect it, okay? It’s not often your boss says he might have a fix for generations old curses,” Danny shoots back, snarking at the curt tone Damian used. 

 

As it stood, Danny wasn’t a huge fan of Damian, which was perfectly understandable if you asked him, Damian had first greeted him by yeating a knife at his face. 

 

“Don’t worry about it Danny, Bruce helps fund the JL, he gets a lot of favors from the members, you would not believe how many times Batmans saved him,” Dick tries to smooth over, and Danny feels like Dick would shove Damian behind him if they were standing. 

 

“Yeah, old man's got favors up the wazoo. One little curse breaking session won’t come close to what the JLD owes him,” Jason points out and Cass glares at him. 

 

“I still don’t want to be a bother. He’s already letting me stay at his house until I figure something else out,” Or until I just convince them I’ll be fine at Wayne Tower . 

 

“Why don’t we put off talk of curse breaking and watch a movie or something?” Dick suggests and it seems like everyone jumps on board, even Damian, surprisingly. 

***************************************************

Constantine was ready to strangle Bruce, but he thought he had found something for every single one of the curses that was said to be placed on the Nightingales. If they had mixed themselves up in something else, Constantine would have to go with plan B, which was yet to be decided but would most likely involve Booze. 

 

Preparing a transportation spell, Constantine felt a level of unease settle on him. While some might assume he forwent any forewarning given to him, sometimes he actually listened. Sometimes he decided to leave well enough alone and go back to his hundred year old manuscript. This was not one of those time, and future John Constantine would be cursing at himself in this moment for his stupidity. 

 

When the universe gave a warning, he should listen to it, as he was about to learn. 

*********************************************

The movie was going great, from what Danny could tell at least. It had taken more then a half hour of squabbling from the siblings before they settled on a movie, Abraham Lincoln Vampire Hunter, which raised Danny’s eyebrows, and popcorn bestowed upon them by Alfred before everyone truly settled down. Jason had helped transfer him again so he was seated on the couch, covered by a blanket as he watched the movie blankly, bowl of popcorn in his lap. 

 

He honestly couldn’t understand what was going on in the movie, but those around him seemed amused, to which he couldn’t complain. The house and positive emotions coming from the siblings around him hit the spot, relieving the small amount of tension that built when Danny hadn’t had enough ectoplasm. While he somewhat felt like an outsider among the family, Danny couldn’t deny that the siblings' closeness didn’t feel good. 

 

It was then that the image was shattered, a writhing, broken and fractured soul appearing in the mansion, shattering the once peaceful night, at least to Danny. The soul felt wrong, like fragments that didn’t quite fit together held together with chewing gum and duct tape. Danny sat bolt upright, nervously scanning the room focusing on the doors and the occupants inside, who had taken notice of Danny’s tenseness. 

 

“Danny, are you okay?” Dick asks, brave enough to voice everyone else's question. 

 

“It's not right, it’s broken and missing and gone,” Danny mumbles, not making any sense as he wildly looks around for what the bat family assumes to be a threat. While they would like to assume it was some sort of flashback triggered by the movie, they were all too experienced to totally bank on that. Something had set Danny off, and they weren’t sure what it was. 

********************************************

When Constantine teleported into Bruce’s office, he was immediately knocked to his knees, clutching at his chest as he felt his heart was about to implode due to the sheer power swirling around the mansion. Constantine knew that the manor was close to developing its own house spirit, but this was unlike anything he had felt before. There was no way that this was merely the presence of a house spirit. 

 

“John! What's wrong?” Bruce yells out, diving to the floor to support the swaying magician.

 

Bruce had seen Constantine in bad situations before, so drained he looked like a ghost, but he had never seen the man so shaken as he had just then. He had never seen Constantine driven to his knees by something. As much as he despised saying it, he was worried about the brit. 

 

“What the bloody hell do you have in here?” Constantine grinds out, the air feeling thick and hard to breathe. The effort that speaking that one sentence was exhausting. 

 

“What? Nothing? What are you talking about, Constantine?” Bruce asks, starting to look really worried, no doubt about his bats. 

 

Constantine was really starting to worry Bruce. He had of course seen Constantine not at his best, he had dragged him out of enough pubs and taken away enough liquor bottles for him to have a shining opinion of the man. But he had never seen him this level of freaked out. 

 

Just as he was about to do…something, his phone rang, Dick’s face popping up on his screen. Dick never called him while both were in the manor, preferring to track Bruce down himself. If he was calling, he most likely couldn’t leave his place and Bruce was painfully reminded of one of Jason’s pit rage episodes. 

 

“Dick, what's wrong?” Bruce asks, answering the phone. 

 

“Danny. He’s really freaked about something. He says something is broken and gone, we have no idea what he’s talking about,” Dick quickly explains, and Bruce can hear the sound of his other children trying to comfort what sounded like a distressed Danny in the background. 

 

“What the bloody hell do you have in here?” Constantine asks again and Bruce flounders, having no idea what to do. 

 

“Nothing! The only unusual thing is Danny,” Bruce replies, trying to pay attention to the increasingly distressed sounds on the other end of the line. 

 

“Just Danny,” Constantine replies incredulously. 

 

“Dick, I’m bringing Constantine. We’ll figure out what’s wrong with Danny then, okay?” Bruce asks, directing his attention at Dick who easily agrees, becoming more and more worked up as he most likely watches the rest of his siblings try to calm Danny down. 

 

“I am not touching that with a ten foot pole,” Constantine snarks and Bruce glares. 

 

“You will. I told Danny you would be helping him. He’s just a kid that needs help,” Bruce insists and Constantine groans, pinching his nose bridge. 

 

“Fine you git, lets go figure out what the hell is wrong with adoption bait,” Constantine mutters and Bruce frowns. 

 

“I didn’t tell you what he looked like,” Bruce mutters and Constantine has the gal to chuckle. 

 

“He’s in trouble. Name one of your kids who you didn’t take in under nonideal circumstances,” And Bruce couldn’t even pretend to think. He did have a habit of rescuing kids in trouble and then adopting them. At least Danny was of legal age and seemed to have good parents. 

 

On the other hand, Danny had brought up several concerning comments. There were certainly concerning facts Danny had brought up, which did make Bruce think that a look into Danny’s homelife would be a good idea. Ignoring the fact that Danny was a legal adult, of course. 

********************************************

Danny felt the ball of wrongness move through the mansion. There were no hostile intentions that Danny could pick up, but that didn’t change the sense of wrongness he felt. Slowly, with pauses and flashes of annoyance, the fractured soul makes its way closer and closer to the living room before pausing just outside the door, and Danny can finally hear the source of discourse. Bruce, who Danny assumed was another man, paused just out of sight of the hallway, and Danny quickly levitated himself from the couch and back into his chair, much to the squawking protests of the Waynes. 

 

The alarm of the siblings catches the attention of Bruce and his companion and they both come charging into the living room in time to watch Danny fully settle into his chair. Bruce looks wildly confused, but Bruce’s companion looks like he’s seen a ghost. 

 

The man wasn’t all that special, if you ignored his fractured soul. Tall, blonde, haggard face covered in stubble. He was dressed in a pair of slacks, button down shirt, loosely slung tie, and tan trench coat, loafers that were stained with dark, reddish stains. His clothes were nice, but worn. If Danny looked closely, he could see the outline of what he believed to be a cigarette pack in the breast pocket of the trench coat, based on the size and scent hanging around the man. 

 

“Bloody hell,” The man mutters, staring about six inches above Danny’s head, and Danny can’t help but curse, the man most likely able to see the invisible to most crown floating over his head. 

 

Danny had similar sentiments to the man, who he now recognized as one John Constantine, otherwise known as the Laughing Magician, otherwise known as a pain in Danny’s ass. Danny had spent too many days trying to sort out the man's paperwork and fractured soul for him to have any more patience left for the man, or whatever he might have to say. 

 

“John, I didn’t know you were Bruce’s friend,” Danny says cooly, attempting to hide his annoyance with the man. 

 

“You must be Bruce’s favor,” Constantine’s voice was strangled and Danny sighs, pinching the bridge of his nose. 

 

“This is going to take awhile, isn’t it?” Danny asks and John nods. 

 

“You’re welcome to use the salon,” Bruce suggests and Danny is quick to nod, wanting to get this whole situation over with as soon as he could. The man had already caused enough of a headache for Danny, he didn’t want to have to interact with the man any more than he had to. 

****************************************

After Bruce had given instructions for the pair of them, they had walked in silence, knowing that there was still a chance that they could be overheard. Only once they had entered the salon and Constantine had collapsed to the couch and pulled out a flask, did Danny speak. 

 

“I assume you know who I am,” Danny asks, leaning back as he crossed his arms. 

 

“That I do, yer majesty,” John replies, somehow sinking further into the couch. 

 

“I trust you won’t be telling them?” Danny asks and John bolts upright, looking like he wanted to run. 

 

“Fuckin hell kid, you don’t keep things from Ba-Bruce,” John tries to refuse and Danny raises his eyebrows. 

 

“I am the one in control of seventy five percent of your soul. I believe you could make an exception,” Danny not to subtly threaten, lighting up an orb of ectoplasm in his hand roughly the shape of a ghost's core with maybe twenty five percent of it missing, as a visual reminder of the power he had over Constantine. 

 

“Bloody hell,” Constantine mutters and Danny smiles. 

 

“More like king of it, but I understand the sentiment,” 

 

“You’ve still got yourself a shit ton of curses, never mind the fact that you’re king. You wanna hand with that?” John asks, still having the job that Bruce gave him. 

 

Danny regards him with a suspicious look for a moment before nodding, not quit relaxing, but easing in Constantine’s presence. Don’t get Danny wrong, he didn’t trust Constantine in the least, but if he could somehow get rid of some of Danny’s horrible luck, which may or may not be caused by generations old curses, he would give it a shot. Anyways, if Constantine was going to do something, there wasn’t a doubt in Danny’s mind that he couldn’t dish back twice then that Constantine could to do him. 

 

“I’m surprised the curse thing was legitimate. I would’ve thought you made that up to get them off your back,” Constantine comments, pulling various odds and ends from his coat and what Danny suspected to be pocket portals. 

 

“Yeah. It was a surprise myself. Another ghost made an offhanded remark about my family going back to its old ways when I spit them back in the infinite realms. I did some digging once I had time and found out about my families past. Turns out we went from being witches to hunting ghosts with a sabbatical thrown in for good measure,” Danny casually throws out, even if the fact that he’s one of those ghosts. 

 

“Lets get to it then. God only knows how long this’ll take,"Constantine insists and Danny nods, agreeing. 

 

There was no telling how long the Waynes would be patient and give them space. So far, they had left the two of them alone, giving the salon a wide berth. Danny did not trust that to last long. 

*********************************************

“What do you think they’re doing?” Tim asks, peering beyond the living room to where Danny and Constantine had disappeared off to. Bruce had shut down the surveillance system in that room to afford them some privacy, so Tim couldn’t even hack in and watch from the hidden cameras. 

 

“Most likely getting rid of the so called curses Fenton has,” Damian speaks, voice full of condescending and disdain. 

 

“I’m pretty sure they are actual curses, Kiddo. I don’t think Constantine would look like that if it was something Danny was making up,” Dick replies ruffling Damian’s hair, bravely risking his fingers being bitten off. 

 

“Dick does have a point. I thought Constantine was about to pass out once he caught sight of Danny. Even Bruce seemed slightly freaked out,” Tim points out, trying to get past Bruce’s password and firewalls to access the surveillance cameras in the salon. 

 

“Which is why you need to leave well enough alone. Mr. Constantine and Danny are having a private meeting concerning Danny’s personal life, we as hosts have a duty to provide that to them,” Alfred calls out and Tim jumps, guiltily hiding the tablet behind his back. 

 

Grumbles are heard around the room, and Alfred has to hide a smile. Bruce had made similar objections, wanting to know all of the information all at once. Alfred had insisted on locking the surveillance to the room and locking out every member of the household from the security system. 

 

While Alfred wasn’t positive, he believed that young Danny was connected to his old friend, Clockwork. 

Chapter 14: Jason, Danny's new problem

Notes:

I have been blessed by both the creative and computer gods. Have another chapter.

Lots of love SSRI

Danny will never say being decursed was pain-free, but it was significantly less painful than he had assumed. Really, the most painful part of the whole thing was enduring Constantine, who hadn’t stopped bitching about how difficult dealing with Infinite Realms ‘bullshit’ was. Honestly, Danny was ready to lock Constantine in a room in his palace and make him do all his own paperwork. The man had caused more of a headache for Danny then the Infinite Realms had caused for the brit. And he was the one to sell his own soul, so his troubles were entirely his own fault. 

 

“Is that strictly necessary?” Danny asks, watching the stock of sage, rosemary, wolfsbane, as well as half a dozen other herbs burned and flaked ash as Constantine waved it around. 

 

“It is if you want to get the curses away from you without them infesting the entire manor. Now shut up, I’m concentrating,” Constantine demands and Danny rolls his eyes. 

 

As far as Danny could tell, Constantine was waving around a smoldering bundle of twigs and leaves, the smoke of which was curling around him and causing the back of his throat to tickle in an unpleasant way. Danny had patiently sat through being sprayed with supposed holy water, had chalk sprinkled on him, oil smeared on his forehead, and Constantine chanted directly into his ear while swatting his back between his shoulder blades. At this point, it felt like Constantine was making up the most ridiculous ways to somehow try and embarrass Danny. Not that they had any sort of audience. 

 

Finally, blessedly, Constantine extinguishes the half-burnt twig bundle and steps back, looking Danny over with a critical eye and a wave of sparkly light, which pleasantly tingled when it made contact with Danny. 

 

“Yer curse free, you insane bloke. What’re you telling Brucie and his herd out there?” Constantine asks and Danny blinks, trying to understand what Constantine meant. 

 

“I’m curse-free? Yay? I don’t really know what else to say,” Danny shrugs as if the thought never occurred to him. 

 

“Well, you blabed that you were a descendant of a line of witches. Logic says you can do magic, Bruce tells me you froze a knife in midair. You gonna explain that or am I going to have to find some sort of excuse?” Constantine asks, seeming thoroughly done with the day, judging by the slight murder in his eyes. 

 

“Eh, I’ll figure it out. Speaking of that, do you want help with your little soul problem? Because let me tell you man, it is foul ,” Danny scrunches his nose and squints at the man in disdain. 

 

“Help with it?” Constantine asks faintly and Danny nods, frowning. 

 

“Yeah, you’re missing like ninety-nine percent of it. I’ve only got about seventy-five percent now, but I am happy to hand it over. Maybe you’ll be a little less…fractured,” Danny struggles to find the word without seeming like a complete ass. 

 

Already could he feel what Constantine had done. He felt lighter than before as if he could finally breathe. And the constant pain had lessened into a dull ache, a thousand times better than the sharp stinging that had radiated from his back from the moment he woke up from his fight. Maybe it was temporary, but Danny would take it. 

 

“Look, you don’t feel right, not to me and not to whatever else supernatural entities you meet. You feel fractured and sharp, like if you stand to close you’ll get cut. Not to mention how wrong it feels to only have a tiny fragment of your soul and have the rest of it elsewhere. I mean, do you have any idea of how wrong you feel?” Danny asks, waving his hand around as if that explained anything. 

 

“I feel wrong,” Constantine parrots and Danny sighs, worn out. 

 

“Of course you do. Now do you want seventy-five now and wait for the other twenty-five or wait for it all?” Danny asks impatiently, regarding Constantine with a look he couldn’t quite place. 

 

“What do you want?” Constantine asks with suspicion, gathering amounts of magic that were pitiful compared to Danny’s power but was the only thing John had left in the tank. 

 

“For your paperwork to be off my desk. Do you know how much paperwork and official letters of demand I had to send out? It is not a good look to have a fractured human soul scattered throughout the Infinite Realms. It’s my job as king to bargain, trick, and steal it all back from every demon and entity you decided to give it to. Your soul nonsense is like half of the work I have to do,” Danny grumbles, crossing his arms. 

 

“You would just…give it back? To not have paperwork?” Constantine asks, mouth agape and Danny groans. 

 

“Yes! You stupid man. This time, try keeping it all together,” Danny grumbles, summoning the soul fragments he had spent months collecting. 

 

Slowly, they formed, creating a dazzling almost copy of the ectoplasm green core Danny had originally shown Constantine. Slowly, they fused together, bright lines flashing and melding together. The one reason Danny hadn’t already fused them was because it was a pain containing a soul. The larger the fragment, the harder it was to contain. Without a second thought, Danny sends it hurtling at Constantine, who braces for impact. 

 

Instead of knocking the man physically over, it sinks into his chest, and Danny can’t help the wonder as Constantine glows golden for a moment. Slowly, Danny feels the fractures start to mend, not completely, and not fully, but the edges are less ragged and Constantine as a whole feels less like something wrong and more like a human. Danny can still sense where his soul is missing, that he isn’t complete, but it was better. Danny could sit in the same room as him and not want to crawl out of his skin or punt Constantine to the next state. 

 

“There. The rest’ll take time, they're with some pretty nasty demons, but in a few months, you should have a full soul,”  Danny said, quite proud of himself.

 

Constantine didn’t seem to know what to think, blinking as he gaped at Danny. He opened and closed his mouth a few times, glanced at the door, glanced at Danny, and then seemed to make a decision. In a millisecond, Constantine folded in on himself, his image warping. With a soft pop and a few sparks of light, he was gone, seemingly having fled the situation. 

 

Danny was left sitting in the salon alone, blinking as he watched the last of the smoke waver and curl away, leaving behind the smell of incense. He didn’t quite know what Constantine’s issue was with keeping his soul together, but he hoped the man would take better care of it now. All that was left was the last little bit of it, and Danny’s Constantine problems would be a thing of the past. 

 

With a satisfied roll of his shoulders, he wheeled himself to the door and opened it, setting off in search of everyone else. Maybe they hadn’t finished the movie yet, and Danny wanted to know if he was right about the lawyer being behind it the whole time. 

**************************************************

Constantine was right and properly freaked out, if you asked him in that moment. Danny had been odd since he had first met him, watching some knock off Sherlock Holmes movie. It would have taken someone blind to miss that he radiated the power of the Infinite Realms that stemmed from him and seemed to fill the entire manor. The presence wasn’t malicious, in fact, his energy boosted the already established house spirit, but it was like a punch to the gut. 

 

Constantine knew when he saw the crown above his head, that he was more powerful than Constantine first thought. For Christ's sake, the king to an entire dimension was watching a cheesy detective movie with the majority of the bat clan, seeming all to happy to be there. And then John was given the task of decursing the monarch, who seemed to have no idea the true extent of the curses he was under. 

 

One of them alone cut his power in half, a leftover from when the Nightingales had been a threat to the supernatural world at large. Constantine didn’t even want to guess what his power level would be at once it was broken. He could already feel the insane power of the crown and Danny as High King of the Infinite Realms. And then he did the unimaginable.

 

He gave Constantine back the majority of his soul. 

 

No arguing, no stipulations, no favors. Just a request that he take better care of it, which was unimaginable. John would assume that Danny had no idea of what he held if Danny hadn’t made it clear the trouble he went to in order to retrieve the amount of John’s soul that he already had. And was seemingly going to be going back for the rest of it, if the talk of returning the last of it was true. Which put John into a bit of a pickle. 

 

He had traded his soul for an extended life, for curing his cancer, for solving the giant spear sticking out of his chest, for any other time he would have otherwise died, he traded a fragment of his soul. He knew his fate once his mortal body died, he would be torn between every place his soul belonged to, but he wouldn’t have had to experience that for a few decades at least. Now that was up in the air. 

 

Constantine had no idea which soul fragments Danny had collected, or the stipulation of that collection. Was he still granted the favors he traded his soul for? Was he about to develop stage four lung cancer again? Was his liver going to give out on him finally? 

 

These were questions that should have been asked to Danny, and like the cowered John was, he had ran. He didn’t like owing people, a by-product of trading more and more fragments of his soul. And now he owed Danny. Decursing Danny was a favor he owed Batsy, Danny returning his soul had been something Danny did independently from Bruce and their deal. 

 

John’s whole life ran on bargains, deals, and favors. And now he was left stuck unknowing whether he owed the kid anything. After all, the return of the majority of someone's soul was beyond paying for coffee. 

**********************************

When Danny made his way back to the living room the Wayne siblings had been left watching a movie, he discovered that the movie had been paused, and each sibling was on their own device, looking various levels of constipated and tense. 

 

“Who died?” Danny asks, and every single one of them snaps to look at him, each face holding a certain level of surprised, from Damian’s almost indifference, to Dicks blatant shock. 

 

“That, was faster than I thought it would be,” Tim comments, seeming puzzled. 

 

“Constantine’s good, when properly motivated. Can we finish the movie?” Danny asks, breezing past his slight slip. 

 

Cass seems to have latched onto it though, and he notices yet again when she regards him with a suspicious look, which was fair when Danny thought about it. 

 

In all honesty, he would have assumed the Wayne family would have been a lot more suspicious of him, a strange boy whom their father had brought home. Then again, knowing what Danny did about the Wayne’s, Bruce was about due to bring back another kid for adoption. The joke's on him, Danny was an adult! Take that!

 

But honestly, the one who had regarded him with the most suspicion, at least openly, was Cass, quickly followed by Jason. 

 

Which brought him to another problem, dealing with Jason. 

 

Jason, was something. Danny wasn’t exactly sure what Jason was, but his core demanded that he be taken care of as a semi-citizen of the Infinite Realms, which meant that Jason was connected to him one way or another. It was Danny’s duty as king, and as a decent semi-human being, to figure out what the hell was wrong with Jason and try to fix him. All the while trying to seem like any normal employee. 

 

Well, normal employee had flown out of the window when Bruce ‘restarted’ his heart and ‘saved his life’. It had ended when he went to stay at the head boss's house, told them he was cursed and had magic, Bruce called in a favor to decurse him, and then whatever the hell was going to happen with Jason. 

 

It seemed as if the movie would have to wait. 

 

“Jason, I think you and I have some things to discuss,” Danny asks, and Jason narrows in on him, glaring slightly. 

 

Danny wasn’t sure where the hostilities came from, but he couldn’t exactly blame Jason. He had a lot of things to explain to Jason, and his fake explanation at breakfast wasn’t going to cut it, no matter how much he wanted it to. He wouldn’t do that to Jason, he couldn’t. 

 

Jason had something inside of him that he didn’t understand, Danny wasn’t sure he understood it either, but he was willing to give it a shot. It was the least he could do for Jason, who his core was certain was one of his, calling out mine, protect, guide, heal . As loudly and insistently as it could manage. 

 

“Yeah, I think we do. Let's go out to the gardens,” Jason suggests and Danny nods, agreeing easily. 

 

He was sure this wasn’t easy for Jason, and if being in the gardens helped him deal, then who was Danny to deny that? As king, it was his duty to serve and help his subjects, even the ones he wasn’t quite sure about yet. If it wasn’t his duty as king, it was his duty as a human being. 

 

“Wait, whats this about?” Dick asks, catching on to the fact that the air between Danny and Jason was becoming charged and Jason was growing more tense as the seconds went by. 

 

“Jason mentioned something last night, an old book he thinks I’ll be interested in. He wanted to try and convince me to read it,” Danny lied smoothly. 

If the years as a secret, underaged, half dead, hero did anything for him, it allowed him to be able to lie. 

 

“Yeah, kid’s never read Pride and Prejudice. A true crime if you ask me,” Jason replies tensely, and its not just Danny who can hear the tension in him, judging by the slightly defensive postures the rest of Jason’s siblings took. 

 

They relax slightly at the explanation, but a current of tension remains underneath the atmosphere of the room. Unless Danny was really careful, both with Jason and the rest of the family, he could get himself in a lot of trouble and on the family's bad side, and he didn’t want to do that when Bruce just used a favor to decurse him. 

 

“Come on, I think convincing you is going to take some work,” Jason suggests, although Danny gets the distinct impression that he wasn’t wriggling out of this, which he didn’t want to, but the sentiment remained. 

 

Danny wasn’t sure about this, but he was sure of the fact that Jason had something nasty hiding in him and it was hurting him. If Jason hadn’t figured it out yet, it was up to Danny to both get rid of it and convince Jason not to go tell his family everything that Danny was about to explain. 

Chapter 15: Danny, the Batclan's Newest Problem

Warmth is sitting by the fire, warmth is playing out in the snow. Warmth is being surrounded by those who you love and care about you, and who love and care about you. Jason had felt so cold for so long that he wasn’t sure what warmth was anymore. Not until Danny came along. 

 

The pit rage was a cold, raging fire, as contradictory as that was. It consumed him and twisted him. It twisted his thoughts and demanded a level of paranoia, shoving away all those who could have helped him. It’s what made him so susceptible to Talia and her brainwashing, it’s partially what made him drop off a duffle with eight severed heads inside. 

 

And for the first time since his death, he felt warmth. 

 

Danny brought that warmth with him, he quieted the pit rage, and he made Jason’s thoughts clear for once. He didn’t have to fight back the pit rage to be around his siblings without killing them. He didn’t want to take Bruce’s head off, and could even understand, even if partially, why Bruce wouldn’t kill the Joker. 

 

It was a startling and concerning realization. And that just flooded Jason with the bat's certain brand of paranoia. Who was Danny to be able to do this? Why was it him, a stranger with no apparent connection with Jason, the family, or the pits? What sort of magic woowoo did Danny have that made Jason feel like a sane person for the first time in literal years?  

 

“Jason? Are you okay?” Danny asks, looking at him from the other side of the French doors that opened up to the backyard. 

 

Jason startles out of his daze and nods, following Danny outside. He was the one who wanted to talk outside. Away from any internal surveillance cameras or microphones, the manor might have hidden. While this development was probably something he should be telling the rest of the clan, he still had a certain level of paranoia Danny’s presence couldn’t erase, whether that was because of his time on the streets, as Robin, his death, rebirth, or rampage as Red Hood was unknown. 

 

“I’m sure you have questions,” Danny asks, taking the lead wheeling himself towards the gardens. Jason was happy enough to let him speak, merely nodding. 

 

“What you have to understand is that what I tell you, your family might not be happy with. I’m not going to tell you not to tell them, because that should be your decision, but they might not take it well,” Danny starts and Jason nods, somewhat thankful that Danny wasn’t telling him to keep this to himself right off the bat. 

 

“You’re not going to tell me I have cancer or something like that, right?” Jason tries to joke but any humor fades at the look Danny gives him. 

 

“If you want a medical comparison, I would say it would be closer to pneumonia. Treatable, but stubborn at the best of times. You’ve died before, haven’t you?” Danny asks and Jason jolts, hand going for the gun that wasn’t in his waistband. 

 

“It’s okay, so have I,” Danny finishes, looking out over the garden. 

************************************

Danny had no idea if this was the way to explain to Jason, but he didn’t have a better one. He had never actually had to do this before, he had never had to both explain what was going on with someone else exposed to ectoplasm while also explaining that he had died before. 

 

“Bruce mentioned your collapse on the business trip. I think I’ve got something different,” Jason tries to object, and Danny can’t help but smile. If only it were that easy. 

 

“I’m not talking about that. It happened when I was fourteen. My parents are scientists, and they are obsessed with ghosts. They decided that building a portal to the dimension they lived in was a good idea. Spoiler, it wasn’t,” Danny pauses here and looks at Jason, trying to judge his reaction. 

 

If Danny had to put a name to the special expression Jason wore, it was disbelief with a heavy dose of suspicion. 

 

“They were working on the portal for most of my life, they were obsessed and not even their kids could pull them away. They finally finished it on my birthday, and they were so excited they didn’t even realize it was my birthday. When they tried to fire it up, it failed and didn’t even spark. They were so disappointed. I was dumb and figured if I could get it working, there might still be time to celebrate my birthday, I still can’t believe I was that stupid,” Danny remarks bitterly. 

 

“You weren’t stupid, you just wanted your parents on your birthday,” Jason interjects and Danny smiles, but there is no warmth or humor behind it. 

 

“I was. I went down to their lab and decided to try my hand at fixing it up, my parents were drinking upstairs, frustrated that yet another portal failed. My two best friends were with me. I wandered into the portal and started poking at things I shouldn’t have. I tripped over some loose wires and when I went to catch myself, I pressed the on button. Can you believe that? My genius parents screwed up the wiring so the on button was on the inside. When the portal finally turned on, I was inside of it. I had a hole to a different dimension rip open on top of me, it tore my body apart,” Danny pauses again and grits his teeth against the memory. 

 

“The other dimension was full of an unknown energy, ectoplasm. While the dimension opening killed me, the energy also brought me back to life. I couldn’t tell you how long I was stuck in that place, dying and being revived in the same millisecond. My friends told me it was only a few seconds before the portal spat me out, you could have told me it was a millenia, and I wouldn’t disagree. As it turns out, a portal to another dimension opening causes a fair bit if noise. My parents and sister came charging down the stairs. I was pretty out of it, but I will never forget how my parents ignored me in favor of the portal, not even noticing their somewhat crispy son lying on the ground with his best friends crying over him. My sister had to be the one to get me to the hospital, my parents were too distracted and insisting that I ‘would be fine’. What a joke,” Danny couldn’t help his bitterness. 

 

He remembered the pain, he could still feel his body spasming as his muscles were overloaded with electricity. He remembered his parent's words, they were burned into his memory, and he remembers wishing that someone had been there to protect him, to protect his best friends from having to watch him die. 

 

“They shouldn’t have done that,” Jason insists and Danny nods, slowly loosening the grip he had on his wheelchair. 

 

“They shouldn’t have, but they did. I came back, but I didn’t come back right, not fully. They call me a halfa, half alive, half dead, stuck in that state of half alive and half dead. Ectoplasm is mixed with my blood in this form, and blood is mixed with ectoplasm in my other form. I think you came back wrong as well. Maybe not as extreme, but you have ectoplasm as well, my core recognizes it in you,” Danny explains, looking at Jason, who was as pale as a sheet, swaying on his feet as if he was about to fall over. 

 

“Thats-that-what,” Jason doesn’t seem to know what to say, and Danny couldn’t blame him, he just had his whole world turned on its head. 

 

“How did you come back?” Danny asks, giving Jason a specific question to answer. 

 

“Big green pit, bubbling and nasty looking,” Jason quietly answers and he isn’t looking any better than before, but he wasn’t reaching for a weapon. 

 

“Yeah, that's not good. Ectoplasm shouldn’t be bubbling. You’ve probably got corrupted ecto in you, that's why you feel funny,” Danny explains, unsure if he would have to catch Jason. 

 

“Can you fix it? You wouldn’t tell me this otherwise, right?” Jason asks, and Danny feels his core ache. 

 

Jason’s voice is tiny and vulnerable sounding and Danny wants to fix it. It doesn’t sound right, and Danny needs to fix it . 

 

“I’ll try, I wouldn’t leave you with this all alone. I think its already working, just being around you. I can act as a filter of sorts for ectoplasm, I think the gunk is already working its way through your system with me just being here. I can maybe speed it up but that’s probably going to be best if you were horizontal, I don’t exactly trust you to stay up right now, let alone when I go poking around at the stuff that is keeping you going,” Danny suggests and Jason nods dumbly, and Danny would bet that he wasn’t hearing anything he was saying. 

 

“You can really fix me?” Jason asks and Danny sighs. 

 

“I can try. I might need some backup, but if its what I think it is, yeah. Shouldn’t take too long if I’m given somewhere without distractions, and durable,” Danny adds in, thinking of how exactly Jason could react to the cleaning. 

 

“Deal, I can do that. I don’t care what Bruce has to say,” Jason blurts out, and Danny is sure he was about to go running if Danny didn’t snag his shirt.

“Hold up there, you need to figure out what your family is going to hear. I can tell you, my family doesn’t know, besides my sister. And there’s something else you need to know. Technically, the both of us are illegal, and the US government has given blanket rights to capture, contain, experiment, and exterminate us without distinction,” Danny drops his last bomb and Jason blinks, seemingly having a hard time processing this. 

 

“ What ?” Jason’s voice is pure rage and Danny panics a moment before it's apparent Jason is actually going to get an answer before going off on his rampage. 

 

“The Anti-Ecto acts, signed into law when I was fifteen. They strip any ecto entities of their rights and demand that they be captured, experimented on, and then exterminated. They declare us nonsapient and nonsentient,” Danny explains and Jason’s eyes turn bright green. 

 

Danny doesn’t have a chance to stop him before he goes and takes off back towards the manor and Danny starts cursing. And it was going so well. 

********************************************

Alfred was watching out the kitchen window as Jason and Danny made their way to the garden and stopped, having a conversation. It was a distance away, there was no chance of him overhearing, but he was able to watch their body language. Danny seemed to be deeply hurt, curling in on himself, and Jason was getting more and more mad the longer the conversation went on, with a fair deal of shock thrown in for good measure. 

 

Jason turns back to walk towards the house, and Danny snags his shirt, stopping him and seeming to talk to him. If Alfred thought Jason was mad before, it didn’t compare to what he was now, Alfred knew that if he was any closer, he would be able to see Jason physically shaking with the amount of rage his body held. 

 

Jason rips away from Danny and starts charging at the house, purpose in every step. This was a bad type of rage, one that had an actual purpose and goal, it was when Jason was at his most dangerous. Alfred quickly sets the alarm off and lets the other residents of the house know that Jason is currently caught up in a pit rage episode. 

 

“Alfred! Get Bruce!” Jason yells, bursting through the French doors with enough force to fracture a pane, which is impressive given the fact that they were made out of tempered glass. 

 

“If your intention is to harm him, I will not. What did Danny say to get you so upset?” Alfred asks, voice patient. 

 

“Just the fact that the US government is torturing and imprisoning innocent people, so Tuesday,” Jason growls and Alfred pauses, needing a moment to take in what exactly Jason had just said. 

 

“I believe this is going to require a longer conversation. Why don’t I put on some tea and we wait for Danny to get back?” Alfred suggests, and it looks like Jason is going to object before he agrees and slumps down at the kitchen table, still looking furious, but less likely to take anyone's head off, figuratively or literally. 

 

Jason looks like he’s about to object, but Danny comes rolling through the door and gives him a look, to which he only looks minorly ashamed, but a bit of tension bleeds out of him and he slumps, looking at the floor. Alfred is impressed, he wasn’t entirely certain he could have convinced Jason to back down with just a look. 

 

“Alfred, it seems like Jason wants to tell the family something. I’ll let you two sort out where and who exactly, I need to go make a call,” Danny says, and leaves the kitchen, passing Dick on his way out. 

 

“Alfie, Jason does not seem to be in rage mode,” Dick comments calmly, quickly glancing at the broken pane. 

 

While Dick’s voice was calm, his body was tense, either to pull Alfred out of the kitchen by force or restrain a rampaging Jason. Dick had enough experience with Jason to know that while Jason was calm now, that could change any second. 

 

Dick had, by nature of being the oldest sibling, the most emotionally intelligent, and the one Jason tolerated the most, besides Alfred that is, was typically involved in trying to calm down Jason, whether that was by getting him something to eat or sticking him in a headlock. 

 

“Dick, you don’t have to look at me like I’ll fly off the handle at any moment, for the moment I’m not about to lose it. Only because I’ve got another goal in mind,” Jason grumbles, and Dick winces. 

 

Jason has his beyond pissed-off voice on. The one where he goes beyond yelling, and into the calm rage. Dick had only ever heard him this angry a few times before, the time one of the Alley kids died because someone sold them drugs against Hood’s orders. Or when a John just about beat one of his girls to death when she refused a service. Neither of those responsible were still alive, both having died deaths Dick wouldn’t wish on many. If Jason was that level of pissed now, Dick wasn’t sure he wanted to know what Danny did to make him that angry. 

 

The fact that Danny wasn’t dead already made Dick think that Danny offhandedly mentioned something that sent Jason off. Dick knew that there were multiple concerning things about Danny, the most obvious was the night in the labs Tim told him about. Dick wouldn’t doubt that Danny had more secrets and more concerning facts about himself. 

*****************************************

“So, do you want to explain why we are here?” Tim asks, staring at the rest of the table. 

 

Jason had decided that everyone was going to be there and had pulled the rare card for a full batclan meeting, unless you were in the hospital dying, you were there. And everyone had shown up. Dick, Jason, Tim, Damian, Cass, Duke, Barbara, Stephanie, and of course Bruce. 

 

Danny was an unexpected addition, Tim will admit, but not as surprising as Danny seemed to be. Alfred made sure each and every member of the family had a calming cup of tea in front of them, and each one had their preferred snack in front of them. 

 

“We are here because the United States Government is doing what it does best, being a shitty entity. Danny mentioned some disturbing facts about his hometown and what the government has done there. I’m giving him the chance to explain, or I’ll say what he told me,” Jason explains, directing the last of it towards Danny, who shrinks back. 

 

Jason had talked with Danny before everyone had gathered at the kitchen table, he made it clear Danny wouldn’t have to reveal that Danny himself was an ecto entity. He made it clear that Danny wouldn’t have to out himself in order to protect the rest of his people.  He would never make Danny out himself, that should always be someone's choice, whether that be to come out of the closet or reveal that he was classified as an enemy of the United States while being perfectly innocent. 

 

“I guess I will,” Danny mutters, picking at his nails, seeming beyond nervous. 

 

Whatever Danny was going to say, everyone not in the know had a bad feeling about it. They had been in the business long enough to know that whatever Jason and Danny were about to reveal, it wasn’t going to be good. Bruce was also very familiar with the fact that the US government loved breaking human rights and treating those who are seen as ‘other’ as less than. With what Tim told him about his late-night lab visit, Bruce had a guess that Danny was connected to someone ‘other’ and the US government took issue with that. 

 

The family settled in for a long explanation, knowing that whatever was going down, wasn’t going to be brief. 

Chapter 16: The Explanation

Notes:

I really have no idea where this is going, but I'm excited to be along for the ride! Any input is much appreciated! And I have decided what to do with Danny and his wheelchair, thanks to the lovely people who both commented and voted! It means a lot to me to know that readers were able to identify with Danny and felt comfortable sharing that. It really helped to know that I was writing Danny in a good way. I don't know if I've mentioned this, but I am not disabled and am doing my best to write a character who is. If I've said or written anything offensive, PLEASE TELL ME, that is the last thing I want to do.

Anyway, here's another chapter!

Lots of love SSRI!

“What I told you before was true, I am connected to magic. But my hometown is also connected to a different dimension, the Infinite Realms, or the Ghost Dimension. Most in town call it The Zone. My parents were the ones to rip open that doorway, with science, not magic,” Danny starts, playing complicated gymnastics in his head while he arranged what he had already told the Waynes, what he wanted to tell them, and what they couldn’t know under any circumstances. 

 

“I was the first to activate the portal they made, and I made first contact with a ghost from the other side, he calls himself Phantom. Before you even think it, we are not the same person, even if it looks like we could be twins. He didn’t have a human form when he first crossed over, so he latched onto and copied the first thing he saw, me,” The entire family was looking at Danny as if he had grown a second head or shifted to his second form. 

 

Tim had, for the first time he sat down, stopped typing on his laptop, which was something. 

 

“Phantom wasn’t the only entity to cross over, not by a long shot. Sometimes they were like any tourist in a new place, just wanting to look around, sometimes not. The first year they were here, the more dangerous ones caused a lot of destruction. Phantom did their best to control the more destructive and unruly lot, but they were our equivalent of a child, barely formed when they first crossed over. None of the other ghosts respected them or listened to them, and they got into more fights than anyone could count. Over time, Phantom got the other ghosts to respect them, it’s how the hierarchy of the Infinite Realms worked, the stronger you are, the more you are respected slash listened to,” Danny couldn’t force himself to sound confident, what he was doing was monumentally stupid and risky. 

 

The whole family just nodded in synch, as if encouraging him on. The only one who would know the truth would be Jason, and as he learned more about Phantom, he looked even paler than the rest of the family. 

 

“Even if Phantom eventually got the ghosts under control, the government formed a new, secret, branch of the military to deal with the interdimensional threat. They called themselves the Ghost Investigation Ward, all the kids called them the Guys in White, or the GIW, since they only wore white suits. They were tasked to capture, experiment on, and then eliminate any Ecto Entity they came across. With the Anti-Ecto Acts, this was completely legal. Phantom and most of the town disagreed. They knew ghosts could be dangerous, but they still deserved not to be cut open and Ended, not to mention Phantom would have been their victim as well and all they had tried to do was help. We reached out to the Justice League for help, but no one ever responded. Phantom enlisted the help of me and my two friends, Sam Manson and Tucker Foley, to keep order between the GIW and ghosts. The ghosts didn’t deserve what the GIW was going to do to them, but they still didn’t deserve to be Ended. The GIW is still hunting any Ecto Entity, that is, any person, animal, plant, or other that possesses Ectoplasm with specialized scanners and weapons capable of Ending them. The Anti-Ecto acts declare such as non-sentient and non-sapient, and thus no rights apply to them, human or metahuman. Not even animal rights,” Danny finished bitterly, internally begging the family to buy the story. 

 

“And take one guess at what the Lazarus pits are,” Jason cuts in, feeling like he is going to lose anything left in his stomach. 

 

The rest of the family pale impossibly further, and glance between Danny and Jason, and Danny just nods. 

 

“Yes, Jason is Ecto Contaminated, he, according to the US Government, has no rights and there are orders for his experimentation and execution,” Danny clarifies, and only blinks as Bruce stands up, sprints towards a vase, and empties his stomach, gaging. 

 

Danny notices the surprise on Jason’s face and wonders what exactly that means. He would expect any father to have a similar reaction to Bruce hearing that his son had no rights and people were technically hunting him down to kill him. The rest of the family doesn’t look any better, and Tim had practically attacked his laptop, Barbara pulling her own out with as much ferocity. 

 

Alfred looked just as horrified, but gathered himself up at went into the kitchen, returning with a glass of water and handing it to a still green-looking Bruce, who took it, drained it, and then wiped his mouth with the handkerchief Alfred handed over. Bruce seemed to pull himself together, eyes lingering on Jason, and then Danny before he glanced at Tim and Barbara, Danny was honestly worried about their keyboards, the sound of clacking keys ringing out around the kitchen table. 

 

“Tim, Barbara, gather and report. Jason, Damian, and Cass go to the basement and hang out in the vault, it should block any sort of scanner. Danny, if you don’t mind, I would appreciate it if you would come with me. Dick, contact the League and have Hal and Oa standing by,” 

 

The way Bruce pulled himself together, and started organizing the family hinted to Danny that in that moment, he wasn’t Brucie Wayne, beloved playboy, but someone else. Jason and Damian look like they are going to object to being ordered into a vault when Dick nudges them, and somehow has an entirely silent conversation that gets them to agree, following Cass as she heads out of the kitchen. 

 

“What the hell is happening?” Danny asks, now thoroughly confused. 

 

He had expected to tell the Wayne family exactly what was wrong with Jason, maybe tell them he could fix Jason’s little anger issue, and tell them to keep their mouths shut up. He did not expect them all to leap into action at Bruce’s orders doing god knows what. And Danny had no idea that Bruce or Dick had a direct line to the Justice League, or at least that is who Danny was assuming the League was. 

 

“We’re figuring out what the hell is going on and fixing it,” Stephanie helpfully chimes in, and receives a growled ‘language’ from Bruce and a ‘swear jar’ from Alfred. 

 

“I’m going to need a lot more than that,” Danny crosses his arms and glares at Bruce, who only sighs tiredly and seems to age thirty years in as many seconds. 

 

“You, Danny, get to be the first civilian in the Watchtower. We’re going up so you can explain to the Justice League, the Green Lantern, and Oa Peace Corps what exactly has been going on in your town. And then we are going to fix it,” Bruce explains, and Danny pales further. 

 

It was at that moment that Danny knew he had fucked up somewhere along the way. 

***************************************************************

Let it be noted that Danny really wanted to know why Bruce Wayne had a Zetatube in his basement that went to the Justice League headquarters. Also, let it be noted that he was too distracted by the stars beyond the large windows to properly ask why Bruce had a teleportation device in his basement. As Danny saw it, every billionaire had something weird/expensive in his basement, and Bruce simply reinforced this theory. 

 

“Are you okay?” Duke asks, and Danny snaps away from the window, looking at the boy who had startled him. 

 

The second the white light faded from the tube, Danny had zoomed towards the large window with space beyond, ignoring everything else about that space he was taken, which on second consideration, wasn’t the best. For all Danny knew, this was an elaborate trap set by Bruce, but Space . 

 

“Fine, just fine,” Danny mumbles, turning back to the window, the inky blackness and spots of stars capturing his attention once again. 

 

Bruce couldn’t help but watch in amusement. The reason Danny was here was anything beyond amusing, but the boy's reaction to seeing space was going to be the highlight of his month if this was about to go as he thought it was. 

 

In the last forty minutes, the horrors of what the United States government had done to and in Amity had been revealed by Danny, he had revealed that the GIW was in part why he was vivisected, and Jason had just about been thrown into another Pit Rage episode if Danny hadn’t somehow managed to calm him down. 

 

Bruce nearly emptied his stomach again hearing of Danny’s experience at the hands of those monsters and had nearly flung off the handle himself. Somewhere, someone was interfering with League communications. With how many times, and what was reported, at least one member of the League should have been notified about Amity, at the bare minimum. If the communication was really getting to them, half the League would have been deployed, and when Danny explained the two times Pariah Dark had attacked, the entire League should have been involved, not what equivocated to a single child taking on all of it. Somewhere, something had failed, and Bruce was going to get to the bottom of it. 

 

He would burn down whoever allowed such atrocities to occur, and destroy anyone who tried to protect them. 

***********************************************

When everyone was finally situated, when the big three, Wonderwoman, Superman, and Batman, after Bruce had ‘left’ Danny to return home, plus Hal Jordan and the council of Elder’s conference calling in from Oa, were in the conference room, Danny revealed exactly what happened. Starting at first contact, going through Phantom’s fights, Amity being pulled into the alternative dimension, Phantom fighting and winning against the King, becoming king, being captured by the GIW, dissected, freed by Danny’s friends, Pariah Dark somehow being released again, Danny being paralyzed during the fight between Phantom and Pariah Dark, every vile and illegal thing the GIW had done, it was all dragged out. 

 

Everyone sat in pure horror as Danny explained the uneasy peace that had settled in the town after Phantom ordered his subjects to stay in the Infinite Realms to be safe, and the GIW had directed their attention towards those in town who were ecto contaminated, who basically had to justify their human rights not to be carted off to some lab. 

 

“We will be sending representatives immediately. Hal Jordan, you are to travel to Amity and shut down the GIW immediately,” One of the Elders from Oa orders, and Hal nods, face grim. 

 

“We will figure this out, the Anti-Ecto acts and the actions of the GIW cannot stand,” Wonder Woman promises, directing the promise both to the Council of Elders of Oa, as well as Danny. 

 

Danny was thoroughly in shock at this point. He had been abandoned by Bruce a few minutes after arriving, and then immediately rushed into a meeting with some of the most important people on the planet, and then an entire council from another one. All Danny wanted to do at this point was wheel himself through one of the massive windows and enjoy the weightlessness of space, which he could just imagine would be heavenly, what it would do to his currently human body besides the point. 

 

“Huh?” 

******************************************

The adults in the situation noticed when Danny had checked out, about halfway through his explanation in fact. While he answered and recited facts, Danny’s mind was running on autopilot and the adults couldn’t fault him for that. They couldn’t have imagined the horrors Danny had seen, and experienced judging by his highly scarred body he showed those presnet to reiterate the fact that normal people were still caught in the crossfire. 

 

Danny had clearly hit his limit as he ignored those around him and stared out the windows while they tried to catch his attention. And again, they couldn’t blame him for that. They were full-grown adults, and they wouldn’t have done well in that situation, Danny was a kid for most of it, most of them would argue he still was a kid, having turned eighteen less than two months ago. 

 

“I’m going to take him back home, find him a distraction for him. Barbara and Tim hacked into the GIW servers and have gotten all the necessary information. They aren’t looking anywhere besides Amity, Jason, Cass, Damian, and Danny should be safe as long as they don’t decide to take a road trip,” Bruce mutters to Clark and Diana, who nod. 

 

Everyone had figured out pretty quickly that Danny was in the group of ecto contaminated, at the bare minimum, even if he denied it and insisted he was like any normal human. Bruce for one had seen his eyes flash green on more than one occasion, and with Tim’s story of their late-night chat, it only compounded his belief. They would let Danny think he had gotten away with it though, the poor kid was stressed enough as it was. 

 

“Should Lois do an article? Oa isn’t going to let this stand, Hal is about to obliterate the GIW, this is going to get very public, very fast,” Clark asks and Diana and Bruce look at each other. 

 

“Have her write one, but don’t publish it. We need to have a longer meeting about this with the rest of the League. We’ll meet back in a few hours without Danny,” Bruce decides, looking over to where Danny was completely captured by the stars. 

 

“Do you think that is a good idea? Wouldn’t it be best to hear it from Danny?” Clark asks and Bruce glares. 

 

“Do you think he looks up to that? We have the video and audio of this meeting, let alone whatever Tim and Barbara dug up. This wasn’t easy for Danny, and he wouldn’t have revealed any of this if it wasn’t for Jason,” Bruce growls, the slight voice modulation making it deeper and more intimidating. The two wouldn’t have argued in the first place, but that was just more evidence not to argue. 

 

What Danny and the rest of Amity had been through was horrible. And the least they could do was try to correct their past mistakes. But everyone shared one thought, what would Phantom do? 

 

Phantom had been brought into was basically amounted to a war, and then somehow became a child king of an entire dimension. As Danny described them, Phantom was a kind and understanding individual, they cared for both ghosts and humans. But what had been done to them, what humans had done to them and their people, Clark, Diana, and Bruce wouldn’t blame them if they had enough. In all honesty, if Phantom had the power Danny described, they were surprised Earth was still standing, let alone majorly unharmed. 

Chapter 17: Distractions and Another Problem

Notes:

So, I might have written this entire chapter to finally get it clear to Jason that he has feelings for Danny, and to give Danny a pretty dress. I have no regrets. I also watched Expendables 1, 2, and 3 while writing this, so there's that. I'm formatting this slightly different then normal with less space between each paragraph so let me know if you like that or not.

Lots of love SSRI

Bruce slowly, and patiently led Danny back into the Zetatube. Danny didn’t want to leave, and Bruce didn’t blame him. Even he had an occasional break where he just looked out into space, taking in the vastness and wondering what exactly was out there. 

As his career progressed, he learned that while there was a lot of good out in the universe, the majority of which visited earth was there in the name of conquering it, or subjecting humanity. But it was a nice fantasy to maintain. 

With Danny’s first application to the aerospace division of Wayne Enterprises, it was clear that Danny held a love for the stars. His presence on the Watchtower was as close to the stars as he would most likely get, what with his physical condition. 

“Danny, I promise you, you’ll get to come back here. But today’s been a lot,” Bruce tries to negotiate, refraining from touching his chair, but also not sure how he was going to draw Danny’s eyes off the big windows. 

Danny had been ignoring him for the last half hour, after Batman had ‘retired’ and then Bruce returned, Danny had parked himself in front of the large observational window and hadn’t moved or acknowledged anyone since then. 

“Danny, please. You’ll get to come back, but we need to go now,” Bruce tries again. 

Slowly, ever so slowly, Danny closes his eyes and turns away, seeming as if every movement pained him. Again, Bruce could understand, but he also understood that Danny couldn’t live on the Watchtower indefinitely. Now that everything about Amity and the GIW was revealed, this meeting at the Watchtower wasn’t going to be the only one. 

“Yeah, okay. We should probably leave before I catch sight of it again,” Danny insists, rolling himself away from the window and making an effort to not look outside again. 

 

**************************************

Danny and Bruce manage to make it back to Wayne Manor, as painful as it was for Danny. Bruce honestly felt bad, Danny just had to relive some of the most horrifying things the League had heard of. If Danny looking at space made him feel better, Bruce would have loved to let him stay there for as long as he wanted, but his presence on the Watchtower was questionable at best, downright questionable when he technically didn’t need to be there. 

They had settled on sitting in the kitchen, back to where Danny had first dropped the bomb that was Amity. Bruce had done his best to make tea when he remembered that Danny had enjoyed it, and realized that after the chaos of the day it might be appreciated, but after he he first spilled the leaves everywhere, and then mixed them into the teapot straight, he gave up and fired up the coffee maker, something he was well versed in using. It was, at this point, one of the only things in the kitchen he was allowed to touch after Alfred had snapped after the nth time one of the other residents of the manor nearly burned down the kitchen. 

“Danny, I got news that the deal over the pump was signed and agreed to. Wayne Enterprises is having a gala to celebrate. As one of the people who worked on the pump, you are naturally invited. I’m not sure if you have clothes for it, but either way, Wayne Enterprises will cover the cost of the expenses. I was thinking of sending one of the boys and Alfred with you to go shopping. Of course, you don’t have to, but I thought that it might be a good distraction for you, if you wanted to, of course,” Bruce suggests and Danny frowns, and even in all of Bruce’s years of body reading, he couldn’t quite decide on which emotion Danny was feeling. 

The answer was completely understandable as Danny had no idea what he was feeling at the moment. A gleam of pride showed through though, he had managed to work on his first project at Wayne Enterprises and it had been a complete success, securing a contract with another company. Then again, his memories of shopping for fine clothes were absolutely nightmarish, from being dragged along with Vlad to volunteering to go with Sam so she didn’t murder her own mother. Then again, it would certainly be distracting. 

“I’m fine with that, but someone is going to know what to look for besides me, I’m terrible at that sort of thing,” Danny shudders at the scolding he had received from Jazz the last time he had been let loose in a clothing store alone. While not particularly fashionable herself, Jazz had declared that his lime green Crocs and banana yellow shirt was an abomination and had promptly dunked them both in a vat of ectoplasm, which had the side effect of turning them varying shades of purple. (Jazz then resorted to a bonfire, declaring both were still horrible)

“Perfectly alright. I’ll let Alfred know, he had plenty of experience and dressed me from head to toe until I got the hang of it, same with all of the boys. I’ll see if anyone else needs to go shopping so you have someone around your own age there,” Bruce offers and breezes past Danny, mind already set on the mission. 

Danny watches him dumbly go, unsure of what to do in the meantime. Bruce had loaded him onto the elevator out of the basement and then wheeled him into the central kitchen, making his declaration and then dumping him there, giving him no further instruction of what exactly Danny should be doing. 

“You got Bruce’d, didn’t you?” Tim’s voice rings out and Danny turns around, spotting him awkwardly hovering at the doorway. 

“Yeah,” Is all Danny says, not sure if he should voice his concerns over his host. 

“Don’t worry, he does that to everyone. We’re half convinced that he’s on the spectrum in some way. Bruce is going to go wrangle a kid up and find Alfred, but in the meantime, we can go watch something? I’d offer to cook you something, but I’ve been banned. I can get you a coffee?” Tim offers and Danny shrugs. 

“I won’t turn down a coffee, the most caffeinated one you’ve got,” Danny jokes and suddenly wishes he hadn’t. 

Tim’s face stretches into an unnatural smile, and Danny is reminded of the way some ghosts smile to unnerve people, the way his eldritch form smiles when someones done something particularly vexing. Tim drags out a step ladder from besides the fridge and climbs up it, climbing onto the counter above the coffee station to bring out a black bag, a seal Danny knows all too well emblazoned in white. 

“Death Wish Coffee, finest coffee around,” Tim proudly proclaims and Danny can’t help but laugh at the manic tone of his voice. 

“You, Tim, might just be able to wake the dead,” The pun slips unnoticed by Tim who only smiles wider, and Danny internally cackles to himself. 

While it was funny using puns about death around Sam and Tucker, there was a higher level of humor around using death puns around the people who had no idea. One day he wondered if anyone would actually catch on, but that day hadn’t come yet so he wasn’t going to worry about it. 

“How much do you want? Fair warning, Alfred somehow wired the machine to not kick out any more then 16 ounces at once,” Tim warns, rifling around in the cabinets above the coffee station and pulling down two travel mugs, as well as flavor syrup. 

“That’s fine. My heart probably won’t be happy with any more than that,” Danny comments and Tim winces. 

“You sure it's alright? Cause we’ve got about two dozen other kinds of coffee, all with different caffeine amounts,” Tim offers and Danny playfully glares at him. 

“Take away your promise of caffeine and perish,” Tim bursts out laughing and starts on the coffee, choosing to make it in a simple drip, which Danny was thankful for. He didn’t want Tim to go through any extra effort besides the basic coffee, which suited Danny just fine.

“Hey, Danny, it looks like I’m heading out with you and Alfred. Turns out I need a new suit. You ready to go?” Jason walks into the kitchen, his steps nearly bouncing. 

Tim looks just as confused as Danny at Jason’s behavior. Tim didn’t know what had suddenly changed with Jason. Tim would have thought after the series of bombs that had been dropped by Danny, that Jason would be blazing mad, and he was, but only about the information that Danny had shared. In fact, everything else about Jason seemed to have lightened. Jason let Dick hug him for a solid ten seconds without comment and then didn’t try to shoot him when he hit his limit. 

Hell, Jason was somehow able to be in the same room as Bruce multiple times without trying to kill him, Jason had even restrained his snarky comments for the most part. The fact that Jason actually seemed peppy was inconceivable. 

“Yeah, Tim’s just making me coffee. You’re looking better, how do you feel?” Tim frowns in confusion at the way Danny phrases it. 

“I’m fine, but Alfred’s got the van pulled up out front. Looks like Timmy’s got your coffee ready, let’s go,” Jason dances around Tim, grabbing the two travel mugs from Tim, most likely stealing the coffee Tim intended to drink, while also grabbing Danny’s 

“Jason, that was my coffee,” Tim points out, looking unimpressed. 

“And now it's mine. You drink enough of the stuff anyway. Besides, you can just make more,” Jason then jerks his head towards Danny, and Danny gets the message to follow him. 

From there, it doesn’t take much time for the two of them to reach Alfred and the van outside, and instead of climbing in the front with Alfred, Jason takes a seat in the back with Danny, passing him his coffee once he was settled. 

“How are you doing, really?” Danny asks lowly, once Alfred had driven down the ridiculously long driveway and entered the road proper. 

“I’m fine, better than fine. The green isn’t so bad anymore. Still pissed off about the Anti-Ecto acts,” Jason glowers at that and Danny shrugs. 

“It’s not bad outside Amity, in all honesty. I haven’t seen a single agent or been worried about capture since leaving. This is the most peaceful time I’ve had since I was fourteen. Just don’t go out to the midwest and you’ll be fine,” Danny shrugs nonchalantly, as if he didn’t just tell Jason that this was the most peace he’s had since he was fourteen. 

“You do know that's not normal, right?” Jason asks, only to have Danny regard him with an unimpressed raised eyebrow. 

“You do know that I’ve got an interdimensional portal in my parent's basement, right?” Danny retorts, and Jason has no refute for that. 

Danny was right, he was far from normal, and to expect him to be normal was just asking for disappointment. Though Jason couldn’t lie to himself, the fact that Danny had all of his otherworldliness was just a point in his favor. 

“I don’t think I could forget if I tried,” Jason remarks, leaning closer to Danny while lowering his voice. Danny flushes bright red, bringing some color to his normally pale face. 

“If you two are finished back there, we have arrived,” Alfred remarks, breaking the tension that had started to build in the back of the van. Jason jerks back, flushing bright red, and Danny blushes even redder, if that was possible. 

 

Alfred had pulled up in front of what looked like a boutique, mannequins in the window wearing fine suits and evening gowns. Already, Danny could tell that normally, nothing in the entire shop would be affordable to him, not even a tie. As it stood, it seemed as if Wayne Enterprises would be footing the bill, and as a multibillion-dollar company, Danny was confident they could afford it. 

“Come now, boys. Our appointment starts in five minutes,” Alfred ushers the pair of boys out of the van, pulling out the ramp while Jason unhooks Danny from the van tethers. 

Danny quickly rolls down the ramp, and Alfred holds the boutique door open, first allowing Danny in, and then Jason follows. For a moment, Danny worried his chair wouldn’t fit through the door, but luckily by removing his hands from the wheels, he just scooted past the doorway. Once he was in, he turned around to wait for Jason and Alfred, both had displeased looks on their faces while glancing at the tight-fitting doorway. 

Almost the second all three of them were through the door, a poshly dressed middle-aged man, probably around Bruce’s age, approached them. Instantly, Danny couldn’t help but not like him. He looked like any typical man, with dirty blonde hair styled with enough gel for a year, neatly shaven, and seeming well put together. But the way he glanced at Danny, almost scowling at his chair, rubbed Danny the wrong way. 

“Mr. Pennyworth, a pleasure to see you and yours again. I take it this is a new ward of Mr. Wayne,” The way blondie spoke to Alfred reeked of respect, the way he referred to Jason and Danny was basically the opposite. 

“No, Mr. Brice, Mr. Fenton is not one of Bruce’s. He’s a quite brilliant young man who helped facilitate a deal between Wayne Enterprises and another company. There is a gala in celebration and Mr. Fenton needs an outfit to attend. Master Todd is in need of a new suit as the last one did not survive the last rouge attack,” Alfred explains, but there is a terse tone to his voice, as well as the slight twitch in his eye that Danny can just barely make out. 

“Of course. Which will we be starting with?” The man, Mr. Brice, asks, looking between Danny and Jason, and not looking all that impressed. 

“Mr. Fenton. I’ll kindly be shown the fabric selection, as well as the other catalogs,” Alfred asks, and Mr. Brice clenches his jaw, clearly unhappy with that statement. 

“I believe an off-the-rack suit would be more suited for Mr. Fenton’s budget,” Mr. Brice insists and Alfred cocks an eyebrow. Danny might not know Alfred all that well, but he knows that Mr. Brice fuck up with that last comment. 

“Either way, the catalog and sample book would be appreciated. As would some refreshments. You are unneeded until measurements need to be taken,” Alfred insists and Jason heads off to the side, where between what appears to be a men's and women's section, a small seating section is. 

Jason and Alfred seem experienced with the shop, so Danny decides to follow their lead, which basically means following them around while attempting to figure out what exactly they were doing there if they weren’t buying a suit. 

“Danny, I apologize for Mr. Brice. Now, do you have any idea what type of suit you would like? Have you ever had a suit before?” Alfred asks, properly sitting down at a table, Jason sitting across from him, and Danny sits between the two of them. It was obviously a two-person table, but there wasn’t a better place for Danny to sit. 

“The last suit I had was when I was fifteen and it came from Walmart. Besides that, I don’t know anything about suits,” Danny explained, fidgeting with his fingernails. 

“Oh well, that just means we have options,” Alfred says, trying to inject some cheer into the situation. 

Mr. Brice quickly approaches with a cart, on which is a tray full of refreshments and a stack of books. Mr. Brice looks especially displeased placing a cup in front of Danny and hands the books off to Alfred, two of them notability thicker then the rest, and Danny can see that there are fabric scraps inside of them. Alfred is quick to dismiss Mr. Brice and Danny has to hold back his laugher at the constipated look on his face. 

“Well, this isn’t a Walmart. Don’t worry, Alfred’s done this since he started working for the Wayne’s,” Jason remarks, although he has now idea when that was. 

“Yes indeed. I am well-versed in dressing young men. Now, I believe a classic fit, double-breasted, suit would be best. Flat pockets with notched lapels. A nice navy blue or black,” Alfred looked Danny over with a scrutinizing look, before opening the books and pointing to exactly what he meant, not that it made much sense to Danny. 

“Sounds great. I don’t have any idea what to do with suits, so I trust you to make the decisions,” Danny mutters, picking at his nails while his eyes are half on the books Alfred was showing him, while also glancing around the shop, eyes catching on a particular item. 

“You should try it on,” Jason suggests, noticing what had distracted Danny. 

“No, no, I couldn’t,” Danny hastily says, fully knowing that it wasn’t a good idea. 

“You could. You obviously like it,” Jason hedges, nudging Danny with a smile on his face. 

“That’s not appropriate,” Danny scowls, forcing himself to look back at the suits, and fabric samples Alfred had pulled out while he was distracted. 

“I wouldn’t say so. There would be plenty of people wearing something similar,” Alfred comments, looking at the garment in question. 

Danny looks back at it and frowns, uncertain. 

“Why not just try it on? Only if you want to, of course,” Jason suggests and Danny sighs, nodding. 

“Wonderful. I’ll have Mr. Brice take your measurements and then fetch your size,” Alfred insists and Danny takes a deep breath, wondering why he agreed to this in the first place. 

************************************************

Let it be said that while Danny never wished to get his measurements taken again, Jason was right. Looking in the mirror at himself, Danny couldn’t help but admire the way the fabric clung to his form or the way it made him feel. 

“Danny? You alright in there?” Jason asks Danny easily hearing him through the thin changing room door. 

Taking a deep breath to steady his nerves, Danny opens the door and wheels himself out, being mindful not to catch anything in his wheels or smash into the narrow doorway. Danny hesitantly looks to see Alfred and Jason’s reaction and is surprised when he catches sight of Jason. Jason who is standing there, slowly turning redder and redder as his mouth drops open. Alfred looks approving, and then extremely amused once he catches sight of Jason. 

“You look amazing,” 

Jason somehow mustered up the words, still caught up in his surprise at seeing Danny once again. The item Danny had been so distracted by was a pitch-black, full-length dress. Sewn-on was an arrangement of differently sized Swarovski crystals, concentrated at the waist of the dress on the left side while fading out as they dripped down and extended up and to the right-hand side.

It looked like stars scattered around the black, velvet fabric that clung to Danny’s curves. There was a lower, solid sweetheart neckline while a mesh neckline extended up to Danny's neck, ending in a black, embroidered collar. The mesh extended down his arms and ended in similar style embroidered cuffs.

The dress was currently pooled on his foot pedals, and there was a slit running up his right leg, stopping two inches above his knee. Jason could see that the entire back of the dress was open, besides two thin, crisscrossed straps and the same black mesh that made up the neckline and sleeves. 

Jason swears that if this was one of the stupid anime’s Tim watched, then his nose would be leaking a steady stream of blood. The mesh was just thick enough and just dark enough to hide the scars Danny had. You would have to already know where to look to spot the faint lines. 

“Well, Mr. Fenton, I do believe that we’ve found your outfit for the gala,” Alfred comments, smiling in approval. 

“What?! No! I saw the price tag, it's not happening. Besides, I don’t think most people would approve,” Danny insists, wildly waving his hands. 

“Who the fuck cares? You look damn good, why should you care what others think?” Jason asks and Danny flushes red, embarrassment flaring at Jason’s compliment. 

“Quite right, minus the crass language, of course. That dress is completely appropriate for the event in question. Besides, it suits you quite well. I see no reason why anyone should voice their opinions, there are after all strict rules to attend a Wayne gala,” Alfred plainly stated, voice calm and even. 

“Yeah, Bruce punched Lex the one time he made an unwanted comment about Tim's boyfriend, Bernard,” Jason butts in and Alfred regards him with an unimpressed look. 

“Eham, yes, Bruce did indeed do that. However, that won’t be happening again. Why don’t you change back and I’ll arrange for it to be shortened and delivered before the gala. Jason, why don’t you come up as well to order yourself a new suit,” Alfred suggests and Danny nods, agreeing while Jason still looks somewhat dazed, glancing almost longingly as Danny turns to go back into the changing room. 

Alfred walks them halfway to the front desk before gently turning Jason, a sparkle of amusement in his eyes. 

“Master Jason, I know that look very well,” Jason can’t even object, knowing Alfred was absolutely right. 

“What about it? I know you aren’t going to tell me to drop it, you insist that Bernard come over whenever he can,” Jason points out and Alfred nods. 

“You both have your own issues. You have the pit rage and Danny has whatever he has after growing up in Amity. You both need to be aware of that before you break each other's hearts. I know Bruce has done his best, but you have grown up far from normal, so has Danny. I believe Danny is aware of that, I just need to make sure you are aware of that as well,” Alfred points out and Jason swallows thickly, nodding. 

“I am. I know that Danny isn’t a normal civilian and that I can’t treat him like that. I’ve seen the scars, Danny told me about Amity,” 

“Good, as long as you are aware of that, I don’t see any issues arising,” Alfred finishes, a twinkle in his eye. 

Just as warm as Alfred had been, he turns cold when he pins Mr. Brice with a stern look, frown etching into his face. 

“The dress in the dressing room needs to be shortened by five inches, and we’ll take a suit with these specifications in Mr. Fenton's measurements. Master Jason, you are free to choose whichever suit you would like. All three items can be charged to the account on file,” Alfred orders briskly and Jason swears Mr. Brice’s face turns three shades redder. 

“I can do the suits, but the dress isn’t possible. This is a business that has been established for over fifty years, there is a certain level of tradition that must be adhered to,” 

Jason’s vision floods green for a moment before Alfred chuckles, and Jason knows Mr. Brice had truly fucked up. That Alfred chuckle was reserved for those Alfred was about to truly eviscerate. 

“I find that it is entirely possible if you wish to keep the Wayne family patronage, which at this point is the only reason your shop remains open in this day and age. As you know, true gentleman's suits are going out of fashion, the fact that the Bruce Wayne shops here is what brings you other customers,” Alfred threatens, staring Mr. Brice down as if daring him to argue. 

“Fine, what is the deadline?” Mr. Brice asks and Jason can practically hear his teeth grinding. 

“A week from today. Jason, I will leave you to decide on your suit, although if I know you, you’ll just get an exact replacement,” To this Jason nods, he know what he likes. 

“Yeah, what Alfred said. An exact replica of the classic midnight black suit in our file,” Jason orders, and Mr. Brice nods, seeming much happier about this than making Danny his own suit while also shortening the dress. 

“I’ll show you out,” Mr. Brice insists and Alfred shakes his head. 

“We’ll show ourselves out. If the suits and dress aren’t delivered by the agreed upon time, and in excellent condition, we will be having words which will consist of us terminating our contract with your business,” Alfred insists curtly and turns away from the desk before Mr. Brice gets a chance to reply. 

Danny was just leaving the changing room and Jason beckoned him, indicating that they were leaving. Danny just goes along with it, hoping that he wouldn’t have to interact with Mr. Brice again. The man gave Danny the distinct impression that he didn’t like him, and Danny wasn’t one to push personal matters. Mr. Brice could hate him for all Danny cared, the man didn’t mean much to Danny. 

“I apologize for that Danny. I was unaware of certain beliefs held by Mr. Brice, we have made arrangements to have the clothes delivered and I can make any final adjustments if needed. You will not have to go back there if you do not wish to,” Alfred insists and Danny nods, throat thick with his thankfulness. 

“Thank you,” Danny manages to croak out, and Alfred nods, unlocking the van. 

“Now, it's high time we return home. I believe we’ve had enough excitement for the day,” Alfred insists and both Jason and Danny agree, Danny wheels himself up into the van and Jason follows him into the back yet again. 

Danny couldn’t agree more with Alfred. While getting to see the stars again since moving to Gotham was amazing, fighting against his Obsession to return back to Earth was exhausting. And then he had to deal with the weirdness that was suit shopping and Mr. Brice. Danny did not appreciate Mr. Brice in the least, his attitude was enough to want to make Danny punch him. 

He had, somehow, become extremely comfortable in Wayne Manor. While Danny did want his ribs to heal and to return to work, he also knew that he was functioning as Jason’s filter, and the longer he stayed near Jason, the cleaner his ectoplasm became. And the cleaner his ectoplasm became, the more sane and mentally stable Jason became. Even in the short time Danny had been around, Danny had noticed a difference in Jason, and that was without doing anything actively. 

“Hey, it’ll be fine,” Jason insists and Danny nods, although he can’t quite smooth the frown from his face. 

Danny would need to figure out a way to let Jason filter his ectoplasm while not being around him twenty-four-seven. If Danny was right about how the next few weeks would turn out, he would be seeing Jason a whole lot less, and his presence wasn’t going to be there to filter Jason’s ectoplasm. It was something to think about and consider for the future. 

Chapter 18: Plecos

Notes:

Okay, I am going shamelessly direct you to my new fanfics, Nighteye Could Only Wish, and The Researcher (Et Indagator), both of which are My Hero Academia fan fictions. I'd really appreciate it if you gave them a read, but if it's not your jam or you just don't want to, that's totally cool!

I hope you enjoy this new chapter!

Lost of Love SSRI!

Danny currently held a love-hate relationship with the Watchtower, and no one in the Wayne family could blame him. Leslie had finally cleared him to do things on his own, and the entire family decided to stay silent that Danny had been self-transferring and wheeling himself this entire time, not wanting to bring the doctor's wrath down on them for allowing it. 

 

As such he had been allowed to return to his apartment in Wayne Tower, but he had chosen to stay at Wayne Manor with Alfred and Bruce’s encouragement. When Danny thought about it, it was more practical than having Alfred pick him up at Wayne Tower, just to drive him out to Wayne Manor to take the Zeta tubes to the Watchtower. When asked why exactly Bruce had that sort of access, he learned that Bruce funded more than half of the League expenses. He was the reason the Watchtower was a real place, with the help of hundreds of engineers and mechanics of course. Danny understood for the first time exactly how rich Bruce was, in order to be able to fund something the ginormous. Danny had asked for his toolkit to be brought to him, having been cleared by Leslie to work on personal projects. He was still on hiatus from his official work at Wayne Enterprises and was extremely suspicious when his paycheck came right on time, with the addition of a few thousand dollars, which he brought up with Bruce one morning. 

 

“Oh, that. Since you’ve been giving the Justice League lectures on the Infinite realms, ghosts, and Amity Park, it was decided that for now, a portion of your earnings would be added to your typical check. The Justice League is still setting up how to pay you separately without attracting any attention to you outside closed circles,” Bruce explains, taking a bite of toast at the end. 

 

“Pay me? It’s not like I’m missing out on my actual job and losing that money. All I’m really doing is talking,” Danny tries to excuse, and the entire freezes and Jason is the first one to speak. 

 

“Danny, you exposed a corrupt branch of the government. Besides that, you are the most knowledgeable person on an entire other dimension and are teaching your knowledge to the entire Justice League. It’s not just the time you are taking to talk about the Infinite realms and the inhabitants, but the years it took for you to gather that knowledge. I may not agree with everything the Justice League does, but I agree that they should definitely be paying you, more than they already are,” At this, Jason shoots Bruce who just nods in agreement. 

 

“Danny, what you’ve discovered is astounding, and the number of people you are going to help with that knowledge is immeasurable. You aren’t just giving some lectures, you’re saving lives. Both human and ghost,” Jason insists and Danny is stunned by the sincerity in his voice. 

 

“Jay’s right kiddo. I know that it isn’t easy talking about what your parents or the GIW have done in Amity Park, but you’re doing an amazing thing. You’re taking so much time out of your day, even while recovering. Besides, the Justice League can afford it, they, and the Earth as a whole, can’t afford to go to war with the infinite realms, which was exactly where the future was heading. Be proud of the work you’re doing,” Dick insists and Danny can’t help but flush bright red. 

 

“Master Danny, your toolbox has been retrieved. Would you like me to place it in the workshop?” Alfred interrupts, wheeling the large case into the dining room. It was a sleek metal case Danny had designed himself, able to be either wheeled or carried with straps or attached to his chair. It was sleek chrome metal, in the shape of a suitcase. On either side is a segmented line of green, indicating the level of charge it held. The thing was heavy, and part of the power was directed towards a small gravity generator located in the bottom, which Danny had created based on how the zone could sometimes be weightless or not. It decreased the weight considerably, but he still felt bad about Alfred lugging it all the way from Wayne Tower. 

 

“Uh, can I work there? I’ve got something I wanna make Jason, and I need some space. I’ve got all the tools I could need though,” Danny explained and Alfred nodded primly. 

 

“I shall place it where Ms. Barbara typically works,” Alfred explains and Danny nods. 

 

“Can I follow you? And Jason can I borrow you for a bit?” Danny asks, and both Alfred and Jason nod, both somewhat confused. 

********************************

“I shall leave you both to it. Master Danny, please try to keep the room intact. If you require to test anything dangerous, we have a perfectly good backyard or better yet, the firing range,” Alfred requests, and with that sweeps out of the workroom Danny and Jason had been shown. 

 

The largest part of the room was a bank of computers set in the far wall from the doorway, but Danny was more interested in the workbench that was sitting in the middle of the room, most of it untouched. 

 

“Okay, Jason could you put the toolbox on the middle of the table, and keep your hands away from it?” Danny requests, and Jason does as instructed, looking at the toolbox in a questioning way. 

 

Danny quickly clicks the button to expand it, and it unfolds, the sides stretching out, and the base extending. In the toolbox’s place was an entire workstation. On either side of the main body, a panel had expanded, tools hanging in neat rows, a mat had unfolded from the bottom, and a light had popped up from the top, illuminating the mat. Inside were rows of wires, bits and bobs, circuit boards, and other random pieces of machine parts. Jason was struggling to figure out how exactly so much stuff could fit into a carry one-sized suitcase-looking thing. 

 

“Don’t worry, it took me forever to figure out how to get it to work. Now, your ectoplasm is corrupted to high hell. That’s why you go all Hulk mode, most likely. As for now, I’m acting as a sort of filter, kinda like those fish you put in fish tanks. The problem is, I’m not going to be around you forever, and this is going to take a hell of a long time, and patience. I’ve got a filtration device idea, but I want your opinion on it. I can make it into the shape of a cuff, but I wanted to get your okay first,” Danny asks, already pulling out what he would need, regardless of Jason’s acceptance of a cuff or not. 

 

“I’m good with that. How big is it going to be?” Jason asks, leaning against the table while watching Danny start prepping the station. 

 

“Like this?” Danny takes a marker and draws a mock band on his own wrist, starting just above the wrist and making it around three inches wide. 

 

“I can make it thinner, but it’ll be bulky. It should attach itself to you so it won’t slide around and bother you too much. You’ll be able to take it off any time you like though,” Danny explains, fiddling with what looks like a Geiger counter-looking thing, adjusting a few dials. 

 

“Wider is better. I’d rather it be wider than bulky,” Jason quickly explains, and Danny nods. 

 

“Makes sense. Here, let me get your levels,” Danny prods Jason’s arm before he can agree or disagree, the machine making a concerning screeching sound when the prode makes contact with Jason’s exposed skin. 

 

“Hm, this’ll take awhile,” Danny trails off into muttering, glancing between the meter and his workstation, and heavy frown on his face. 

 

“Do you need anything else?” Jason asks, and his feeling that he had already lost Danny was confirmed when Danny absently shakes his head and makes a shooing motion with his hands, going back to rummaging around in the workstation, pulling out pieces that Jason wasn’t exactly sure how he would use. At that moment, Danny painfully reminds Jason of Tim. 

 

Tim was one of Jason’s biggest regrets in life, only third to being unable to help Catherine and for leaving in the first place. Jason had made many mistakes, but those were high on his list. Hell, he had nearly killed his brother, a kid who only wanted to do good, who only wanted to save Bruce from what Jason had put him through in the first place. 

 

“Jason, I know that look of guilt. Whatever you did, it wasn’t you. It wasn’t Jason Todd-Wayne, it was the pit and the corrupted ectoplasm,” Danny snaps out of his tinkering, noting the statue that had become Jason. 

 

“It was me. It was my anger that drove me to that,” Jason grits out, clenching his hands hard enough to practically hear them creak. 

 

“I’d disagree. Tell me, right now, could you ever see yourself doing that?” Danny asks, and Jason’s silence was enough of an answer.

 

“Ectocontaminated people, aand ecto entities have heightened emotions, it's what makes us up. Everything is jacked up to eleven, all the time. You get used to it eventually, but it's a bitch to adjust to. It doesn’t just enhance positive emotion, but all of those nasty emotions you feel and ignore. You’ve had it worse, I can’t imagine what it would be like trying to navigate your own death, brainwashed, and then enhanced emotions with the sludge you were given,” Danny tries to comfort and Jason scoffs. 

 

“I almost killed my brother, can you say you’ve done the same?” Jason asks, the words biting. 

 

“I destroyed the entire world. It was time travel and a bunch of other things, but I destroyed the entire world. It was my grief that made me do that, and that's without whatever toxic pit you came out of. Unless you’ve got another brother I don’t know about, I think he’s forgiven you at this point. From what I’ve seen, all of your brothers love you and care about you,” Danny tries to reason, and Jason just scoffs, not wanting to hear yet again why he should be excused from nearly killing Tim. 

 

“I’m clearly not saying the right thing. I’ll tell you what, go have a chat with the brother you nearly killed, and I’ll work on this filter, yeah?” Danny suggests and Jason shrugs, already knowing what the conversation would consist of, Tim rightfully not forgiving him and most likely trying to get rid of Jason. 

 

“Fine,” Jason grumbles, leaving Danny to his work. 

 

Jason wouldn’t lie and say he didn’t feel better ever since Danny came to stay at the manor, but he was nowhere near recovered, or deserving of forgiveness. He wouldn’t ever deserve the forgiveness of Tim. 

 

“Jason, Danny said that you wanted to talk?” Speak of the devil and he shall appear, Tim rounds the hallway corner and Jason has to keep himself from stepping back, wanting to put space between Tim and himself. 

 

“He said we needed to talk, about that night in Titan’s Tower,” Jason mutters, refusing to meet Tim’s eyes. 

 

“Okay, what about it?” Tim asks as if he was talking about a gala. 

 

“The fact that I nearly killed you. The fact that you shouldn’t be talking to me, let alone standing in the same hallway without trying to do the same,” Jason snaps, and recoils, physically taking a step back. 

 

Tim looked hurt and confused for a moment before an understanding look settled on his face, and he stepped forward, Jason couldn’t settle on whether Tim looked like he was about to punch or hug him. 

 

“Jason, you’re an idiot,” 

 

Jason is wildly taken aback by Tim’s statement, confused as to how Tim looks exacerbated instead of furious. He looked exhausted, which was almost a perpetual state for Tim at this point. 

 

“What do you remember from that night?” Tim asks, leaning against the wall and taking a loud slurp of his coffee, which Jason was convinced was superglued to his hand at this point.

 

“Rage, and beating the shit out of you. I don’t remember much else,” Jason admits, ashamed of himself. 

 

“Right, I did get the shit beaten out of me, but you also tried to teach me. I’m still hazy on the details, but with every attack, you yelled a counter attack, told me what to do every single time. Jason, you said you didn’t want my wings to get cut. Even if you could have gone about it in a much more productive, and less painful, way, at the core of that night, you wanted to help me. While I still get nightmares, because I am not going to sugarcoat this for you, I understand that you were in a really bad place between the brainwashing done by the League of Assassins and the pit rage. You still tried to save me, in your own way. Your attack made it possible for me to survive the League of Assassins, to try and take them down,” Tim admits, still relaxed in his position leaning against the wall.

 

Meanwhile, Jason was having an existential crisis, everything that he knew had been flipped on its head. All Jason had remembered from that night was the blood and broken bones from Tim, he had no idea what he said if he said anything. 

 

“Look, Jason. What you did to me was painful, extremely so, both emotionally and physically. But at the core of it, you did it to protect me, to make me stronger. Even if you went about it the wrong way. I forgive you. I forgave you years ago,” Tim says, honesty ringing in his voice. 

 

Jason heaves in a deep breath and startles when he notices the tears running down his face, as well as his entire body shaking with the force of Tim’s words. Jason opens his mouth to speak, but nothing comes out, so he closes it and shakes his head, turning from looking at Tim’s understanding gaze, unable to handle it any further. 

 

“Library,” Jason chokes out and Tim chuckles. 

 

“Sounds good, I’ll let Danny know where to find you,” Tim says, and Jason can practically hear the smile in his voice. 

 

Jason flees the hallway, the onslaught of emotions too much to handle. Instead of freaking out and breaking some furniture, or fleeing the entire manor, Jason practically runs to the library, closing the door. The closed door served one specific function, to let the entire family know that Jason wasn’t in any mood to talk or interact with them. They had discovered over the years that it was best for Jason to hole himself away than accidentally injure the rest of them. It also reduced the cost of replacing and repairing the furniture he tended to throw at said family. 

**********************************

Jason wasn’t sure how many hours had passed, but night had fallen and he had to turn on multiple lamps before there was a knock on the door, before it opened and Danny wheeled himself through, something black sitting on his lap. Jason was sprawled out on a beanbag chair, only it was about five times the normal size, and Danny faintly recalled that it was most likely a lovesac. 

 

“Jason, I’ve finished. Wanna see how it works?” Danny asks, rolling to a stop and holding out two arm guard-looking things. 

 

Jason is standing in record time and nearly plowed into Danny if he hadn’t stopped himself when he did, excited to see what exactly Danny had cooked up for him. Originally, the cuffs looked rather plain, matte black cuffs, with three buttons on the wider side, each one faintly lit with green. The only thing to break up the smooth cuff besides the buttons was a small, rectangle outline, set in-between each edge of the cuff. Each one was about three inches and a quarter inch thick, slightly longer than what Danny had said, but rather thin. 

 

“Hold out your arms,” Danny instructs and Jason is quick to comply, nearly knocking his hand into Danny’s face. Danny presses the center button, and each cuff separates at an invisible seam, opening in the middle. Danny places one on his left forearm, and one on his right. They slowly encircle his forearms before clicking shut and Jason notices the small grip they have, the inside feeling like smooth jelly that soon went away once he got used to the feeling of them. Jason experimentally shifts them, and notices they had somehow locked into place, refusing to budge. 

“Now, I only wanted to make one, but that ended up being impractical. The left one acts as a filter, the right one replaces your corrupted ectoplasm with pure ectoplasm. You should eventually develop the ability to do this yourself as you degunk, but it’ll work in the meantime. If I press the left button, it opens the panel, exposing the capture tank,” Danny demonstrates, pushing the left button on his left forearm and the rectangle panel pops open, revealing what looks like an empty vape cartridge. 

 

“This should fill up with the corrupted ectoplasm. You’ll have to change it rather often at first, I’ll give you spares,” Danny closes the panel with a flick of his finger, and repeats the process on the other arm, this time the cartridge is full of what looks like bright green fluid, glowing brightly. 

 

“This is pure ectoplasm, this batch came from me, but I can eventually get you pure stuff from the zone,” Danny than flicks the panel closed, hiding the green glow. 

 

“If you are feeling particularly emotional, press the right button on your left brace, it should kick the filter up for a short time. It can’t run at that level continuously, but’ll work in the short time. If you press the right button on the right bracer, you’ll get an extra dose of ecto, but be careful with it, you don’t want to overdo it. I’ll give you empty cartridges and ones full of ecto, but it’ll take a little bit to make them. That should last you at least a few days though, especially since I’m still here. Any questions?” Danny asks, looking rather proud of himself. 

 

Jason couldn’t do anything but stare at Danny with amazement. Jason didn’t quite understand how Danny managed to do this, but he could feel that it would be effective. 

 

“Thank you!” Jason blurts, and almost tackles Danny out of his chair, hugging him, to which Danny chuckles and pats his back, seeming happy. 

 

“I’m glad to help. You deserve to get better, to feel better. It wasn’t fair what happened to you, and it’s my duty to fix it,” Danny says seriously and Jason can’t help but smile. 

 

“Still, thank you. I may actually be normal now,” Jason says, and Danny can’t help but laugh. 

 

“Normal is overrated. As long as you're not flying off the hinges every other second, I say do whatever you want as long as you’re not losing it. This should help stabilize your moods, but if you have any problems I can always retweak and recalibrate the bracers,” Danny offers and Jason beams brighter. 

 

Jason is about to say something else, even if he couldn’t tell you what, when Tim came careening into the library, looking much more awake than he had been when he had talked to Jason in the hallway. Danny seems to sense the urgency and stiffens, a mask falling over his face. 

 

“What’s wrong?” Danny asks, wheeling forward and Jason steps aside, holding himself back from placing his hand on Danny’s shoulder. 

 

“The Justice League and the United States Government are at a standoff. Amanda Waller is demanding that the GIW and ecto research projects continue, human rights violations be damned. People are listening to her, and she’s riling up the entire situation. We need you to contact Phantom, he’s king, and the one that can declare war. You also need to be there to advocate for the human-contaminated side,” Tim rushes out, and Danny’s face turns grim, twisting into a scowl. 

 

“Great, just fucking great!” Danny shouts, and both Tim and Jason are surprised to see the angrier and more irritable side of Danny.

“Are you okay?” Jason asks, and Danny turns to glare at him, although his anger isn’t directed at him, which Jason knew, for some odd reason. 

 

“I’m sick of people treating me as inhuman. If it kills me again, I’m getting this Amanda Waller thrown into prison!” And with that, Danny starts to furiously wheel himself forward, set on reaching the Watchtower as soon as he could, intent on ending the entire inhuman treatment of the infinite realms for good, consequences be damned. 

Chapter 19: Diplomacy at its Finest

Danny, well, Danny had no idea what to make of the entire situation. Tim and Jason had rushed him down to the basement, and Bruce had met them down there. Bruce looked beyond rattled, and Danny became concerned, he had never seen Bruce rattled before, not that he had a lot of experience with the man in the first place. But Danny had a feeling it wasn’t a good sign that he was perfectly calm during the attack in Metropolis, and yet this news was clearly bothering him. 

 

“Danny, good. Everyone has either conferenced called in or gathered in the Watchtower. A woman named Amanda Waller has convinced the secretary of defense, several branch heads of the military, as well as the president that ecto entities are a threat to the United States and the world at large. She seems to have moved up any plans she may have since the Justice League got wind of the anti-Ecto acts and our plans to overturn them. Plans of a direct attack against the infinite realms are being considered and the president is just waiting to authorize it, congress be damned,” Bruce quickly explains, and Danny can’t help the scowl. 

 

“I’m already disliking Ms. Waller,” Danny grumbles, and all three Wayne’s nod enthusiastically. 

 

“She has that personality. She’s managed to twist the facts so you need to a, correct her and her beliefs, and b, get the ghost king to come. Constantine tried summoning Phantom, but they refused to come. We’re hoping you have better luck and a better relationship with Phantom,” Bruce continues and Danny can’t help the huff of air that escapes him. 

 

While he had already figured out that Phantom and Danny would need to be in the same room eventually and had figured out a workaround and practiced it in his room, it was still exhausting to maintain for longer than an hour or two, and Danny had the suspicion that this meeting was going to last longer than an hour or two. 

 

“Alright. Both Phantom and I were aware that this was an almost guaranteed eventuality. Phantom is on standby, but I have to be wherever the meeting is first. Phantom doesn’t like to travel while in contact with the mortal world and says it gives them the jellies,” It most certainly did not, but it would make the entire thing easier Danny thought, hoping his excuse would hold up.

 

“Of course. Now, the founding members of the Justice League will be there in person, along with the Secretary of Defense and Amanda Waller. The president will be conference calling in, as the Secret Service disliked the threats that could be posed to the president,” Bruce explains while making no move towards the zeta tube. 

 

“Understood. Secretary of Defense and scary lady present, President on video. Justice League leadership is present as well. Since you didn’t mention yourself, I have the feeling you won’t be there,” Danny asks and Bruce nods. 

 

“Yeah, this is a little above Bruce Wayne’s pay grade. We’ll be waiting here though. Alfred made those scones you really liked,” Jason explains and Danny snorts. 

 

“Way to up my confidence. If Alfred’s making my favorite scones then I don’t want to know how bad this is going to go,” Danny tries to joke but can tell it falls short at the serious looks on the Wayne’s faces. 

 

“Just know that Batman, Wonder Woman, and Superman are on your side. They won’t let anyone hurt you. We’ve got plans in case the meeting doesn’t end…well,” Bruce trails off and lets Danny’s imagination fill in the rest. 

 

That was right. Danny was going into this meeting as Danny, not Phantom. If it went bad, Danny Fenton was the one who was going to have to deal with the backlash. Danny Fenton was the one who would possibly flee the country and the amazing internship he now had. It was certainly going to be interesting to explain his escape if he needed to. 

 

“Hey, don’t go there. The Justice League will protect you, and we’ll make sure to sort everything out afterward,” Dick rests his hand on Danny’s shoulder, and Danny shamelessly absorbs the warmth of comfort. 

 

“Okay, I’m ready,” Danny shakes himself, and Dick steps back, as do Bruce, Jason, and Tim. 

 

Danny rolls forward and lets the tube suck him in, the coordinates for the Watchtower already programmed in. Danny will be the first to admit that being sucked into the zeta tubes wasn’t a pleasant experience, but when the tube spits him out into an arguably packed room, he figures he has more important things to worry about.

 

“Ah, Danny, it's nice to see you,” Superman says, a tense smile on his face, as he and Wonder Woman walk up to him, Batman nowhere in sight. 

 

“You as well. I’m glad to explain ecto entities to those in charge of the US Government,” Danny tries to speak pleasantly, but can’t help but feel that a small amount of fear leaks into his voice.

 

“Are you the supposed expert?” A gruff voice barks out, and Danny turns to see a woman built like a linebacker, stomping her way toward them, her hair tied up into a poof that bounces with every step she takes. She was a clearly no-nonsense type of woman, and Danny wanted to shrink back.  

 

“Yes, Ma’am. My name is Danny Fenton, I believe the Justice League has invited me to speak on behalf of those who either are ecto entities or contaminated by ectoplasm,” Danny suggests, although damn well knows why he was there. 

 

“Humf. I don’t suppose you are related to Jack and Madeline Fenton?” The woman asks and Danny nods eagerly. 

 

“They are my parents. They might be brilliant, but their talents lie in engineering and biochem. I have talked with ecto entities and arguably know more about them than my parents could ever hope,” Danny offers and the woman scowls. 

 

“So what, you talk about their feelings? I don’t know why you are even here,” The woman grumbles and Danny frowns. 

 

“I am here to offer another perspective. I grew up with this stuff, and I’ve interacted with it more than my parents could ever hope to. The only people who have a fraction of my experience would be my two best friends. I believe this conversation should be saved so all parties can be involved, don’t you think?” Danny asks innocently but this seems to deeply irritate the woman, who Danny notices reached for her side, as if reaching for a weapon that wasn’t there. 

 

“Right you are! Secretary Arnolds and President Barnes are waiting in the conference room, we should go meet them,” Superman interjects, sensing the tension. 

 

If the Secretary and President were waiting, that left this woman to be Amanda Waller. Danny could understand how Bruce disliked her, she was quickly becoming a thorn in Danny’s side. Superman and Wonder Woman lead them up to the large conference room Danny was familiar with, as it was the location where he had given lectures to the Justice League before. When they walked in, the President was conference called in on the large flat screen with the oval office being the background, and another man was patiently waiting at the table, hands folded. Danny spied Batman standing in the back corner, keeping silent as he basically hid. 

 

“Hello Sirs, its a pleasure to meet you. My name is Danny Fenton, and I am a sort of liaison for the ecto entities. I hope we can come to a mutual understanding by the end of today,” Danny tries to greet pleasantly, a smile on his face. 

 

“Hello Mr. Fenton, that is my hope as well. I am ashamed to admit I do not know much about ecto entities and have only been recently informed of their existence,” The President comments, and Danny can’t help the twinge of anger he feels. 

 

“Oh? The US government has basically been at war with them for around four years now. There is a kill on sight or capture for experiment order still in effect. I am surprised you were unaware of the supposedly world-ending level threat ecto entities are said to be,” Danny snaps and Wonder Woman grabbing his shoulder tightly wasn’t the only thing that indicated that he should shut up. The President seems slightly flushed and Superman clears his throat. 

 

“That is why I believe an open and honest conversation is in order. I will be the first to admit our original sources were biased. If you would be kind enough to explain your information and experiences, you have our full attention,” The President speaks cordially, and Danny relaxes slightly. The President seemed decent enough, and Danny knew enough to know it was the last president that had signed off on the GIW and everything they did. 

*****************************

“I understand that was a lot of information at once. I had split it over a few different meetings with the Justice League so they could really understand the information. I’m open to answer any questions you have,” Danny finishes, folding his hands as he waits for the storm that is inevitably going to come crashing down on him. 

 

Everyone had patiently sat and listened, or almost everyone. Ms. Waller kept interrupting with Maddie and Jack’s biased and unfounded information, or just plain objecting with her own opinions. Secretary Arnolds interrupted, as well as the President, but each of them seemed to only want clarification and seemed to be reserving judgment. Batman, Wonder Woman, and Superman remained silent throughout the entire explanation, having already received the information. 

 

“That is all well and good, but you are one boy. You have no power whatsoever. I have no idea why we have entertained these ideas. He may be the son of the two leading scientists, but he has no formal training or education beyond high school,” Ms. Waller objects and Danny bristles, he can physically feel his hair puff up and he quickly calms it. 

 

“You are listening to me because Phantom trusts me and my friends. You are listening to me because I was almost killed by ecto entities a dozen times every week I lived in Amity Park and I still see the humanity in them, even in the individuals who attacked me multiple times. I have spent thousands of hours with a wide variety of beings, my parents have yet to go into the Infinite Realms, and I have spent thousands of hours there, interacting with the people there. May I also add in the fact that I am appointed to be the Infinite realms equivalent of an Ambassador by High King Phantom?” Danny asks, icily, thoroughly done with Ms. Waller’s attitude. 

 

“Mr. Fenton, while we appreciate your contribution to this issue, we really do need to speak to Phantom,” Secretary Arnolds asks and Danny nods, understanding. 

 

“Of course. Um, to be honest, this takes a lot of energy on both of our parts. Most of the energy is to keep me alive, to be honest. Just uh, don’t touch me? At all? I’m channeling what is basically the energy of a god, we aren’t sure what happens if a human touches me,” Danny warns everyone in the room. Wonder Woman goes so far as to step away from Danny, which Danny is thankful for. 

 

Danny lets his transformation wash over him, swapping out the white rings for a toxic green wave that moves from his head all the way down his body. He takes control of his body and forces it to levitate. It was a delicate and focus-intensive process to hold the half transformation. Too much and his Phantom form will separate from his body, too little and he would still be human. 

 

He seems to have succeeded in his plan as everyone in the room steps back and pales a few shades. His ‘Phantom possession’ form was intimidating, at least if you asked him. The Crown of Fire had morphed into his, spikes of ice with a floating nebula interweaving throughout the spikes hovering an inch above his head. He was wearing a light set of leather armor, pitch black with toxic green accents. A flowing white cape came from his shoulders, snow white on the outside, and coated in stars that actually twinkled on the inside. A pair of leather boots sat on his feet, which were hovering a good two feet off the floor, both making up for his short height and increasing the intimidation. His facial features had sharpened, cheeks hollowed in, cheekbones sharp, eyes somewhat sunken. His ears had pointed and his eyes had turned a toxic green. His hair, as always, was an almost glowing white, flowing in an imaginary breeze. 

 

“I hear you wish to talk to me?” Danny asks, forcing a distortion through his voice. While he could speak clearly and could speak in ghost speak, he found humans truly despised when he combined the two. To recognize that this thing was slightly human, but still an eldritch abomination. 

 

“What are you doing with the boy!? What is your purpose?!” Ms. Waller shouts, and starts towards Danny, and Superman intervenes, holding her back. 

 

“Ms. Waller, shouting is unnecessary. Danny is unharmed by this, as long as it does not last long. My purpose, and what I have tasked Danny with, is the survival of my citizens. The United States government is committing war crimes against my people. War crimes according to your United Nations, not my own. I am here to demand that you rescind the policies and orders that authorize this treatment of my people,” Danny explains, trying to sound as royal as he could. 

 

“That is ridiculous! You and your people have no emotions! You aren’t covered under any law or consideration of the word human. You’re just post-consciousness attached to ectoplasm!” Ms. Waller interjects again and tries to move past Superman, to which he doesn’t budge. 

 

“As Danny explained in an hours-long lecture, ecto entities are just as human as you or the president. You have received biased research from two people, who worked together, which means you’ve basically only received information from one source. Any scientist who calls themselves a part of the GIW or a similar group has no business calling themselves scientists. They have been given numerous counts of ecto entities doing more good than bad, and have ignored this in favor of their biases. You are doing the exact same thing,” Danny replies cooly. 

 

He had learned in his studies of kingly duties that losing his head was the last thing he should be doing. It unsettled everyone involved that the person who should be losing their minds, was calm and collected. 

 

“You’re manipulating us! That’s all this is!” Ms. Waller yells, and Danny simply raises his eyebrows. 

 

“I thought we were unable to do that? Being mindless entities,” Danny points out, and he can tell that Amanda Waller’s face turns bright red. 

 

“I am the director of elite government task forces. I have supervised millions of dollars worth of training and supplies. I have dealt with the worst of criminals. I have more influence over the dark corners of the government than you could ever. You do not scare me,” Ms. Waller replies and Danny crosses his arms, unimpressed. 

 

“And yet you are unable to grasp the idea of biased research and that all information cannot reliably come from one source,” Danny snarks, and this seems to be Ms. Waller’s limit of patience. 

 

Ms. Waller doesn’t reply with words, and simply picks up a chair and chucks it at Danny. Danny prevents Superman or Wonder Woman from intervening by holding them in place and catches the chair with his telekinesis, freezing it in the air. Danny doesn’t do anything but pin Ms. Waller with a look and force the shadows to increase and the temperature to drop. Everyone present in the room shivers, and Danny can even see the president shiver in his seat. Even Batman seemed unsettled at the show. 

 

“Amanda Waller, you greatly overestimate your own importance. You are one cog in one organization, in one country, on one planet. I am king of the infinite realms, the glue that holds the multiverse together. I rule over every afterlife conceived from every religion and belief, from every single country, continent, and universe there is. No one can quantify the number of beings I rule over and can send to war. You believe your little army and pet projects could even hope to slow me down? You believe you have enough power to even make me look up from my breakfast? Go sit in timeout like the misbehaving child you are,” Danny demands, and sends Ms. Waller towards a chair, holding her there. 

 

“I hoped to be more cordial about this entire situation, but directly attacking me is where I draw my line of tolerance. I had hoped to avoid conflict and threats, but I would appreciate it if you would stop assuming you hold all of the power. Four years ago, the GIW attempted to nuke the Infinite realms. They believed that it would destabilize the entire zone and destroy it. In all honesty, it would barely have the effect of a firecracker. I prevented that, but it would have brought the entirety of the Infinite realms down on your heads, and not just the United States, but the entirety of Earth. I will be frank with you, you are lucky that I am king, the last one would have raised the entirety of Earth without so much as a thought. That is not a threat, simply a reality. Now, could we please discuss repealing the anti-Ecto acts and anything pertaining to the dehumanization and demonization of those categorized as ecto entities?” Danny asks pleasantly, hoping to put the room back at ease, while also making it very clear he wasn’t happy and that this situation could be a thousand times worse. 

****************************

All Danny wanted to do was collapse into his bed, but scones. Instead of collapsing in his bed, he was in the kitchen, surprised to see the spread that Alfred had pulled out, especially the already warmed heating pad Alfred almost immediately placed the pad over his shoulders, and it started doing its job, soothing his aches and warming him up from the chill that had settled in. The meeting lasted two and a half hours, which was pushing Danny and Phantom made that very clear, stating that Danny’s body was starting to suffer. They ended up calling the meeting when Phantom made it clear Danny’s body wasn’t going to last much longer. They clearly had more to cover, but the meeting was still cut short. 

 

“How are you feeling? Phantom made it clear that you were starting to suffer,” Jason asks, and Danny shrugs, draining the last of his tea, which Alfred immediately refills. 

 

“Tired, sore. Phantom and I’ve done it before and we’ve learned my limits,” 

 

Jason still looks concerned and Danny can’t help but smile. While he didn’t want Jason to worry, it did feel nice that someone was worried about him without it being an obligation. Since Danny wheeled himself back into the manor, he had either Jason or Alfred fussing over him, and he could somewhat understand. From what he knew, he was most likely both colder and paler than he was normally. His pulse was also slower, but the two of them shouldn’t know that. 

 

“Can I help at all? I know Alfred’s got you scones and the heating pad, but I feel like I’m not doing much,” Jason admits, looking flushed. 

 

“No, I’m completely fine. I’m already feeling better, it’s really just my neck at this point,” Danny explains while trying to twist his neck to release the built-up tension. 

 

“I can help if you’re okay with it?” Jason asks and Danny automatically nods. 

 

Jason seems almost hesitant but walks behind Danny and warms up his own hands, which Danny appreciates once Jason starts massaging his neck. In all honesty, Danny wasn’t sure he had ever felt anything better, besides maybe no longer freezing from the inside out. Jason was extremely careful as if he was afraid Danny would break, but Danny did notice something, which he couldn’t help but ask about with a laugh. 

 

“Are you taking my pulse?”

 

Danny can’t see Jason, but the momentary stilling of his hands and the almost embarrassment he feels wafting off of Jason gives him his answer before Jason.

 

“Yes..” 

 

“It’s getting better, right?” Danny asks and Jason makes a noise of agreement. 

 

“It always happens after Phantom takes the reigns, the human body isn’t meant to hold that type of power,” Danny explains and knows that Jason nods. 

 

“I’m sorry you had to do that. You shouldn’t have to put your life at risk for Phantom and the United States government,” Jason apologized, although he wasn’t to blame. 

“I’m happy to do it, if ecto entities are treated with respect and dignity. I came up with it, in all honesty. Phantom needed a partner when he first came here, I volunteered. Maybe I shouldn’t have, but I did. It’s what life is, and it’s completely my choice. Phantom was hesitant at first, he didn’t want to hurt me, but I convinced him it was a good idea,” Danny explains, and Jason stills for a moment, before resuming his work. 

 

“What is your relationship with Phantom? You’re supposedly his ambassador and partner, but is it different than that? Is it more?” Jason asks, and Danny barely manages to hold himself back from bursting into laughter. 

 

“You’re asking if Phantom and I are romantically involved, right? The short, simple, and true answer is no. We are not, never have been, and never will be involved with each other in that way. On the other hand, I don’t think there is a single person I would ever be as close to. When Phantom uses me as a channel, I feel everything he does and vice versa. I was the first human he saw, and he bonded to that in a way. I’m not sure I will ever share a bond like that again. And it does make me wonder what any possible partners would have to say about that because that bond with Phantom? That is always going to be one of my highest priorities, the duty he gave me to try and protect the realms? That is going to win nine times out of ten,” Danny explains and expects backlash from Jason, although he hasn’t said or done anything yet. 

 

“I don’t know what other people would say, but that is incredibly attractive to me. You are still young in the grand scheme of things and yet you seem to know exactly what you are doing. Yeah, you have something you would prioritize over the relationship or your partner, but as long as they knew that and understood, I don’t see how it should be a problem,” 

 

Danny can’t help but turn around, surprise etched in his face as Jason looked down at him. 

 

“That is the last thing I thought you would say,” 

 

“Eh, but it is true. It isn’t typical, but I think as long as anyone who is involved with you knows that going in, I think you could make it work,” Jason smiles and Oh, that's a nice smile . 

 

“But isn’t it wrong to prioritize a job over a relationship? There can’t be many people who would be willing to play second fiddle to the king of the Infinite Realms,” Danny scoffs and slumps. 

 

It was something he had known since he first became Phantom at the ripe old age of fourteen. Phantom and the protection of Amity would come first, over school and over his own personal life. When he defeated Pariah Dark, it was just multiplied. Now he was in charge of an entire dimension and those who lived there. They became his responsibility, as well as Amity. Any hope of a normal life ended there. He knew he could live as Danny Fenton, that he could do what he wanted, as long as he was able to leave at the drop of a hat. It was the deal he made with himself. He’ll live his life as Danny Fenton, he’ll be a Wayne Enterprise intern and, hopefully, an employee at some point. He was going to be the picture-perfect citizen for as long as he could. And yet he knew that if for whatever reason Amity or the Infinite Realms needed him, he would go without hesitation. 

 

“There might not be, I won’t lie. But I believe there is someone out there who understands that sometimes, things are more important than date night. Like preventing war between the Infinite Realms and the government?” Jason points out, smiling. Danny can’t help but laugh. 

 

“Yeah, I gotta say, that’s a touch more important than a dinner reservation,” 

 

“Would you two care to watch a movie? It has been a rather stressful day for Mr. Fenton and I believe that Bruce has suggested a movie night to decompress,” Alfred interrupts, startling both Jason and Danny. 

 

The two of them can’t help but turn bright red at the close stance between them, and being interrupted. Alfred looks at them in amusement, knowing full well what they were talking about and the expression Jason had on his face. He had seen that look on many a young man, and Danny was completely oblivious to it. While Alfred would never voice it to either of them, it was about time they got on with it. 

 

“S-sounds nice!” Danny squeaks and Jason nods his agreement, putting some more space between them. 

 

“Very well, I shall make popcorn and snacks. I believe you would have time for a movie between now and dinner time if you start it immediately,” Alfred suggests, and the two of them practically flee the kitchen. 

 

“You know, you could have asked them to leave you to cook in peace,” 

 

Alfred turned to Bruce with a mischievous smile and started prepping the popcorn. 

 

“Ah, but I wouldn’t get to see them turn red that way. Master Bruce, you don’t seem to have any concern for them,” Alfred comments and Bruce shrugs, sitting down at the table. 

 

“Danny seems like a good kid. He’s helping Jason with the pits and negotiating with the government. He was obviously trusted by the king of another dimension to negotiate and act on his behalf. In all honesty, I don’t think there’s much I could do to object,” Bruce speaks honestly, grabbing his own scone. 

 

“Right you are, sir,” Alfred smiles. 

 

It seems as if the years of therapy he finally forced the entire family to go to was paying off. It had been a fight and a half to get Bruce to agree, and even harder to convince Jason and the rest of the kids, but after Damian had a particularly bad panic attack at school, Alfred had finally convinced the entire family to at least try therapy. 

 

And since Bruce wasn’t trying to scare Danny away, it seems to have done at least something. Although Alfred wasn’t deluded into thinking the entire family was suddenly ‘fixed’. Everyone still had their own work, but it was interesting how good Danny seemed to be for Jason. 

Notes:

So, I might have forgotten about Bruce/Batman while writing this, so forgive me! I hope you enjoy the read and it was what you were hoping for!

Lots of love, SSRI!

Chapter 20: The Gala

Notes:

Hello! I am publishing, finally! I struggled with this chapter a lot, both because I was having a hard time writing it, I just got a job, and my college stats is giving me a headache. The link leads to a Pinterest pin that I created. I didn't create the base model/mannequin, but I did create the lace and the dress. I hope I conveyed how the dress should look, even if it is with my rather questionable artistic skills.

I hope you enjoy the chapter!

Lots of love, SSRI!

If you asked Danny at the moment how he was doing, he would quickly say he was fine. He would be a dirty fucking liar. Ever since he met the president, secretary of defense, and Amanda Waller on the Watchtower, he had been coming back every single day to hammer out the rest of the negotiations, which was becoming the bane of his existence. While yes, he is beyond happy that the GIW was currently on lockdown and the anti ecto acts were frozen for now, he also had to deal with the intracities of an interdimensional peace deal, as well as how the two dimensions would interact with each other. 

 

Amanda Waller had decided to announce that ectoplasm made a great ‘renewable’ energy source, which had led to the president half begging-half demanding access to it, which was promptly shut down when Phantom announced that the ectoplasm Amanda was talking about was the literal blood of sentient creatures. And then Waller insisted it would be fine ‘as long as they didn’t take too much’. Phantom didn’t have a chance to kick her out before President Barnes ordered her removal from the meeting, and barred her from any future meetings. Danny couldn’t help but feel that was going to come back to bite him in the ass in the future, but that was future Danny’s problem. 

 

Not only did Danny have to content with the peace talks, but he was also painfully reminded of the gala he was invited to by Alfred one day after a particularly intense meeting. Alfred had announced that the two suits and dress finally arrived from the shop Alfred, Jason, and Danny himself had visited a week before. While in the shop Jason, along with Alfred, had convinced Danny that he should wear the dress, but now he wasn’t so sure. He had hung the dress up in his room in Wayne Manor, which was quickly becoming his main place of residence, and was now staring a hole in it. 

 

It was arguably a gorgeous dress. The pitch black and Swarovski crystals made it look like the night sky, subtly feeding into one of his obsessions. The back was open until just under his scapula and had lace in a lattice with a subtle red colored fabric underneath, which faded out before it reached his behind, something he hadn’t noticed in the shop. The rest of the dress was made out of a fine lace, running down to denser lace cuffs at his wrists and collar around his neck. It would do a good job of hiding the scars that were visible outside the solid black body of the dress. 

 

The Dress (On Pinterest)

 

“It looks stunning, Danny,” Danny startles when Jason speaks from the doorway, turning around with a guilty look on his face. 

 

“Yeah, it does. I’m going with the suit though,” Danny lazily points at the dark blue suit in question. 

 

“You don’t seem all that happy about that,” Jason points out and Danny shrugs.  

 

“It’s whatever. I shouldn’t have let you purchase it in the first place. It’ll make too much of a fuss if I wear it tonight,” Danny insists, still put out. 

 

“Than make a fuss. You obviously like the dress, it fits with the dress code, which is not specifically gendered. The one person who might care while also being able to stop you is Bruce, and since it was his credit card and his instruction to buy the dress, I think you’ll be fine. Bruce’s convinced me to go tonight, I’ll deck any asshat who tries to give you shit. Alfred did ask that I give you this,” Jason walks into the room and hands over a small tube, which Danny figured out to be a tube of lipstick. 

 

“Thanks, Jason. Although you maybe shouldn’t go punching people,” Danny suggests and Jason merely smiles, neither agreeing or disagreeing. 

**************************************

Danny couldn’t help but feel extremely overdressed. Bruce had left before Danny finished getting ready, but Jason was waiting down in the entrance hall, dressed extremely simply compared to Danny. Instead of a full suit or extreme outfit like Danny would expect, Jason was wearing a pair of slacks, a waistcoat, and an unbuttoned jacket, his tie artfully loose. He was pacing back and forth as he waited for Danny, who hesitantly rolled up to him, extremely self-conscious. Not only had he decided to wear the dress, but he had also decided to wear makeup and had made an effort with his hair. He had used the rich red lipstick that matched the color on the back of the dress perfectly and had decided to do a smokey cat eye, which somehow made his eyes impossibly bluer. For his hair, he had decided to put slight finger waves in, not too extreme but enough to tame his hair, and he had enough gel in his hair to make it crack if he touched it wrong. He was looking more feminine, but he was also clearly himself. 

 

Jason finally caught sight of him and froze, staring intently. His mouth dropped open, seemingly out of his control, and Danny was convinced his soul left his body for a moment there, as he just stared. 

 

“You…uh…you look amazing,” Jason stuttered, seemingly unable to tear his eyes away from Danny. 

 

“You as well,” Danny mutters, face bright red. He was being honest, while Jason was dressed more casually than he was, Jason was no less handsome, in the rugged, I don’t want to be here in a messy hair, tie-askew kind of way. 

 

“Alfred is pulling the car around now. Bruce hired a separate driver for himself so Alfred could take us,” Jason explains, and Danny nods, agreeing. 

 

His anxiety was building as time ticked by, and he was suddenly struck with the memory that he wasn’t just going to a party, he was going to a party supposedly celebrating the partnership he helped create with his assistance on a pump design. 

 

“Hey Jason, is it too late to stay home?” Danny asks, and Jason bursts out laughing, doubling over. 

 

“Yes, Danny, it is too late. But since it’s a work event, at least you’re getting paid?” Jason tries to comfort him, and Danny scowls, which only makes Jason laugh harder. 

 

“You’ll be fine. I can always create a scandal to let you escape,” Jason suggests, and Danny huffs. 

 

“I might take you up on that,” Danny mutters, worry etched across his face. 

*********************************

While he certainly got some odd looks for his outfit of choice, no one was brave enough to voice their own opinions. Danny could feel the confusion, but with the imposing presence of Jason next to him, he felt more secure. Jason seems to have decided it’s his job to stay next to Danny for the entirety of tonight, following him around the room as he was forced to interact with other people via Anegla dragging him around, proudly proclaiming him to be the intern that finally got the pump working. 

“Angela, do you really have to keep telling everyone that I was the reason the pump worked? I was one of at least a dozen people who worked on them, yourself included! All you’re doing is discrediting them and yourself for all the work you did on them,” Danny protests after the fifth investor Angela had offered him up to. 

 

“That may be, Mr. Fenton, but the project was at a standstill for six months before you came in. You did more in a week than we were able to accomplish in six months, take the praise, Mr. Fenton,” Lucious Fox announces, walking up to their trio, smiling. 

 

“Mr. Fox, it’s nice to see you again,” Jason greets and the man smiles widely. 

 

“You as well, Jason. We’ve got that project for you almost completed,” Mr. Fox greets Jason who smiles. 

 

“Bruce’ll be happy about that, Lucious. The last one got wrecked so Bruce’ll be happy that the new ones done,” Jason comments and Mr. Fox raises his eyebrows. 

 

“Were you the reason it got wrecked?” Mr. Fox asks and Jason shrugs. 

 

“No comment,” 

 

“Be proud of yourself, Danny. I am aware that you may not have had the most traditional schooling and upbringing, but you clearly know what you are doing. Take pride in that. I do hope to see you as a full time employee in the future,” And with that, Mr. Fox walks away, eyes set on a group of investors. 

 

“Well, thats a good sign, Lucius Fox wanting to see you as an employee in the future,” Anegla remarks, blinking as she stares after the man. 

 

“I’m still confused as to his position here. He helped interview me and I know that he’s high up in the company, but I’m not sure what he does here,” Danny asks, confused. 

 

“Lucius used to be the CEO after Thomas Wayne passed away. Bruce took over once he grew up and sorted his life out. Lucius still serves as an advisor of sorts to both Bruce and Tim, but he also bounces around from department to department, unofficially checking up on various projects and sectors. He’s one of the only remaining employees from when Thomas and Martha ran the company, which gives him a lot of influence in the company,” Angela explains, somewhat in awe. 

 

“Basically, he’s the grandfather to the entire company. If he likes you, you’re going places,” Jason simplifies and Danny can’t help the throb of a headache. 

 

“I sincerely doubt that. I haven’t been to work since Metropolis, even if I was technically cleared a week ago. I’m surprised that I haven’t been booted from the internship program yet,” Danny sighs, fighting off the urge to run his hands through his hair. 

 

“Danny, you’ve been brokering peace between an entire dimension and the government. No one’s expecting you to do anything else. Even if you weren’t meeting with government leaders, all Bruce would have to do was excuse you and you wouldn’t have had anything to worry about,” Jason tries to reassure, but Danny shakes his head. 

 

“I made a commitment to Wayne Industries,” 

 

“You also made a commitment to Phantom and the Infinate Realms. Danny, you are serving as a bridge from one side to another. Bridging the gap between the two worlds. I think some days off are the least Wayne Enterprises can do,” Jason tries to reassure, and Danny freezes. 

 

“Say that again,” Danny demands, staring intently at Jason, who shifts under the attention. 

 

“Some days off are the least Wayne Enterprises can do?” 

 

“No, before that,” 

 

“About you being a bridge?” Jason asks and Danny’s eyes light up, and Jason can physically see as his hair puffs up, only kept in place by the amount of gel Danny had in it. 

 

“Angela, I’ve got to go! Jason about now’s the time for a scandal,” Danny doesn’t reply and turns around, wheeling himself through the party, people practically leaping out of his way. 

 

“Danny! You can’t just leave!” Angela tries to keep up, while also not making a scene. Jason has no such qualms about that and nearly hovers over Danny. 

 

“Angela, I know you’re doing your assigned ‘keep Danny in line’ job, but I’m taking over. It seems like Danny’s got something important to do and I’ll make sure he doesn’t do anything he shouldn’t,” Jason shoots over his shoulder, still chasing after Danny who had now fully left the party. 

 

“Fine, if the building isn’t standing by the end of the night, I’m blaming you,” 

 

“Noted”

******************************

“Danny, not only do I need an explanation as to why you’re in the R&D department, but so is security and anyone else who finds out about this,” Jason asks, watching as Danny starts pulling out various tools, including a tablet he pulls out of the drawer. 

 

“You called me a bridge, from one side to the other. I’ve got a spinal injury, but still perfectly functioning spine and spinal cord on either side of the injury. The only issue is the injury itself. If I can find a way to circumvent it, than there’s a chance I could walk again,” Danny rushes out, pen flying over the tablet as he talks, focus split between the tablet and Jason. 

 

“You think that’s possible?” Jason asks and Danny shrugs. 

 

“I don’t know, not with traditional technology, but I’ve been learning alternative medicine and technology in the Realms. It’s a crap shot, but…” 

 

“But if there’s a chance you want to take it,” Jason finishes, and Danny nods. 

 

“Yeah. That’s why I’m here. Do you mind if I work on it? It’s going to be pretty boring for you,” Danny asks and Jason shrugs. 

 

“I don’t care. Just don’t bring the building down and you can do whatever you want. Do you want anything while you work?” Jason asks, curiously looking at Danny who was already absorbed in his work. 

 

“Chinese, the party food had practically nothing to it,” Danny mumbles distractedly, pen still flying. 

 

“Chinese food coming right up,” Jason confirms, already typing on his phone, Danny absorbed into his own world. 

********************************

“How long has he been at this?” Tim asks, interrupting Jason’s vivid fantasy’s of finally getting to go back home and sleep. 

 

“Since he ran out of the party last night, so…” Jason trails off to check his phone, “roughly eighteen hours? What are you doing here? I thought that you had today off,” Jason asks and Tim sighs. 

 

“Security alert, apparently the system doesn’t like the fact that two people are in a lab that they shouldn’t be in, even if you used your override code,” Tim explains and Jason nods, accepting his explanation.

 

“Ah, I think we’ve got some takeout that Danny hasn’t gotten to yet,” Jason offers and Tim shakes his head. 

 

“I’m good. Do you have any idea how he got that ectoplasm in here? Bruce just wired the place to detect it,” Tim asks and Jason shrugs. 

 

“Hell, I have no idea how he carried it in the dress he’s in,” Jason remarks, and Tim nods, looking at the now manic looking Danny, who was soldering a piece of wire laced with ectoplasm into a case housing, which sparks concerningly. 

 

“I’ll leave that a mystury, thanks. How long do you think he’s going to be?” 

 

“No idea, he just asked for more food so probably awhile? You know how you get when you hit a rhythm. I’m just thankful he’s not drowning himself in coffee like you do,” Jason remarks, for which he gets a smack on his shoulder from Tim. 

 

“Chinese food isn’t any better, Jason. He hasn’t slept for at least 43 hours at this point, and those sparks aren’t looking good. He’s got a room on the resident floor he can sleep in. I don’t think we’re getting him away from the building, but you might just get him to sleep if you sweet talk him,” Tim suggests and Danny suddenly bursts out laughing. 

 

“Nice try Tim, but I’m not stopping any time soon. Jason just ordered more food and I’m nowhere near done,” Danny remarks briefly looking up to give Tim a dirty look. 

 

“Do you at least want to change? While that dress is stunning, it can’t be all that comfortable,” Jason asks, and Danny actually pauses, as if to think. 

 

“No, I think I’m on to something now. Let me know when foods here?” And with that, Danny dives back into his project, which continues to glow green and spark dangerously. 

 

“Well, you tried?” 

 

Jason just glares at Tim,  who quickly flees the lab, both in fear of retaliation from what Jason would do to him, and hesitency over what Danny’s pet project would do. While Tim got the feeling he maybe should report Danny using a still experimental powersource, he really didn’t have it in him at the moment. That was Jason’s problem now, maybe Bruce’s if he got involved. Danny was an adult who was currently brokering peace between Earth and the Infinate Realms, if he wanted to use ectoplasm in a project of his than that was his business, none of Tim’s. 

**************************************

“This is dumb, I’m not even tired,” Danny grumbles, staring up at the ceiling. 

 

“That’s good than, it’s only a minute,” Jason bargains, hoping against all hope that Danny’s body was going to call it quits and finally go to sleep after over forty eight hours in the lab. 

 

Jason had weeded and begged Danny to his room on the residential floor, after convincing him to change into more comfortable clothes than the dress he was wearing. Jason had now gotten Danny to lie down on his bed and convinced him to close his eyes for a minute, just to take a small break. 

 

“One…Two…Three…” Danny slowly counts, as if humoring Jason, eyes firmly closed. 

 

Slowly, ever so slowly, does his counting slow down, numbers becoming slurred and out of order as Danny finally gives into the urge to sleep, sprawled out on his bed. Jason can’t help the smile on his face as Danny snores softly, completely out like a light. 

 

Moving slowly so as not to disturb Danny, Jason moves to the door, opening it and slipping out, letting it close softly behind him. 

 

“Finally got him to rest, huh?” A voice asks, and Jason turns around to see Rio looking at him, looking rather amused. 

 

“Yeah, and he’ll probably be out for awhile,” Jason snorts in amusement, knowing that if Danny was anything like Tim, that Danny would be out for a solid ten hours or so. 

 

“Makes sense. The kid doesn’t know how to regulate himself,” Rio comments and Jason nods his agreement. 

 

“Yeah. Timmer’s just like that, if you let him. I’m going to go get something to eat, if you wanna come with?” Jason offers, already trying to figure out where Danny would like to eat from once he woke up again. 

 

“Sure, but you’re paying,” Rio demands and Jason nods, relenting easily. 

 

 

Chapter 21: And the Ball keeps rolling

Notes:

Oh boy! I have been gone for a long time, or at least that's what it feels like. I just got done with my college stats class and passed! I am so relieved to finally have it done. As a self-celebration, and the fact that I am no longer studying like a crazy person, I decided to write a chapter, yay!

Also, I feel like the plot has gone stale, so I decided to freshen it up.

Danny was still passed out when Jason and Rio arrived back, which wasn’t all that surprising given the lack of sleep that caused him to crash in the first place. What was strange was the perfume scent that hung in the air, irritating Jason’s eyes, nose, and throat, as if it was pepper spray instead of a floral concoction.

 

“Do you smell that?” Jason asks, voice cracking and sounding as if he had just been choked. 

 

“Yeah, maybe Angela went crazy with her perfume. I think she had a date with a girl from IT tonight,” Rio offers as an explanation, sniffing the air curiously. 

 

“How can you stand that? It actually burns ,” Jason coughs into his arm and Rio frowns. 

 

“It’s a little strong, especially for her room being next door, but it isn’t bad. Jason, are you okay?!” Rio goes from normal conversation to yelling as Jason starts hacking uncontrollably, speckles of red appearing on his dress shirt sleeve. 

 

“Get out! Get out and get to medical!” Jason yells, sprinting to the bed and spotting Danny up close for the first time. 

 

He’s as pale as a ghost, a traditional one, not an infinite realm one. His chest is heaving up and down as if he’s unable to get a breath. Blood-red tears are streaming down his face, and Jason spots blood flecks on his lips. Jason quickly scoops him up and bolts, the door slamming closed behind him as Rio attempts to reduce the spread of whatever had been in the room. 

 

“Rio, call Bruce or Alfred, get them to grab the stash, and say Danny is in danger, they’ll understand. We need to get to medical,” Jason heaves Danny into a better position, and his vision swims as he wobbles. 

 

“Don’t take this the wrong way, but I don’t think Danny is the only one who needs medical attention,” Rio points out and Jason nods with gritted teeth.

 

“I know, but Danny was in the room for longer. He was exposed to whatever that was for much longer. Grab my phone from my pocket?” Jason asks and Rio does so. 

 

“Give it here,” Jason juggles both Danny and the phone long enough pull up the contact that he was looking for before jamming it under his ear and taking off towards the elevators. 

 

“You’ve got Hal Jordan extraordinaire, what can I do for you?” Hal’s voice crackles from the line and Danny breathes a sigh of relief. 

 

“Hal, I think Danny’s been targeted. We’re getting him to medical in Wayne Tower, but we might need a medevac to up top for more specialized care,” Jason rushes out punching the elevator button with more force than strictly necessary. 

 

“Is he safe? Jason, Danny needs to be safe. Phantom is going to raise earth to the ground if he dies,” Hal warns and Jason nods, pushing the panic of both having to deal with the fact that Danny was in real trouble and so was the earth if Phantom reacted badly to this. 

 

“He’s alive,” 

*************************************************

The medical floor of Wayne Tower was absolute chaos, and that was putting it lightly. Bruce, Alfred, Tim, Dick, and Damian had arrived in a flurry of commotion, adding to the medical team swarming around Danny, who was laying on a gurney. The doctor was attempting to stabilize him, but it was tough with the fact that Danny wasn’t responding to the treatments and they still had no idea what had gone wrong in the first place. 

 

Rio was given a quick check-up to make sure they wouldn’t have another critical patient but was fully cleared with absolutely nothing wrong with him, aside from an elevated heart rate, most likely from stress. On the other hand, Jason had severe irritation to his eyes, nose, and throat, as if he had breathed in fumes from an acoustic chemical. This made no sense as Jason and Rio had been exposed for the same amount of time and both displayed different reactions to whatever was released in Danny’s room. 

 

As of now, they were attempting to treat it like an allergic reaction, which wasn’t going well. Danny was still bleeding from his eyes and was still struggling to breathe, even if he was removed from the source of the reaction. 

 

“Jason, what happened?” Bruce asks, a note of panic in his voice, staring at a decent distance at the flurry of medical professionals, and machines with various alarms going off. 

 

“I don’t know. Danny was pulling a Tim and I finally forced him to sleep. I knew he would be out for a while, so I went to grab something to eat with Rio, we weren’t gone long, I swear. The room smelled like heavy perfume when we got back, Rio was fine, but it felt like pepper spray. I started coughing and noticed Danny was worse off. I evacuated him and had Rio call you. You’ve got to give him the ectoplasm, nothing else is working!” Jason finally shouts, pointing to the chaos that was the medical team attempting to stabilize Danny. 

 

“Okay, okay. See, Alfred is getting him hooked up to an IV of it now. He’ll be fine. I’m worried about you right now, you’re still coughing and struggling a little. Give yourself a boost,” Bruce orders and Jason slams his finger on the button to release more ectoplasm from his wrist brace. 

 

He felt it instantly, like a soothing balm that spread from his arm outward. Loosening the tightness he didn’t feel in his skin and muscles. Most of the hazy anger dissipated, and Jason was left with the stark reality that this was most likely a directed attack on Danny. Now that the pit rage was sedated, he put together the fact that the most obvious difference between Danny and Jason, versus Rio, was the fact that both of them had ectoplasm in their systems. It was a directed attack against Danny. 

 

“B, it was something that screws with ectoplasm, that's why Rio isn’t affected,” Jason blurts out and Bruce is already nodding, looking put out. 

 

“Yeah, I’ve got a Justice League team coming in to search his room. We will figure out what is going on. Danny was most likely targeted for his peace work and his connection with Phantom. He’s getting a Justice League security detail, around the clock. Someone doesn’t want peace between Earth, or more likely America, and the Infinite realms. We need to do everything in our ability to make sure Danny is alright, and we need to find his attacker,” Bruce orders and everyone nods. 

 

“Is that where Cass is?” Jason asks, looking around for his sister. 

 

“Yes, she’s investigating his room to see if there is anything obvious she can find before the investigative team from the Justice League gets here. If she can find anything that will help, it could speed the process along,” Bruce explains himself, even if he doesn’t need to. 

 

Just then, the alarms that had been ringing throughout the medical room finally go quiet and steady, if slightly slower than normal, beeping fills the room. Jason whips his head around and spots Alfred finally relaxing. It seems as if Danny had stabilized, if for now. 

 

“Thank god,” Bruce slumps, pinching the bridge of his nose. 

 

“I get that Danny is important, and we’d rather he be alive, but is it really that bad?” Dick asks and Jason glares at him. 

 

“Has this all gone over your head? Danny is an ambassador for an entirely different realm. He had the king of such realm in his back pocket. I’m fairly certain they are romantically involved,” At this Jason snorts, “-and Danny was, until a few seconds ago, quickly destabilizing and quite literally dying. That is not to mention that the realm he is an ambassador of is powerful enough that OA is nervous,” Tim points out, nerves sounding frayed. 

 

“Geez, okay. I’m going to go check on Cass, make sure she’s doing fine, and maybe meet the forward team,” Dick quickly leaves the medical floor, getting away from the hostility in the room. 

 

Jason looked back to Danny who had lost a few of the hovering medical professionals, which seemed like a good sign. Jason still recoiled from the sight of the bright green ectoplasm flowing through an IV and into Danny. It still made him want to rip it out as soon as he saw it, he still struggled with the fact that the green was no longer threatening, but something that was good. He never would have thought something so like the pit would be something he needed or was good for him. 

 

“Jason, you need to get a blood test, same as Danny. The ectoplasm is helping both of you, but we need as much information as we can get,” Bruce suggests, and Jason nods dumbly, still staring at the prone form of Danny. 

 

“Jason,” 

 

“I know, old man,” 

*********************************

The Justice League forward teams arrived soon after Jason gave his blood, and within minutes, Danny was transferred into a medical transport and evidence, including a gas canister, was collected from his room. A guard of Superman, Wonder Woman, and Hal Jordon as Green Lantern escorted him from the medical floor, all the way down to R&D where a zeta tube sat waiting. 

 

Wayne Tower, one of the more secure buildings on the East Coast, was somehow breached, Bruce wasn’t taking any chances keeping Danny planet side. The Watchtower would be the safest place for Danny, plus the kid liked visiting, as long as it wasn’t to give a lecture. 

 

“I’m coming with,” Jason demands and Bruce nods. 

 

“Of course. I’m pretty sure you are still being affected. So is Cass. Whatever was in that canister is affecting her as well, not as bad as the two of you, but she’s got a cough she didn’t have before coming into the building. Again, an unknown substance was released against a political figure, as well as our intern. All precautions are being taken,” Bruce says firmly. 

 

“Okay. Is OA being called in? Are we bringing any other source in?” Already Bruce was shaking his head. 

 

“No, no one else for now. Only Justice League. As far as anyone knows, Danny is still working in the labs on his new project. If anyone wants to meet with him, that's our excuse. We can’t even get into contact with anyone from the infinite realms because Danny was their only point of contact, so we are going to do our best to minimize this political incident, because that is what it is. Danny is officially listed as an Ambassador in the State Department, even if he may be a US citizen, this would be an international incident if it was with any other entity besides the Infinite realms,” Bruce orders and the batclan nod their agreement, eyes trained on Danny. 

 

Danny had mostly stabilized at this point, but he was still under the effects of whatever he was dosed with, he was still unconscious and unable to function, which was a big issue for everyone on Earth. If the infinite realms took offense to this, even if Danny fully recovered with no lasting issues, an attempt on one of their high-ranking official's life was carried out, on US soil. They would be perfectly justified in anger or retaliation of some sort. The least they could do was heal Danny and guard him until other arrangements could be made. Catching whoever did this would hopefully bring some more goodwill. 

Chapter 22: A Break (Not an Update)

Hi everyone! I have enjoyed immensely writing this and being able to see all of your comments and feedback. This has been an amazing book to write and story to share. Before anyone panics, no, I am not stopping, I am only going to be taking a short break, and hopefully not for long! I've slowed down a lot in updating and that is because of the holidays mostly, but I have also been dealing with my mental health. Nothing is really wrong, I just need to take some time to focus on myself before anything goes wrong.

I also have a really big college psychology exam coming up that I need to study for and need to be able to prioritize my time better, especially since I got a new job and schedule I am adjusting to.

That isn't to say I am not updating, just don't expect any regular updates for about a month. I don't like to put myself on a schedule like that, but I do like being able to tell people what to expect. (I also like knowing what to expect).

The story is still going forward! And Amanda Waller will be dealt with! I just need some time.

So please be patient with me. I hope I can keep everyone as readers, but to keep putting out good quality content, or what I think is good quality content at least, I need to take a break for myself and my college life. I hope you will still be there to enjoy it when I come back!

Happy holidays to all, have a wonderful New Year!

Chapter 23: The Watchtower

Notes:

Hello! I am back! I passed my big exam I needed to, and everything has now settled in my life, for the most part at least. I'm so excited to get back into writing, I've missed it!

Lots of love, SSRI!

The watchtower was on high alert, and any nonessential deliveries and personnel were restricted. The Justice League was taking no chances at Danny’s safety being threatened, not again. If it was possible to target Danny in Wayne Enterprises, Bruce considered nowhere safe, not even the Watchtower. So, with the almost complete shutdown of the Watchtower. Danny and the medical bay were assigned round-the-clock guards, limited to Clark, Diana, Hal, and Bruce himself. The one other person, besides medical personnel, allowed into the sick bay was any emergent cases and Jason. 

 

Jason, who while nowhere near as bad as Danny, was suffering from symptoms Bruce would expect to see from a poisoning. The Justice League had figured out what exactly Danny had been targeted with, Blood Blossoms. An extremely rare flower, which was only found in the harshest conditions and thought to be extinct for the past few centuries. Bruce didn’t even know how someone would get their hands on the flowers, let alone know that it would be effective on Danny. This made Bruce wonder why more traditional attempts hadn’t been made on Danny’s life. Not that he was asking for someone to try again. 

 

“What’s wrong with Template?” 

 

Bruce just about jumped a foot in the air, startled by the young female voice from beside him. No young side kicks should be allowed in the Watchtower, now especially. And looking to his side, revealed a girl who looked shockingly like Danny that Bruce couldn’t help but glance at Danny lying in his bed, to confirm that Danny hadn’t gotten up somehow and transformed himself into the girl beside him. But the girl was years too young to be Danny, let alone the fact that Danny was still unconscious. 

 

“Who are you? How did you access the Watchtower?” Bruce demands, Batman's persona sliding in place of concerned parent/boss. 

 

“I’m Ellie, King Phantom’s first knight. What is wrong with Danny?” The girl demands again, sounding more agitated. She was hovering in the air, a good foot or more off the ground, to be at eye level with Bruce. 

 

“I’m going to need more than you claiming to be who you are. This is a secured area, you shouldn’t be here,” Bruce lectured, and the girl scoffed. 

 

“Danny told you about me, or Phantom did. Ask me the phrase,” Ellie demanded and Bruce balked, flabbergasted. 

 

It seemed odd that this girl would be third in command behind Danny for decision-making in the Infinite Realms, somehow he thought Specter was a bit more intimidating than someone who looked like Ellie at the moment. Judging by her physical appearance, she couldn’t be more than fifteen, sixteen at the most. 

 

“Which way does the owl fly?” Bruce asks, having a bad feeling settled in his gut. 

 

“Whichever way it pleases that night,” Ellie chimes back, lounging where she floated. 

 

“So you are Specter. How did you know to come? We’ve been trying to figure out how to get ahold of anyone from the Infinite Realms, Danny didn’t exactly give us a point of next contact,” Bruce interrogates, eyes turning back to Danny and Jason, who were both knocked out with heavy sedatives, Danny because he woke up in agony every time he seemed to come to, and Jason because he had gotten a little too over-protective of Danny and still had his own reaction to the Blood Blossoms. 

 

“I felt like something was wrong. Danny has been entwined with the Infinite Realms, not everyone can tell, but a few of those who are close to Danny and Phantom can. It was decided that I would be the best one to come, figured I was less frightening than a giant ghost yeti,” Bruce didn’t admit it out loud, but he figured she was probably right. 

 

“Where’s Phantom? Danny’s still struggling, and we’re not sure what else to do for him, besides hooking him up to ectoplasm. He wasn’t all that detailed in the crash medical course he gave us,” Bruce questions, and Ellie scoffs, pausing in her lazy wandering. 

 

“Phantom is currently trying to keep most of the Infinite Realms in order and not attacking the human realm, specifically the United States. Which is hard for himself, given that his ambassador was nearly assassinated. I was sent with more ectoplasm. You’ve been doing all you can, which Phantom appreciates. He also sent me to act as a guard. While we in the Infinite Realms appreciate the guard duty and restrictions you have set in place, I’ve been sent as a second line of defense,” Ellie turns serious, almost glaring at Bruce, or Batman in this situation. 

 

“Understood. The Justice League and Oa would love a chance to meet and discuss with Phantom about this incident, and what can be done on our end to ensure that nothing like this ever happens again. Until now, we were unaware that there was anything like Blood Blossoms, and even if there were, what their effects on Danny would be,” Bruce asks. 

 

“Phantom is unavailable, at least until Danny is back on his feet. I told you before that Phantom is currently keeping the peace. At this point, there is no need for discussion, all our goal now is keeping Danny safe and protected,” Ellie’s voice was cold, and it was clear any discussion was over, what little of a discussion it was. 

 

“Who is that besides him? I thought you would limit personal, and there should be a better place for any other patients,” Ellie asks, looking at Jason, and Bruce can’t help but bristle at the mention of his son. 

 

“That is Jason Todd-Wayne, he was affected by the Blood Blossom gas as well. Not as badly as Danny, but enough for him to be placed under observation. The doctors thought that having the two patients affected by the same substance close together would be beneficial for a treatment plan. Both have been completely decontaminated,” Bruce insists and Ellie sighs. 

 

“He’s the one who evacuated Danny, isn’t he? He should be getting his own ecto drip, it’ll make his recovery faster,” Ellie insists and Bruce nods, not knowing what else to do. 

 

“I’ll have our medical team start that. Danny, he’s going to be okay, right? He’s already been through so much, and he’s just started work at Wayne Enterprises,” Bruce asks, and Ellie relaxes, for real, for the first time since she’s arrived. 

 

“Yes, Danny will be okay. And Phantom will smooth everything out in the Infinite Realms. But whoever did this needs to pay, whether that is in your court, or ours,” Ellie demands, and Bruce feels a shiver run up his spine at the not-so-thinly veiled threat. 

 

Instead of saying anything else, Ellie floats towards Danny and Jason, even if Bruce tenses up in the face of another possible threat. Ellie, almost looks sad, if that makes sense. Danny had touched on Ellie, and who she was. A barely stable clone created from King Phantom by one of his enemies. Phantom had connected with the clone, and instead of taking Phantom out, Ellie became close allies with Phantom, enough to be made his first Knight. But besides that, neither Phantom or Danny had elaborated on Ellie, even when questioned. The only other thing they had to say about her was that she could be trusted, and had told the others the code phrase to ask to make sure someone could be trusted. 

 

“Batman, Oa is calling in and would like to discuss the investigation,” Hal’s voice booms through the overcome, sounding like a gunshot in the quiet sick bay. 

 

Bruce doesn’t want to leave Ellie alone with Jason and Danny, no matter how much Danny might trust her, but Oa takes precedence, as does the investigation. 

*******************

“We’ve discovered the source of the Blood Blossoms, or at least how they got into Wayne Enterprises. A janitor hadn’t come in to work since the attack, and when we looked into their banking records, we discovered a quarter million dollar deposit on the day of the attack, and plane tickets to Vietnam, first class. We believe that he set the canister in the central air system and fled. We have a recovery team on the way to his last location now. Back tracing the funds, they originated in a US black ops budget, managed and operated by Amanda Waller. We believe it was retaliation for the disastrous meeting she was a part of. We have a retrieval team going after her as well,” Hal explains, and Bruce can’t help but internally grumble that Hal and his lanterns hadn’t found any of that information, Oracle had. 

 

“Very well. The council demands that Amanda Waller be sent to New Oa for trial. It is clear that the United States justice system is equipped to handle a case of this scale,” The head councilwoman demands, video calling in from Oa, as she sat surrounded by the council that made up a large portion of Oa’s government. 

 

“Very well, we can agree to that. Ms. Waller stepped outside of her bounds in the scope of her duty. If it prevents war between the Infinite Realms, we will allow her to be taken to Oa to stand trial for her crimes,” While Bruce could confidently say he wasn’t a fan of President Barnes, he could agree that handing Amanda Waller off without a fight was a wise choice. 

 

“Very well. Hal Jordan will arrange the transportation. How is young Daniel? We were informed that he had stabilized. Is there any improvement in his condition?” The councilwoman asks and Diana stands. 

 

“Yes. His vitals have improved, and it seems like we have turned a corner. He is resting and sleeping off the remaining exposure while being attended to by doctors around the clock. He is expected to make a full recovery and can return to Earth, as long as the danger has passed, within a few days,” Diana reports and the entire council of Oa seems pleased by this information, as is Bruce. 

 

Danny had experienced enough hardship, and Bruce would be excusing him from any further work, both for Wayne Enterprises and the Justice League for the foreseeable future. Maybe Jason would want to take him somewhere nice, with sand and the ocean, and far away from further threats or stress. Well, one could only hope. Bruce wasn’t convinced Danny would like that, so he would leave Danny’s time off to him, although he would offer any accommodations he could. 

*****************************

Danny felt as if he had been put through a blender, which wasn’t a surprise as he slowly came to in what looked like a medical room. He would have outright panicked, if Ellie’s face hadn’t popped up in front of his vision, giving him a different version of startled. She looked tired, and worried, which was unusual for her. 

 

“Hey,” Danny mumbles, forcing himself to sit up in the bed he was in. 

 

He didn’t recognize the location, but any further worries were relaxed when he spotted Jason in the bed next to him, if only briefly. If Jason was here, Bruce was most likely involved, and the location could be trusted, and that was without Ellie. 

 

“Hey to you. How are you feeling?” Ellie asks and Danny shrugs before wincing. 

 

“Fine, for the most part. It was Blood Blossoms again, right?” Danny asks, and Ellie nods, seeming even more tired. 

 

“Apparently some lady named Amanda Waller was behind it. The Justice League is already dealing with her. You had us worried, we could feel how close it was,” Ellie scolds, and Danny winces. 

 

“I’m sorry,” 

 

“It’s fine, Frostbite says the former regency council is holding down the fort in the realms. Everything is on a standstill. It sounds like you’ve got a lot of explaining to do,” Ellie tries to joke and Danny groans, slumping back into the bed. 

 

“That doesn’t sound fun,” Ellie laughs and Danny sighs. 

 

“No, it doesn’t. But you at least don’t have to deal with it. Can you head back and let everyone know I’m okay, and not to come looking for a fight? I’m not sure I have it in me to play referee,” Danny requests, and Ellie nods. 

 

“Sure thing, Template. Frostbite sent the good stuff. Make sure you and the reverent over there get some,” Ellie jerks a thumb at the unconscious Jason, and Danny nods. 

 

“Yeah, thanks for checking in,” 

 

“No problem, but the bat-looking guy was looking like he swallowed a lemon, you better explain yourself,” Ellie insists, and disappears with a small pop. 

 

Danny looks around for the ‘bat-looking guy’ and discovers Batman looming over in the corner, face a stone slab, and Danny suddenly wishes he was still unconscious, not looking forward to the upcoming discussion in the least. 

Chapter 24: A Start

Notes:

Alrighty! This work is not abandoned! I have just been really slow with writing recently. From how I am guessing it's going to go, there will be about five more chapters, all of that is subject to change however even if I think and have five chapters planned out, I have learned that does not always go to plan. So, it could be five chapters or more.

I hope you enjoy this newest chapter, Lots of love SSRI!

“Daniel, I see you are better, that is good. Ellie has informed us that Phantom and his council are keeping the rest of the Infinite realms at bay, for which we are thankful. Is there anything we can immediately do for you?” Batman questions and Danny sinks into the bed with a heavy sigh. 

 

“Get the new drip set up for me and Jason? How is he anyway? He must be pretty freaked out, and Bruce! Does Bruce know what's going on?! Am I getting fired for missing work again?” Danny asks, only half joking, and the smallest smile tugs at the corner of Bruce’s lips. 

 

“Mr. Wayne is aware of where his son is, as well as you. He has, of course, given you the foreseeable future off, and wishes you well. He would be here if security protocols allowed him. You are currently on the Watchtower being cared for in our main infirmary,” Batman quickly informs Danny, and Danny manages to relax somewhat.

 

“Well, that's good, I guess. I’m surprised he hasn’t had me fired yet, I keep getting myself into situations that result in me having sick leave,” Danny grumbles, upset at the fact that his time in the labs had been reduced so much, and he hadn’t had a lot of time working at Wayne Enterprises, now that he thought of it. 

 

“Bruce wouldn’t do that. He understands that there are circumstances outside of anyone's control. Bruce would like to apologize for the actions of his former employee and the negligent safety measures that ended with you being poisoned. Rest assured that we are aware of who set off the canister and they will be prosecuted for their crimes. I am wondering if you have made any contact with anyone else besides Wraith?” Batman asks and Danny looks at him baffled, not quite understanding what exactly Batman was thinking. 

 

“I just woke up? Like five minutes ago? What do you think?” Danny asks, still baffled. 

 

“I was unaware if you would be able to communicate with Phantom or not, you had not yet covered how exactly you communicate outside of Phantom’s possession of your body,” Batman tries to explain himself, which Danny couldn’t fault him for, most of the Justice League would be shitting themselves, as well as a good portion of other political figures. 

 

Danny, who was currently seen as the ambassador to an entire dimension and holding a large sway over the political scene there, had been nearly assassinated, or at least that is what most of the humans were under the impression. Danny could understand the possible panic of Batman along with everyone else. So Danny could forgive the panic on Batman’s part. 

 

“It's…fine. No, I have not had any contact with anyone else besides Wraith, I’ll need to have a few meetings once I get a chance. The other side feels troubled, but nowhere near the line that would cause panic or worry for a potential war. I’m not fully dead after all,” Danny struggles not to snicker and Batman has to wonder what exactly was so amusing about the fact that Danny nearly died. 

 

“Understood. Thank you for elaborating. I shall inform others that there is no need for further preparations. If you do not need anything beyond a change in IV fluids I will leave you to further recover. The doctor will be in soon if there isn’t anything else you need from me,” Batman finishes and Danny can’t help but sigh and pinch the bridge of his nose. 

 

“Call me Danny, please. For the love of the ancients, I cannot stand the name Daniel,” Danny groans out Batman nods, and Danny can’t help but feel the faintest bit of endearment emanating from Batman as he makes a quick retreat. 

 

Almost immediately after Batman leaves the room, a doctor, or at least who Danny assumes to be a doctor, comes bustling in, holding two bags of ectoplasm. 

 

“Hello sir, I have been informed that you asked for an IV fluid change. I am also here to update you on your health. During the poisoning, we could not exactly figure out what the poison was doing to your body besides shutting down various organ functions, as well as internal bleeding that was eventually controlled. You were stabilized with ectoplasm after more human attempts were made and then transferred up here to the Watchtower. Do you have any further questions or needs?” The doctor, who Danny had not been introduced to, asked and Danny sighed, trying to think past the lists that were quickly forming in his mind over what exactly he would have to figure out before the end of the day, most importantly informing everyone in the Infinite realms that he was perfectly fine and not currently dying, although he did have an idea. 

 

“Are you authorized to perform surgeries?” Danny manages to ask suddenly, remembering exactly what he was doing before this entire mess started. 

 

“I am, but I don’t believe you require that drastic of medical attention. Unless there is something else wrong that we haven’t been able to detect?” The doctor's tone changes from relaxed, to a more panicked, worried tone. 

 

“No, everything is fine. I was just wondering. Can you make a small incision, only a few inches, on either side of the L4 vertebrae? You shouldn’t have to interact with the spine or cord at all, just grant access to it. Would that be possible?” Danny asks and spots when Jason jerks in his bed, clearly awake and wanting to interject on the subject. 

 

“It could be possible, but whatever would you need that for? We are aware of your injury, but that shouldn’t do anything,” The doctor comments and Danny smiles tightly, struggling not to grin outright. 

 

“It was just a question. I don’t need anything else,” 

 

The doctor quickly replaces both Danny’s and Jason’s IVs before quickly leaving the room, leaving Danny and Jason alone. 

 

“Don’t try and pretend to be asleep Jason, I know you’re awake and have been,” Danny calls him out, and Jason snorts, sitting up while being mindful of the IV that was in his arm. 

 

“So you caught me. Why exactly are you asking about surgery? Are you okay? Did something else happen?” Jason asks, sounding every bit concerned. 

 

“No, um, do you remember what I was working on in the lab before this all started?” Danny asks and Jason hesitantly nods. 

 

“A spinal bridge, to help you walk again. But that should take years of development and testing…” Jason trails off, suddenly falling silent. 

 

“I’m heartier than the typical human, if something goes wrong, there’s a lower chance of permanent damage and further injury. Experimenting on myself is perfectly legal, and it has a better chance that someone else would experience side effects and complications than I would. It’s honestly the perfect situation. Besides the technology isn’t compatible with most people. They have to have low levels of ecto contamination for it to work. Human technology hasn’t developed enough for that kind of connection and signal transportation. Ectoplasm has the unique ability of transference, it is one of the only materials in known dimensions that has its capabilities. And it's toxic in large amounts to people who haven’t already built up exposure and immunity,” Danny explains and Jason sighs, it looks like he’s hanging onto his sanity with a thin thread. 

 

“Danny, that isn’t safe. It’s untested technology, it’s still in development, you are still developing it,” Jason points out, and Danny huffs. 

 

“It's not going to happen now, I just know that there isn’t a doctor on earth that I would trust with cutting into my back. I’m still at least a week away from having a first proof of concept, which would probably need further development as issues crop up after it’s implanted. So months or years until the final project is completed, not to mention the possible issues with normal humans. But for me, for a rough attempt, a week, at most. And I come up here often enough that a quick stop in at medical shouldn’t be too out of the ordinary,” Danny plows on and Jason sends himself back into the mattress, staring up at the ceiling. 

 

“It’ll be fine, besides, it's not ready now. I’m not asking the guy to slice me open now,” Danny retorts back, and Jason sighs. 

 

“You should have someone else look at it. And I don’t think the docs going to want to participate in experimental surgeries and medical devices,” Jason points out and Danny snorts. 

 

“Well, even if he doesn’t, I can always have one of the infinite realms doctors do it. I figured a human doctor would be better with the internal human structures than a ghost would. Hell, I could probably manage it myself, but figured I would leave that to the medical professionals,” Danny jokes and Jason manages to huff out a laugh. 

 

“Danny, if you weren’t you, I would be worried about you becoming a rouge,” Jason comments and Danny snorts, dark humor raising its ugly head. 

 

“Been there, done that. Would not recommend, 0/10 bad experience,” 

 

“Of course, you’re able to say that. Do you feel sick and need the IV, or did you just say that?” Jason asks suddenly and Danny shrugs. 

 

“Can I run a marathon? Absolutely not. Can I go bust out of here to raid the dessert table in the cafeteria? Absolutely,” Danny jokes, throwing the blankets off of him before flying into the wheelchair beside his bed, still being mindful of the IV still in his arm. 

 

“Do you really think that's a good idea?” Jason asks, sitting up as well. 

 

Jason fiddles with the IV and the pole it's attached to, disengaging the brakes so he can drag it after himself. At least Jason knew enough not to go fiddling around with removing an IV himself. The wheelchair Danny was in wasn’t his normal one, it seemed to belong to the infirmary, outfitted with an IV pole and all. Jason quickly transferred the IV bag attached to Danny’s bedside IV pole to the one that was attached to the wheelchair. 

 

“Thanks,” Danny mutters and Jason smiles. 

 

“Let’s go, I hear there’s a new batch after Flash’s first mission,” Jason urges Danny to hurry, and Danny wheels after him, wanting to gorge himself on desserts after nearly being killed, again. 

**************************

“You ever think that you get in a lot of trouble?” Jason asks, leaning back on the meticulously maintained grass of the viewing deck. 

 

“Jason, you haven’t seen half of the trouble I’ve gotten into. Yes, I would say that I get into more trouble than the average guy my age,” Danny smiles, looking up at the stars again. 

 

“Really? I know you’ve been involved with Phantom and the Infinite Realms since the beginning of high school, but you told everyone that you did a lot of hiding in closets and avoiding the fighting,” Jason asks, and Danny can hear an edge in his voice. 

 

“Yeah, well. Everyone tries to downplay certain things. It was easier to pretend that it was all Phantom. Fewer questions were asked that way. Somehow it was easier to go this way instead of telling the truth,” Danny murmurs, knowing that Jason would hear him. 

 

“And what is the truth, Danny? Because I am really confused. I know you don’t owe me anything, but please, just tell me the truth,” Jason nearly begs, and Danny refuses to look at him. 

 

“I can’t. Jason, I want to tell you, I do. But I can’t. What I’ve told people before is close enough to the truth,” Danny brushes off the question and tries to refocus on the stars, trying to ignore the confusion coming off of Jason. 

 

“Why do you do this, Danny?” Jason asks suddenly, anger lacing his words but confusion leeching off of him. 

 

“What? Eating dessert and looking at the stars?” Danny knows that isn’t what Jason was asking about. 

 

“No, Danny. Doing this. Deflecting, distracting. You talk about things, you share rich histories of the Infinite Realms, you talk of the people and make them human and real. But what have you shared about yourself? Name one thing that is personal to you that you’ve shared?” Jason demands, sitting up and staring at Danny intently. 

 

“What's that supposed to mean?” Danny asks, anger starting to flair. 

 

“You talk about the attacks and terror on Amity but refuse to talk about how it affected you or how you felt about it. You talk as if you are writing a paper, emotionally detached and separated from the subject matter,” Jason accuses, and Danny huffs. 

 

“You don’t need to know that. No one does! No one needs to know I was fucking terrified! No one needs to know I almost died half a dozen times before I was sixteen! That isn’t important! It never is. It doesn’t matter what I think or feel because there will always be something more important! I can’t be unsatisfied with what I’ve been given, I can’t be angry, I can’t want anything else! Is that what you want me to say, Jason!? That I know exactly what my place in life is and I can’t change it. Is that what you want?” Danny explodes and a wave of cold washes out from him, hair poofing up and eyes blazing green. 

 

“Danny…”

 

“It’s what I’ve always done, and whenever I tried anything else, it turned out badly. So I’ve just accepted it, accepted the life I have to live, even if I don’t want to. Jason, I have given everything to everyone else in my life. I don’t have anything else. So no, I don’t share anything personal about myself, I don’t get that luxury. Because I don’t get to have my own wishes and desires because I have so much riding on me, more than you know,” Danny finishes, voice falling silent. 

 

“That doesn’t mean you can’t have a life! You-”

 

“I am half dead! I have an entire dimension resting on my shoulders! It’s not just being an ambassador or Phantom’s vessel, I am Phantom! I am a king and not only have to protect the realms but the world from the realms! I am the balance! Do you know what kind of pressure that puts me under?!” Danny bursts out again, the cold worse than before. 

 

Frost formed on the ground and alarms started to blare, most likely the climate controls reacting to the sudden temperature shift. Danny looks around fearfully before the cold recedes and he’s left sitting in the now-damp grass, looking a mixture of panic and fear, glancing from Jason to the area around him, which was thankfully empty of all signs of life. 

 

“What?” Jason manages to ask, stunned at the outburst. 

 

“You heard me. I shouldn’t have yelled, I shouldn’t have told you that. But now you know. I’m not repeating myself, but you should know it's true. Remember that morning at the maner? When I explained that Phantom and the realms would always come first? This is why, if the realms fall to chaos and destruction, then all attached universes and dimensions will as well. You remember the lessons. That kind of responsibility? That takes everything I have. I don’t get to have a personal life. Because I can’t force someone else to deal with that. I can’t come home and say ‘Hey babe, rough day at the office, I had to sit by and watch the collapse of an entire universe in order to protect every other one, how was your day?’ I can’t put that on someone else. My personal life is a joke, I don’t have one. I don’t get to have one,” Danny finishes lamely, and Jason can’t help it, he snorts. 

 

“Do you just have shitty friends and family? You can 100% have a life, as long as the people in it can understand what you’re going through. Life doesn’t mean fully conforming to the people around you, it's a two-way street. How has your personal life been since you came to Gotham? You’ve made friends with Rio and Angela, you made friends with me and the rest of the family. That’s a life, that is a personal life. And you know what? You need a vacation. An actual vacation, not recovering from almost dying again,” 

 

In spite of himself, Danny can’t help the chuckle he lets out. He really does need a vacation. Not another mission that happened to be outside of Amity, not recovering from almost dying yet again, an actual vacation, with fruity drinks and sand. 

 

“Yeah, I won’t argue against that. You won’t tell them, will you? What I yelled about?” Danny asks, not wanting to repeat what he said to limit the possibility of someone overhearing him hopefully. 

 

“Of course not, Danny. Can I ask why you decided to tell me?” Jason asks and Danny shrugs. 

 

“I got angry, probably shouldn’t have yelled. I didn’t mean to yell that. I’m sorry, I shouldn’t have put that on you. It isn’t fair to ask you to keep that sort of thing to yourself,” Danny apologizes, and Jason sighs. 

 

“You don’t have to apologize, Danny. You sound like you have a lot resting on your shoulders, I’m honestly surprised that you haven’t fully snapped yet,” Jason tries to lighten the situation and Danny can’t help it, he bursts out laughing. 

 

“I’m not sure I haven’t. For some reason, I decided to go this way, instead of actually telling the truth once I was given the chance. What kind of insanity does that take?” Danny asks and Jason shrugs. 

 

“It kinda does make sense? Like a secret identity, like Superman or Green Arrow. You’re given the ability to have your own life outside of you know who,” Jason suggests and Danny finally manages to calm down. 

 

“I should have just stayed Danny, you know? I didn’t want any of this to happen, it shouldn’t have,” Danny blurts out, and Jason freezes. 

 

“What do you mean?” 

 

Jason isn’t exactly sure what Danny is saying and doesn’t want to make any assumptions, but how Danny was talking, he wasn’t so sure where this conversation was heading. He hoped it wasn’t what he was thinking, but also knew that he couldn’t make assumptions about the situation. 

 

“I was going to do my thing, work at Wayne Enterprises, pretend to be Danny Fenton, plain old midwestern boy. Completely unassuming and without note. I had protections in place, no ghost was to go into the mortal world in this universe. My people were building cases against the Ecto Acts. The GIW was well on its way to losing funding. My people would have been safe and I would be left in peace,” Danny huffs, sounding thoroughly put out. 

 

In all honesty, Jason was surprised as to why he wasn’t majorly pissed off with the entire Wayne family, Bruce in particular. They were the ones who pushed and prodded to know about Danny and the ones to decide, for Danny and the rest of the Infinite Realms what would be best to do. They had essentially gone over everyone's heads and disrespected Danny’s and Phantom’s authority just because they had decided they knew better. 

 

And because of that, Danny was forced into the spotlight, while it sounded like he wanted to do anything but. It must be an impossibly frustrating situation. 

 

“How haven’t you blown up at us yet? We derailed your entire plan, made you do things you most definitely didn’t want to do,” Jason asks, baffled, and Danny laughs softly. It's a kind laugh, with no anger or cruelty hidden. He sounded genuinely amused. 

 

“Time tends to correct most things, I’ve found. If this is what happened, then it was the best timeline that could have happened. For all I know, the cases against the GIW and the anti-ecto acts wouldn’t have gone well. A ghost could have come or formed in the mortal world and been hurt or Ended. This is truly the best way this could have gone, even if it didn’t go exactly like I wanted,” Danny explains. Jason is left sitting stunned, almost not able to understand the maturity Danny is currently displaying. 

 

“That’s certainly a way of looking at it. You’re truly not angry?” Jason asks and Danny shrugs. 

 

“Sure, I’m kinda upset, but it's more at myself. For thinking that I knew best and that I knew better. I should have seen that this would have happened anyway,” Danny confesses, and Jason sits back harshly. 

 

“Are you serious?” Jason asks and Danny nods. 

 

“Sure, I would have loved it if I was able to stay Danny Fenton, but realistically, I would never have been able to. This just gave me an opportunity, and getting protection for my people,” Danny smiles ruefully and Jason can’t help the smile he gives in response. 

 

“Alright, just if you decide to kill the family, give us a heads up, alright?” Jason asks and Danny nods very seriously before bursting out into laughter. 

*******************************

“You should reconsider. I know you have done extensive testing, but I am not sure I am comfortable with granting access to your spine for this experimental technology,” Dr. Williams who was supposed to perform the ‘minor’ surgery voices his concerns and Danny raises his eyebrow, unimpressed. 

 

“Doc, I’ve done the calculations and the tests. This is safe, especially with my biology. It’s you or a giant ghost yeti that may or may not know human anatomy. There’s also the option of cutting myself open or asking someone who isn’t trained. So, is it you in a sterile environment, or someone else in a not-so-safe environment?” Danny asks, leaning over the chair with the hospital gown open to display his back that had already been prepped for the two incisions with iodine and marked where the incisions will go. 

 

“Very well, you did sign the release forms, and Mr. Wayne has assured us that the device is safe. I will proceed,” Dr. Williams huffs, although he looks anything but pleased. 

 

“Danny, are you sure? This is experimental at best,” Jason frets, standing in front of Danny as he sits over the back of a chair, waiting for the doctor to finally get a move on. 

 

He had offered to be present, to distract Danny from the pain of the alignment process. He had spent a good chunk of time reading in the same lab Danny worked on his spinal bridge process for the last week and a half, both to keep himself occupied and to have one eye out for any more danger. When he had finally asked how the bridge would work, and Danny explained the pain that would most likely come with it, Jason had volunteered to be present to distract Danny. Because it was nerve pain, any painkillers that would normally be prescribed would be ineffective, and counterproductive. The pain of the connection would be a good sign as to the viability and functionality of the bridge. 

 

“Alright, making the first incision now. You should feel some pressure, but with the level of lidocaine we injected you with you shouldn’t feel any pain until the bridge engages,” Dr. Williams explains, and Danny nods, bracing himself for the pain that would no doubt still be there regardless of how much lidocaine was injected. 

 

“So, I was thinking, well Bruce was thinking, that once everything is settled on Earth, you should get a vacation. You technically get days off at Wayne Enterprises and haven’t taken a single one the entire time since you’ve been here. I’m pretty sure Leslie is going to come for Bruce’s head if you don’t get some actual time off soon,” Jason starts talking and Danny smiles, ignoring the feeling of the knife that he could feel as if he didn’t have a lidocaine. 

 

“Making the second incision now,”

 

“Yeah? I feel like I’ve had a lot of downtime recently. Pretty sure Leslie is just a good doctor who cares about her patients,” Danny manages to say cooly, voice barely wavering at the pain. 

 

“HR is also going to be coming for Bruce’s head. Bruce insists that you get paid for whenever you lecture or give lessons on the realms, so you’ve been marked for working almost every single day, which to tell you the least is breaking a few labor laws,” 

 

Danny can’t help it, he laughs, while remaining stock still. Even if there’s worry shining in Jason’s eyes, there’s also amusement. 

 

“Alright, what’s about this vacation Bruce wants me to take? ‘Cause in all honesty, I’d just spend the time in the lab,” Danny confesses and Jason laughs. 

 

“He’s decided to banish you to some beach resort. If you’re willing. He says he’ll cover it. I’m pretty sure that he’s only doing it because he’s trying to convince his kids to go with you. Poor guy just wants a break from us,” Jason explains and Danny chuckles. 

 

“Inserting devices now, link establishment in five seconds,” 

 

“Huh, and who is he banishing along with me? I get you, you can be a pain in the ass,” Danny ribs, and Jason snorts. 

 

“You would be surprised. Tim can be a menace without coffee and I’m pretty sure Damian has a colony of cats hiding in Batcow’s barn. Besides, Bruce may or may not have just had to replace another chandelier thanks to Dick’s acrobats. And Cass has been overworking herself again so she could use a vacation. Same for Duke, Steph, and Barabara,” Jason lists off the reasons as to why Bruce would like to shove his kids off on Danny. Danny however grunts in pain as it feels like lightning shoots up and down his spine. 

 

“Shit! That stings,” Danny chokes out, chuckling uneasily as the bridge finally activates. 

 

“So, where do you wanna go? Bruce says you get the first pick since it's for you,” Jason offers, and Danny groans lowly as another fresh wave of pain rolls through his body. 

 

“Somewhere warm, with the ocean and beaches. But not America, I’m pretty sure I’m still not well-liked by those in power in the United States,” Danny tries to joke but it isn’t as effective as his voice shakes. 

 

“What about Mexico? Or Thailand? Bruce has vacation homes in both,” Jason offers up locations and Danny clenches his teeth before shrugging. 

 

“Thailand? Me and Tequila don’t get along,” Danny jokes and Jason raises his eyebrows in question. 

 

“When you’re stitching yourself up multiple times a week, you need some painkillers and disinfectant. Not that it actually did anything to me,” Danny offers up as an explanation. 

 

“Well, I can understand that then. How’re you doing? You look better,” Jason asks, noting that Danny wasn’t as pale and shaking as he was before. 

 

“Good, fine. The initial connection has been made, for the next few hours signals will be passed both ways, sometimes they’ll be painful, and sometimes I won’t feel a thing,” Danny manages to relax, going slack against the chair. 

 

“The incisions are already starting to come together. You are outfitted with a monitor, you should be fine unless something comes up. If you feel like anything is wrong, you come back in and we’ll do our best to find a fix. I really wish you hadn’t made this decision,” Dr. Williams scolds, and Danny chuckles. 

 

“Imagine if you were in my position. I’ve been in this chair for so long, the chance that I could get out of it, to have my life back, it’s worth the pain and the risk. And the risk isn’t that big,” Danny explains himself, and Dr. Williams huffs. 

 

“I still don’t like being strong-armed into procedures by my patients. Take care of yourself, Danny, I hope you don’t need to see me again,” Dr. Williams says while finishing cleaning up from the procedure, and even if he wasn’t liminal, Danny could feel his irritation. 

 

“See you, Dr. Williams,” Danny manages to say as a fresh wave of pain washes through him. 

 

“See you doc,” Jason says as well, waving goodbye and watching as Dr. Williams exits the minor medbay Danny had requested the procedure be done in. 

 

“So, this is going to last a few hours. Got any plans?” Danny asks, adjusting himself as pins and needles begin to run up and down his legs, a good, if not itchy, sign. 

 

“Yup, Bruce convinced Batman and the league to set us up in an unused conference room for a movie marathon,” Jason explains, watching as Danny sits up with a groan. 

 

“Help me transfer?” Danny asks and Jason nods, smiling. 

 

“Of course,”

******************************

“Danny…Danny!” Jason’s pestering voice comes over Revenge of the Sith, startling Danny and scattering popcorn. 

 

The table and chairs that were once in the conference room had been replaced with a massive pillow and blanket nest, that Jason had situated themselves in. Now it had popcorn and candy scattered throughout it. 

 

“What!?” Danny hissed, still focused on the movie, annoyed that Jason had interrupted. 

 

“Look down,” Jason insists, and Danny does, only to gasp as the blankets at the end of the move, twitching and shuffling. 

 

“Jason, is that you?” Danny asks hesitantly, gripping Jason’s arm with a death grip. 

 

“Nope, that's all you. I take it that means the bridge is working?” Jason asks and Danny nods his head furiously. 

 

“It’s a really good sign. Not so great I can’t feel it, but that should get better,” Danny whispers, not wanting to break the moment. 

 

“But it’s a start,” Jason asks, and Danny nods. 

 

“It’s a start,”

Chapter 25: Vacation and Peace (Finally!)

“Alright, how are you feeling?” Dr. Williams asks and Danny shrugs, making sure his crutches are close by and not in danger of falling over like they had done so many times before. It was certainly a new habit to get into. An easier one, no doubt, but it was still something new. 

 

“Fine, some pain and stiffness, but nothing worse than that. I’m truly fine, all the tests say the same thing,” Danny points out and Dr. William sighs. 

 

“You put experimental tech into yourself that would normally take years and a full team of scientists to develop. You did it in a week and a half. I am just concerned that you rushed it, by a lot, and something will go wrong,” Dr. Williams admits and Danny sighs. 

 

“I know it's untested, but that is the point of this, to test it. And my unique biology makes me the perfect candidate. There hasn’t been an incident since the second day, and that was just a miscalculation on the amount of ectoplasm needed to function,” Which Danny will admit he screwed up. He had forgotten to calculate that he absorbed ectoplasm like crazy, even through any sort of containment device. All he had to do was add more ectoplasm through the port he had put into the design every morning, which was a pain to be fixed in the next attempt, and he was good to go. 

 

It was however embarrassing to fall face-first onto Jason when his legs suddenly lost all sensation and strength, suddenly enough that he was too startled to use his own abilities to keep himself from falling. Jason however laughed it off once he was sure Danny wasn’t dying or on his way to dying, just embarrassed. 

 

“Then I’ll sign off on your return to Earth, for a vacation only. If I catch wind you’re working I’ll sic either Superman or Batman on you, I won’t be cruel enough for Wonder Woman. I’m serious. Your health is finally good, from what I can tell for the first time in years. This vacation will be good for you, you’ve been working yourself into the ground. It’s going to be literally the death of you,” Dr. Williams warns and Danny chuckles, and Jason outright roars. 

 

“Trust me doc, if Danny isn’t dead yet, then he’s virtually immortal,” Jason teases and Danny groans, dragging his hand down his face. 

 

“Or he’s about to run out of luck. Bruce Wayne has promised us that the vacation location is secret, catering to the super-rich and mega-private elite. No one should even know you’re there. Take advantage of that. No call-ins, no ‘one quick question’, nothing. Doctor's orders, or the league, and you will really have something to worry about,” Dr. Williams threatens and Danny nods with a gulp, suddenly intimidated by the man. 

 

“Yes sir. Sand, ocean, and sun. And relaxation. I’ve been doing some planning and I think I can-”

 

”No planning! Just relaxing! And I trust you to make sure he actually relaxes,” Dr. Williams turns to Jason who tries to nod seriously before cracking up. 

 

“It’s actually them today,” Danny points out and Jason smiles. 

 

“Alright,” Jason says easily, accepting the correction without question. 

 

“And you could use the vacation as well. You were positioned as well and could do with some more recovery. I do not want you, either of you, back here besides a quick pop-in to say hello, is that clear?” Dr. Williams asks and both of them nod eagerly, ready to be away from the now scary doctor. 

 

Dr. Williams walks out of the lounge room and leaves Danny and Jason alone, and once he’s out of earshot, the two of them burst out laughing, unable to take the situation seriously. Danny, because they knew they were already dead and a little something like stress wouldn’t make them any more dead, and Jason because Dr. Williams was making it seem like the both of them would drop dead any second when in reality this was the healthiest Jason had been in his entire life. 

 

“Though seriously, are you feeling okay with this? This is the first time you’re going back to Earth since the attack at Wayne Industries,” Jason asks and Danny shrugs, fidgeting with the forearm crutch they had been given earlier in the week at his request. 

 

It was easier to have them stay attached to their forearms while using their arms rather than the under-the-arm crutches they were offered at first. It was hard, learning to walk again after so long. In all honesty, a lot of his ability to walk was their abilities that they were able to hide using the excuse of the bridge and crutches. The bridge wasn’t anywhere near as developed as they let people believe, but Danny was out of the chair and had a significant amount of feeling back in their lower half, so they were going to take it and run, figuratively at least. 

 

“Yes, I’m fine. I am eighteen, nearly nineteen. I haven’t gotten myself killed quite yet, at least not fully. Let’s go, everyone is already there, right? We wouldn’t want to make them wait any longer,” Danny insists and shuffles their way towards the elevator that leads down to the zeta tube bays. 

 

“So, why Thailand? Besides the fact that you and Tequila don’t get along,” Jason asks and Danny shrugs. 

 

“There really isn’t a story there besides you listing it as an option. Maybe I’ve watched too much Crazy Rich Asians,” Danny jokes and Jason chuckles. 

 

“I think that's set in Singapore, but I get your point. It’s pretty cool of Bruce to pay for it, it can’t be cheap,” Danny off-handedly comments, and Jason pulls to a stop, looking incredulously at Danny. 

 

“Danny, you do understand what exactly you’ve managed to do for us, correct?” Jason and Danny shrugs, seeming somewhat disinterested. 

 

“I get that I did a lot to help relations between Earth and the Infinite realms, but that was quite literally my job if you remember?” Danny asks, a joking tone in their voice, as Jason sighs. 

 

“Even if it is your job, which you happened to get when you weren’t doing your job, you still need a break, which Bruce is going to happily provide. Believe me, Bruce paying for this vacation isn’t going to make a dent in his monthly spending budget, let alone anything else. I’d just shut up and take it,” Jason suggests and Danny grins, continuing to hobble their way forward. 

 

“Alright, I will. So, how are we getting there? Because you have luggage for the both of us and I don’t have a passport,” Danny asks, eyeing Jason up and down. 

 

“We’ll use the Zeta tubes and kick out somewhere near Pattaya city. No one should bother us about passports when we’re already in the country, we’ll use the same zeta tube to leave,” Jason explains, a smile still fixed on his face. 

 

“And the Justice League is fine with us using their tubes for this? I mean, I get why I can since I’m technically working with them, but I don’t get why you can just walk around freely and use a highly sensitive secret form of transportation,” Danny asks, still confused over that fact. 

 

Jason’s face pales, before he quickly fixes a smile on his face, even if it looks fake to Danny. It was something Danny really didn’t like, the sense that Jason was lying to him after Danny had told him so much, more than they had told anyone else willingly. Jason, seeming to sense that Danny was having misgivings and feeling somewhat sour, made a decision that would most likely cause Bruce to kill him, and spoke up. 

 

“I’ll explain in Thailand. I shouldn’t explain here, not with how many people with enhanced hearing are here,” Jason finally admits, knowing that this would come back to bite him in his butt when Bruce eventually found out. 

 

“Okay, but I’m holding you to that. I really do want to know why you and Bruce can just wander around the Watchtower unsupervised,” Danny threatens and Jason bursts out into laughter. 

 

“Yeah, I can see why you’d be confused. Thailand Danny, you might be in for more explanations depending on feelings,” Jason vaguely suggests, and Danny is this close to hitting him. 

 

“Sure. So who’s all banished with me? You mentioned the other Wayne siblings, but never actually confirmed who’s going to be there,” Danny asks, coming to a stop beside one of the large Zeta tubes as Jason starts fiddling with the attached computer. 

 

“Damian, Cass, Tim, and Dick. The rest had stuff they had to do. But I should warn you, Bruce called Damian and Tim out of school for the trip, so they’ve either been good enough that Bruce is happy to send them on a vacation, or bad enough that Bruce wants them on the other side of the world,” Jason jokes, bringing up yet again how his siblings could be badly behaved. 

 

“I think last time we talked about this you were included in the banishing, right? What’ve you done, either good or bad?” Danny asks, and Jason pauses, stilling. 

 

It looks like he’s caught in memories, and Danny nearly asks what he’s thinking about before Danny catches the small smile, paired with furrowed brows painted onto Jason’s face. 

 

“More than I could explain right now. And before you ask, I don’t know whether this is a reward or punishment,” Jason manages to joke although it doesn’t reach his eyes, Danny notes. 

 

“I guess we’ll figure it out later. For now, I want the sun! I can’t believe I thought I’d ever say this, but I miss Earth, and the outside,” Danny jokes, waiting for the zeta tube to boot up. 

 

“Well, from what I know of Thailand, you’ll get plenty of sun,” Jason reassures, and Danny’s grin brightens at the idea of true free movement. 

 

He had loved his time on the Watchtower, the idea of being in space and getting to experience it, but it was the size of a smaller office building, which wasn’t that big when you had spent nearly a month on the station without much other company, besides video calls and messaging that first had to be put onto a relay in case Danny accidentally leaked any top secret information they may have somehow overheard in the superhero base. To say Danny was chomping at the bit was an understatement. 

*******************************

“I’m sick of the sun!” Danny moans, floating in the pool, the sun beating down from the sun above. 

 

“Then get out of it! No one said you had to be in the pool,” Tim snarks back and Danny lets out a gusty sigh. 

 

“Yeah, but my back hurts, and the pool makes it feel somewhat better. Jason, tell the sun to go away!” Danny complains and dunks his head into the somewhat cool water. 

 

“Sorry Danny, I don’t have that power,” Jason jokes, and launches himself into the pool, causing waves to splash around and displace Danny slightly. 

 

“Jason, you are useless. Cass, can you fix this?” Danny asks, using ASL along with his words. 

 

“ Nope, sorry Danny. Looks like you’re stuck with the sun ,” Cass responds, smiling with her eyes, the edges of her lips twitching upwards. 

 

“Bleh. Tim, you got any fancy machine to make the sun less bright?” Danny asks, turning to look at Tim, who is furiously typing away at his laptop. You could take Tim out of the office, but you couldn’t make him stop working. No matter how much Bruce tried, not even sticking him in a resort on the other side of the planet. 

 

“Yeah, it’s called a building, they’ve been around for a while. By the way, do you know when Dick’s getting back? He said he would pick me up some of those fruit pouches,” Tim asks, barely looking up from his laptop. 

 

“Tt, and you believed him? Fenton, Todd, you’ve got an appointment at the beach, Grayson set it up for you. He’s finishing things up. Both of you should look nice,” Damian insists, and Jason and Danny manage to look at each other, bewildered at Damian’s instructions and Dick’s actions. 

 

“Uh, alright. Danny, you need a hand?” Jason asks and Danny nods, still confused but not objecting due to the fact that he doubted Dick would plan anything bad for his brother and Danny. 

 

It did raise some questions as to what he had planned in the first place. Dick hadn’t indicated he had anything planned, and given Cass and Tim’s confusion, he hadn’t thought that they should be filled in. Only Damian seemed to have any idea about what was going on, which was slightly concerning. 

 

Jason helped Danny out of the pool and Damian handed Danny his crutches. In the week they had been at the resort, Danny had gotten better with walking, although not enough to be fully self-reliant. Sure, it was a disappointment that he wasn’t fully walking on his own yet, but even Danny could understand that after two years of being in a wheelchair, he would need some time to adjust. 

 

Once Jason and Danny reached the bungalow Bruce had rented for the six of them, they split up, going to their own rooms. When Damian said to dress up nice, he didn’t elaborate as to why, and Danny wasn’t about to go ask the grouchy kid what exactly he meant. Danny decided that ‘look nice’ was going to be a button-up Hawaiian shirt and Bermuda shorts, with his hair combed for once. Making his way back out into the main living room, he finds Jason dressed similarly, and both grin at each other at their similarity. At least they wouldn’t look mismatched for whatever Dick had decided they were going to do. 

 

“So, you have any idea what your brother has decided to do now?” Danny asks, and Jason just shrugs. 

 

“He tends to jump into things without thinking, case in point being Robin,” Jason points out and Danny bursts out laughing, unable to help himself. 

 

“Yeah, but you’ve got no room to talk, Mr. Steel-Batmans-Tires,” Danny ribs and Jason blushes, although he tries to hide it. 

 

Danny remembers their second day at the resort, and Jason finally cracked as Danny asked him, yet again, what the hell he was talking about on the Watchtower. 

********************

“Jason, you can’t just say you’ll explain things, and then don’t! I mean seriously, how the hell do you and Bruce seemingly have free reign on the Watchtower? Not everyone has that type of access. I barely have that type and I always have an escort outside of my room, usually you!” Danny pushes, knowing he was toeing the line of what exactly was allowed, but also feeling justified in asking, since Jason had said that he would eventually explain. As it turns out, Danny was not patient enough for ‘eventually’, which wasn’t all that big of a surprise. 

 

“Fine! I guess I did say I would explain. Besides, you were going to find out one way or another,” Jason mutters, seeming somewhat put out. 

 

“Jason, if you really don’t want to explain, then don’t. I wasn’t trying to push you into something you weren’t ready for,” Danny tries to back peddle, getting the idea that he was really pushing at something he shouldn’t. 

 

“No, you should really be told before you find out some other way that neither of us will like. I’m sure you know how high-profile my family is, which is the excuse we use whenever anyone connects us to anything close to the truth. The thing is, it never is the full truth, which now that I try to explain it to you, is actually really hard to explain,” Jason starts to ramble and Danny stops him with a hand on his arm. 

 

“Jason, breathe. It’s okay, just say what you’re trying to say. If I don’t understand I’ll ask for clarification,” Danny quickly explains and Jason nods. 

 

“I’m Red Hood, I used to be the second Robin, before I died,” Jason blurts out, and Danny has to pause for a moment, absorbing what exactly Jason had just admitted to. 

 

“So, the bag of heads?....” Danny trails off and cringes at what he had just asked. 

 

“Yeah, that's true. I’m better now, I promise,” Jason insists, and Danny smiles, still slightly put off. 

 

“I figured. So, how’d that happen?” Danny asks, raising his eyebrow at the still slightly panicking Jason. 

 

“I stole Batman’s tires and then hit him with a tire iron, thankfully he had body armor and I was a malnourished street kid,” Jason explains quietly, and Danny can’t help but smile. 

 

“And he arranged for you to live with Bruce? I mean, it makes sense. Bruce funds Batman and the Justice League,” Danny asks and Jason chuckles. 

 

“Not exactly. Bruce is going to kill me for doing this, but Batman took me in,” Jason tries to explain while not saying exactly what he meant, which was incredibly frustrating for Danny. 

 

“But I thought you were taken in by Bruce…Bruce Wayne is Batman?!?” It finally clicks, causing Danny to sit bolt-upright on the couch, startled by the realization. 

 

“Shhh! You can’t go yelling that out, but yes, Bruce is Batman, I was the second Robin,” Jason admits after he had finally led Danny to make his own conclusion and technically not tell him Bruce was Batman. 

 

“Wait, that actually makes a lot of sense. So, Bruce is Batman, you were the second Robin, does that make Dick the first Robin, and then Tim the third. But who…Stephanie then Damian, right?” Danny asks, joy lighting up his face as he puts the pieces together. 

 

“Yup, that's right,” Jason encourages, Danny’s smile infecting him as he grins at the pride he feels coming from Danny. 

 

“That means Cass is Orphan and Duke is Signal, right!?” Danny asks excitedly and Jason nods, pleased he managed to figure it out. The joy that Danny has makes Jason feel an echo of it, and it makes Jason feel even better about telling Danny the truth. Even if Bruce, and perhaps everyone else in his family, was going to kill him as soon as they found out what he had done. 

 

“Yeah, but uh, maybe don’t tell them that you know, or that I told you. I’m pretty sure they won’t be happy about it. You’re a certified genius, if they find out you know maybe just say you guessed. It can be our secret, how about that?” Jason asks, almost panicking and Danny smiles. 

 

“Sure thing, I understand. But can I ask one thing, can I fuck with them? Nothing that’ll tell them I know, or that’ll really mess with them,” Danny assures and Jason bursts out laughing, the deep gut-busting kind that makes Danny grin. 

 

“You know what? Go ahead. I’m going to get a kick out of that. So, now that you know, have any questions?” Jason asks and Danny doesn’t stop smiling. 

 

“So many! So, what’s with the bat everything? Is Bruce really that insistent?” Danny asks and Jason smiles wider. 

 

“Nope, that's all Dickie-Bird. He was ten when Bruce took him in and well, ten year olds aren’t great at naming things, as you can probably tell,” Jason explained, grinning.  

***********************

“Well, whatever he has planned at least we know he probably won’t kill us?” Danny jokingly questions and Jason nods, finally able to smile. 

 

“Yeah, I mean, how bad could it be?” Jason asks back. 

*************************

“You’re not serious,” Jason asks, staring at the grinning Dick, who he was about to punch in his stupid face. 

 

“Of course I am! You two have been dancing around each other since you met, this was bound to happen. I just got tired of waiting,” Dick admits and Jason is so close to decking him, he would have nearly killed Dick before the pit rage was taken care of but is held back by the bright red blush Danny was sporting. 

 

“Danny, I am so sorry. I know you probably don’t want to go out on a date with me, probably don’t even feel that way, and Dick was an ass and made you jump into a blind date and I am so sorry,” Jason frantically apologizes to the now beet red Danny. 

 

“I um, I don’t mind. I mean, I wouldn’t mind. If you wanted to date, or I mean just go out on a date. But you clearly don’t want to, and I wouldn’t want to force you, and, um…” Danny trails off, not able to keep talking. 

 

“No! I mean, I want to go out with you! But Dick tricked you, tricked us,” Jason glares and his brother, who merely shrugs. 

 

“Hey, it sounds like you both want to date each other, regardless of how that happens. Why don’t I just leave you to it, then?” Dick asks and Jason still glares at his brother, still pissed. 

 

“Fine, but I’m not done with this conversation,” Jason threatens and Dick nods quickly before fleeing. 

 

Jason looks over at Danny who’s still blushing bright red, but the embarrassment seems to be lessening, thankfully. Jason is embarrassed as well, but he was always one to respond in anger, not shrinking into himself and trying to become invisible like Danny is currently doing. 

 

“Danny, I’m so sorry about him,” Jason once again apologizes, and Danny shrugs, refusing to meet Jason’s eyes. 

 

“It’s alright, Dick meant well. We should probably sit down though, wouldn’t want Dick to waste money and what was most likely some sort of a bribe to get a table and lunch on the beach,” Danny suggests, pointing at the table that was almost overflowing with food of all kinds. 

 

“Okay, and then we can plot revenge for this,” Jason tries to joke and seems to have done something right as Danny smiles, moving to sit at the table. 

 

“So, is stealing all his left socks off the table?” Danny jokes and Jason grins, happy that the embarrassment and awkwardness seem to have dissipated somewhat. 

 

“Why stop there? Why not his right shoes? And dye all of his clothes pink while we’re at it,” Danny’s grin matches Jason’s own, and Jason very briefly felt pity for Dick, although it was only brief. 

Notes:

AHHH! It's finally happened! Jason and Danny finally had their date! With a little help from Dick. I've been trying to get to this point, and I really didn't see how I would write them figuring it out on their own, so I had Dick give them some help! I really hope you enjoyed the chapter and liked the way it went.

Personally, I only have a little experience in dating, even if I am a full adult. So I really didn't include their date because I don't know how that would go. I have never felt romantic attraction, not even a crush, so if that comes through, I hope readers will understand.

Chapter 26: Into The Light

Notes:

STOP! Stop scrolling and please read this. If you have noticed, there is now a tag for Fenton's bad parenting, It is there for a reason. Be warned.

Danny was desperately wishing for the sand and the sun now. Sure, sand ended up in places it should never be and Danny kept getting sunburnt, no matter how much sunscreen he put on, but the peaceful beaches of Thailand, and daily dates with Jason were far more preferable options to what was about to happen. He was so wound up that he resorted to pacing, at least what he would call pacing, as he hobbled from one end of the conference room to the other. 

 

“Danny, please calm down. You don’t have to do this, they can find out like everyone else. They aren’t owed anything else, not after what they’ve done to you,” Jason urges, looking up from the couch he had situated himself on as Danny continues to pace and worry a hole through the floor. 

 

“No, I need to be the adult here, someone has to. Besides, if they saw it on TV they would just assume a ghost was behind it. They might still actually,” Danny trailed off in thought, slipping back to his own world as he began pacing again. 

 

“They won’t have any weapons on them, and back up in on the other side of those doors ready to step in at any moment, and that’s without counting me and you combined,” Jason tries to reassure the pacing Danny, and gets the feeling it doesn’t do much, which Jason can’t blame Danny for. 

 

Danny was about to tell his parents the role he had been playing for years, ambassador, friend, and defender of Phantom, leaving out the fact that he was Phantom. It was already stressful with the announcement of the peace accord, and immediate end to the anti-ecto acts that he would have to do a press conference on, as Phantom. He didn’t want his parents to be surprised when at first their son was the ambassador and then the host for the king of the Infinite realms, which would make Christmas more of an affair than it usually was. 

 

“Alright, they’re waiting, right? I’m ready to explain now,” Danny steels himself, and Jason nods, quickly messaging Bruce to bring the pair of Fenton’s into the conference room. 

 

They had taken over a room of Wayne Enterprises for the fated meeting and would be later transported to the Justice League’s Earth-based ‘face’ base, where the press conference would take place, inside past five layers of security and background checks more thorough than the CIA’s. 

 

“Bruce’s bringing them in now, they seem… enthusiastic about being here,” Jason says cautiously and  Danny can’t help but snort in amusement. Of course, his parents would be excited to be here. They had only applied for every single grant Wayne Industries had, and some they didn’t. Danny would know, he had had to proofread their applications, even if he wasn’t the best in school, his parent's written reports were even worse than his. 

 

Danny carefully braced himself, and Jason positioned himself next to Danny, if not slightly slightly ahead as if shielding Danny, which he appreciated. All to soon, the door opens, and Bruce ushers in Danny’s parents, who are excitedly explaining how the Fenton Ghost catcher works, to a somewhat pained-looking Bruce. 

 

“Hey guys, thanks for coming. I wanted to tell you something before the press conference later this afternoon,” Danny spits out, trying to get any amount of words out before he eventually clams up. 

 

“Hey Danny, we were just explaining our inventions to Brucie here, I really think he might be interested,” Jack laughs out, completely missing the fact that their mostly paralyzed son was standing. 

 

“Really?” Danny asks voice strangled as he watches Maddie nod like crazy. 

 

“Yes. Bruce seems really interested in the biochem part of our research,” Maddie says enthusiastically. 

 

“Hey, guys. I have some things I should probably explain, and we don’t have a lot of time. Could we just sit down and let me explain?” Danny asks, faltering for the first time and Jason grabs his arm, helping to steady him, even with the crutches. 

 

“Danny! You’re standing!” Maddie notices for the first time, looking taken aback. 

 

“Yes, that’s part of it. Can we just sit down and talk?” Danny asks and both Jack and Maddie nod. 

 

“Of course Danno! It must be important if you got Bruce to fly us out here,” Jack says enthusiastically, and even if Danny doesn’t quite need it, Jason helps him sit down and sits beside him, positioning himself so that the gun he had tucked into his waistband was easily accessible, as well as being able to be up and free from the chair in seconds. If it was even a year ago Danny would have objected to Jason having a gun and being prepared to use it against his parents, but he knew that even if he loved his parents in his own way, he wouldn’t ever walk into this kind of meeting without backup at the ready. He felt safer with Jason and Bruce in the room, with Superman, Wonder Woman, and the rest of the bat clan ready to step in at the smallest signal. 

 

“It is. You remember the first accident, the one right around when the portal started working?” Danny asks, knowing that his parents most likely didn’t remember. 

 

“Um, no?” Jack asks and Danny sighs. 

 

“The one where I was electrocuted when the portal first started working. I was in the hospital for three days?” Danny tries to remind them and thinks back to when Jazz drove them, Danny, Sam, and Tucker, to the hospital, somehow a better driver without a license than both of their parents combined. She was at home when the portal activated, and had heard the screams, only to rush down to the basement to find Danny nearly dead and with an unstable heart rhythm. They had kept him in the hospital for three days until it somewhat stabilized with a shit ton of medication and time. The only time his parents had visited him with the new ghost portal running was when they signed his discharge paperwork, only to go right back to the excitement of a working portal. 

 

“We were kind of busy, the portal just started working,” Maddie excuses, and Danny can feel the anger rising in both Bruce and Jason and can somewhat sense it from everyone else listening in. 

 

“Right, well, I met someone. Phantom. He came through the portal that day, and we became friends, the four of us. Sam, Tucker, Phantom, and I. We helped him fight ghosts,” Danny quickly explains before his parents burst out into shouts and complaints. 

 

“You were friends with that ectoplasmic scum!?” Maddie shrieks and Danny flinches back, startled by the vitriol in her voice. 

 

“I know! He’s controlling you, isn’t he son? You’re going to be alright,” Jack reassures, pulling out the ectoectracto, causing Danny to flinch violently and Jason to tense in a more obvious way than Bruce does. 

 

“Stop! Phantom isn’t controlling me, at least not when I don’t want him to. He was the only one besides Jazz and my friends to visit me in the hospital. We talked, we became friends. He isn’t like what you say, he loves the human world and wants to protect it from other ghosts. I helped him, we helped him. Because we wanted to, not because he made us. He’s my friend, not because he made me, but because I wanted to be his friend,” Danny tries to explain and tries to ignore the mounting fury of his parents. 

 

“Not anymore you aren’t! Ghosts are evil! They manipulate you! We’ll free you from his influence,” Maddie insists and Danny finally starts frowning. 

 

“I’m not under his influence. Don’t worry, Jazz checked,” Danny mumbled, even if it wasn’t true. 

 

“Jazz is involved!?” Jack screams and Danny sighs. 

 

“I’m not done. Phantom needed someone on the human side of the portal, once he became king, which he only became after his fight with Pariah Dark saving our asses, if you remember,” Which they most likely didn’t. 

 

“I became that human, his ambassador on the human side. And I let him possess me as he needs to communicate with our government,” Danny quickly finishes and swears that both his parents reach new volumes and new shades of red he had never seen. 

 

“No, you aren’t! You’re going to stop working with him this instant and we’re going to make sure you’re free from whatever influence that menace as you under,” Maddie yells and Jack nods enthusiastically. 

 

“No, I’m not. Phantom and I have a press conference later today. For the past two months, we’ve been working to dismantle the GIW and the anti-ectoplasm acts. Two hours ago congress and the president agreed and signed to disassemble and dissolve both the GIW and the anti-ectoplasm acts due to a mixture of pressure and actually giving a shit about sentient creatures, even if you don’t think they are. I’m going to be there as both Danny Fenton, ambassador to the Infinite Realms, and Danny Fenton, host to King Phantom. The only reason you are here is to give you a heads up and to try and explain,” Danny tries to, and both Jack and Maddie spring to their feet, looking about ready to lunge over the table. 

 

“I can’t believe you! What the hell were you thinking!? We have told you your entire life that ghosts are evil, that they only want to hurt and manipulate humans! You need to tell them to put the acts back in place! To keep the GIW! And then we’ll fix you! Like you used to be, our Danny!” Maddie screams, and Jack seems to let her take the lead. 

 

“No! You don’t know what ‘your Danny’ was! He was miserable, and forgotten! I nearly died because I was trying to fix the portal, for you! You forgot it was my birthday, and pouted that you’re ’big project’ didn’t work! And whenever I tried to explain, all you had was your hate, and biased research, if you could even call it that,” Danny snapped back, finally done with their shit. 

 

“You just ruined our life's work! Everything that we’ve ever worked towards!” Jack finally interjects and Danny stands with his anger. 

 

“You worked for hate! And lies! You were so focused on proving your bias, that you refused to see if anything else could possibly be true. You aren’t scientists, you’re insane, hateful people in lab coats! Or sorry, hazmat suits!” Danny screams the fury, pain, and anger he had felt his whole life towards his parents bubbling over. 

 

“Not to mention neglectful! And horrible parents! Jazz was the one to raise me because you were too busy in your lab, and we were the ones to keep the house functioning and not a smoking crater due to your ‘science’. Jazz had to get a job to make sure the lights were kept on because you spent most of the money you got on new, insane inventions! I wanted to try and explain, to make you understand, but you never will, will you?” Danny finally quiets down, and Jason relaxes, barely, as Danny sits back down with an oomph. 

 

“You are going to go to the president, and anyone else, and undo what you’ve done. We’ll remove you from Phantom’s influence, and then you’ll be fine. Everything will go back to normal!” Maddie insists, now seeming more manic than Danny had ever seen her. 

 

“Normal is what is wrong! How can someone be not sentient while also plotting against humans!? That entire statement is contradictory! It doesn’t make sense, and someone was finally willing to listen! I did exactly what I should have done before it had gotten this far, stop it and explain that the two of you are obsessed! That you don’t see reason and manipulate data to manipulate anyone who doesn’t see the world from your point of view! I should have done this years ago, and I should have been smart enough to know, even before the portal was opened, that you were horrible parents and people. I’m not going to undo all the work I did just to make you happy and let you go around continuing to commit war crimes!” Danny finally screams, done with his ‘parents’. 

 

“You have two options, undo this and cancel the press conference, or don’t come back to Amity,” Maddie threatens, and Danny pulls up short, staring at his parents. 

 

“What?” Danny asks, trying to get some more clarification for this lunacy. 

 

“Either publicly rescind your stance and try to convince the president to reinstate the anti-ecto acts and the GIW, or don’t come back home,” Maddie ‘clarifies’ and Danny blinks at her in shock. 

 

“So my choices are let the United States and you commit war crimes against a sentient and sovereign nation, or never come home? Is that clear?” Danny asks, staring at his parents in shock. 

 

“I can’t let you do that, I won’t let you do that. You aren’t going to twist my arm into this. You miscalculated, my duty and loyalty to the infinite realms is stronger than any love I have for you. I’ve already moved out and am independent, as is Jazz. You’ve got nothing left. You have no funding, no one backing your so-called research, and no kids. I hope you can change, honestly. I hope you can see past your hate and ignorance, but I know you most likely won’t. And I can’t wait around and hope you grow a conscience. I’m done, and apparently, you are done with me too. You both have a flight back to Amity today, already paid for and booked. I suggest you take it because if you try anything else, the Justice League will arrest you and charge you for your crimes. Bruce, could you make sure they leave? I need to get going,” Danny didn’t need to leave for another two hours, but he couldn’t stand being in the same room as his genetic donors any more than he had. 

 

Jack and Maddie were blessedly silent, stunned by the swift and instant dismissal by their once son. Danny takes full advantage of their stunned shock, quickly standing with Jason and making his way out of the room, Jason walking behind him and acting as a shield for his retreating back. Even though he had finally stood up to his parents, it felt more like running away than anything else. Jason was all too happy to usher him out of the room, either ignoring or not noticing the burning behind Danny’s eyes as he desperately looked for a private room. He could hear his parents start shouting again, demanding he come back, with a heaping dose of cursing, both directed towards him, Phantom, and every other ghost. 

 

“Come on, there’s a soundproof room that isn’t used by anyone anymore,” Jason urges, and Danny allows Jason to take over and guide him, trusting the man to get him away from any prying eyes so he can finally break down in peace. 

 

Either someone anticipated this happening, or someone was just really prepared, the room Jason led them to was extremely comfortable, the lights were low and slightly warm toned, but bright enough to easily see. The room was painted in soft cream and browns, a soothing mix of warm and welcoming. There were a few couches and chairs, and in the corner was a fridge and drink station, waiting patiently. Scattered around the room were boxes of tissues, sitting at the ready. Jason ushers both of them into the room and closes the door, sliding an indicator card that the room is occupied. 

 

“It’s okay, Danny, no one is going to come in, and no one, not even Superman, should be able to hear you,” Jason assures, knowing that Clark was thoughtful enough to ignore the muffled sounds behind the state of the art soundproofing Bruce had used that still wasn’t fully effective against Clarks hearing. 

 

When Danny broke, it wasn’t into great, heaving sobs like Jason would have thought; instead, tears finally escaped from his eyes, rolling down his face. Seconds later, it was like a marionette with its strings cut, Danny crumpling down onto a couch as his legs lost any strength they might have had in them. And yet, Danny didn’t make a sound, mouth firmly shut and lips turning white with the pressure Danny was putting them under. The tears still came, Danny’s smaller body racked with the shaking and shuddering of sobs, and yet not a peep came out of Danny himself. Jason quickly sits down and pulls Danny towards himself, and cradles Danny’s head as Danny turns his head into the crook of Jason’s neck, and Jason can feel the ice-cold breaths that were shoved out of Danny unwillingly. 

 

Jason didn’t say anything, he didn’t know what to say. What do you say to someone who just lost their parents, not because they died, or were in a coma, or sick, but because they would rather choose their work and hateful beliefs over their son?  Danny at least didn’t seem to need him to say anything, just shuddering and crying into Jason’s side, and Jason let him. There wasn’t anything else he could do, and he didn’t trust himself alone. Danny might have cured the pit rage, but it was all his own anger that made him want to hunt down the Fenton’s and beat them into a bloody pulp. Jason vaguely wondered how Bruce was doing with the Fenton’s A+ parenting, and decided it wasn’t his problem, Danny was all that he was going to focus on now. 

*************************

Jason wasn’t sure how much time had passed before Danny’s silent sobs died down and he slowly collected himself, like picking up a once-shattered mirror, it was a slow process, but finally, Danny sat up and wiped his eyes with the tissues Jason held out to him. Danny’s eyes were red-rimmed and still watery, but his breathing had returned to normal. 

 

“Better?” Jason asks and Danny nods, swallowing thickly. Jason doesn’t speak again, waiting for Danny. 

 

“I don’t know what I thought would happen. I listened to them for years threatening to tear Phantom apart molecule by molecule. I’ve tried before, to suggest that their research was flawed, that their logic had more holes than a crochet project. They never listened, they always thought a ghost was processing me. I don’t know why I thought it would be different this time,” Danny internally curses himself for trying and getting his hopes up. It would have been the same thing over and over again though, he would always, at the very least, try. If there were things such as fatal flaws, Danny’s was the fact that he couldn’t give up, even when it was for the best. 

 

“That doesn’t change the fact that they are still your parents. I think it takes a lot for you to hate your parents without any hope for them to change,” Jason suggests and Danny snorts out a laugh. 

 

“You hated Bruce,” Danny suggests, and Jason quickly shakes his head. 

 

“I didn’t hate him, not even when the pit was fucking with my head. I felt betrayed like he cared more about a deranged clown than his own son. But I still loved him, I think that’s why I felt so betrayed because I loved him so much and I didn’t think he loved me as much. I know better now, but I never hated him,” Jason doesn’t bring up his birth parents, and Danny doesn’t ask, because even without that clarification, Danny understood what Jason was trying to say. 

 

“I think I’ve hated my parents for years,” Danny admits and Jason pulls him closer. 

 

“That’s okay,” 

 

“I think I still love them, somehow. Even if I hate them,” 

 

“That’s okay too,”  

******************************

Danny manages to collect himself in time to make it down to the car Alfred drove, Jason and Bruce beside him, as they made their way to the press conference they had. Danny couldn’t help but think that speaking at a press conference broadcasted internationally was less stressful than the conversation with his parents. He says as much and the car is filled with laughter. It was true, because he had been training for months for his role as king, and public speaking had been a major part of that. But what was most reassuring was the fact that he now had the support of the law and those who could protect both him and themselves if something were to go wrong. 

 

“So, are you actually feeling up to this? Because the first half of the day was pretty rough,” Jason asks, eyeing Danny with a critical eye as he fidgets with the collar of his own suit. Danny could understand why Jason would be concerned, he had had to change into an emergency spare suit after Danny had cried all over his first one. He still felt bad after Jason assured him he honestly didn’t mind. 

 

“It’s not like we can cancel at this point. Besides, the sooner the public is told, the safer everyone will be, ghost and human alike,” Danny assures, both for Jason and his own sakes. 

 

“Alright, then everyone is ready for you, whenever you’re ready,” Bruce interjects, dressed in his own smart suit. 

 

For once, Danny was feeling confident in his clothing choice, mostly because he had, along with Alfred, raided all of the closets in the manor for a suit that would both look good and fit Danny well, since his backup suit for the gala wasn’t exactly appropriate, according to Alfred at least. Because it fits the best, and Danny couldn’t help himself, he was wearing a mostly black suit, black suit jacket, and slacks, with a black shirt, which only made the emerald green tie stand out all the more. He couldn’t help adding the small amount of green into his outfit, hey he had an aesthetic to fit after all. 

 

“Let’s do this then,” Danny steeled himself and walked out of the door and to the stage, which was elevated from the floor and sea of reporters that had been gathered. 

 

The room falls into a hush, surprised to see that the usual Justice League news liaison wasn’t the one holding the apparently all-important press conference that had been called. Danny shrugs off the eyes he feels boring into him and adjusts himself behind the podium, letting the new rushed whispers run their course. 

 

“Hello. First of all, I would like to thank everyone here for taking the time out of their days to be here. I am sure there will be plenty of questions, so I will get right into why this press conference was organized. My name is Daniel Fenton, I am currently working for both Wayne Enterprises and the Justice League. I am currently an intern at Wayne Enterprises and a liaison and consultant for the Justice League. Most of my time at the Justice League I have been working to right the wrongs of the United States government. Not only do I work for Wayne Enterprises and the Justice League, I have been appointed as Ambassador by King Phantom, of the High Infinite Realms. If this sovereign nation sounds unfamiliar, do not blame any lack of knowledge on yourselves, but rather on the policies of the United States government to keep the large spread knowledge of the Infinite Realms and Ectoplasmic entities a secret. Past legislature, signed into law over four years ago, criminalized and denied human rights, or any rights, for beings who are made of, contain, or produce ectoplasm. I am one of those ectoplasmic creatures, although I was born fully human and remain mostly human today,” Danny pauses to collect himself, and has the feeling that the only reason the whole room hasn’t exploded quite yet was due to the rigorous screening of the Justice League, and plain old shock. 

 

“After bringing these barbaric policies and legislature to the attention of the current sitting government, I worked concurrently with President Barnes, and other government officials, both of the United States and the Infinite Realms to reach a peace deal, and to dissolve the illegal and immoral legislature and laws that once made it possible to declare ectoplasmic beings non-sentient and without rights, which ultimately violated the Meta-Protection act. Just this morning, both the dissolving of the legislature that allowed this in the first place, and the peace deal were signed, and from this point on will be honored. At this same time, the White House is releasing its own statement. I am aware there are going to be questions and am fully prepared to answer them to the best of my ability. Now, who is first?” Cameras started flashing wildly as the room finally exploded into the chaos Danny had been expecting. Danny couldn’t help but think that this was going to be a very long afternoon.

Chapter 27: Paperwork and Conversations

Notes:

So, it has been a while! That's my bad, sorry I haven't had more consistent updates. In my defense, I've been prepping for college and sorting out everything that comes with that. Still, I should probably have updated sooner. I am not even going to try and promise a quicker and more consistent update schedule for these last few chapters because I know myself at this point, but I am still writing this and I'm in the home stretch. Please hang in there, it's almost complete! With that, I hope you enjoy the latest chapter.

Lots of love, SSRI!

When Alfred greeted Danny with a cup of tea, a plate of his famous cookies, and his wheelchair, he could have married the man, if he wasn’t quickly becoming like Danny’s grandfather, that is. Still, the relief the quiet of the manor allows him makes him ever so thankful to the Wayne family for allowing him in. When Danny had first seen the manor, he had thought that it was ridiculous that the lawn was so big and the gates so tall. Now, he was thankful for that separation from the rest of the world. 

 

The press conference was a mess, not literally, of course, the reporters were good, and respectful. Whoever had screened them made good decisions, but that didn’t change that it was a mess. An hour had been planned, they wanted to answer questions but also wanted to give everyone a chance to digest the information before the more detailed answers were given. Instead, it had lasted just over four hours, with more and more questions being asked, and Danny couldn’t help but answer, wanting to finally share information about the Infinite Realms that he was finally allowed to. While overall it went well, it was tiring and everyone had expected to be back home hours earlier. Danny wasn’t the only one who was worn out from the day. Jason was especially tired and didn’t have any qualms about making that fact known. 

 

“I’m tired! The press are fucking vultures,” Jason grumbles, sitting beside Danny with his own cup of tea and plate of goodies. 

 

“You have to admit, those guys weren’t bad. They asked good questions, and actually listened to me! They all seemed to want to know more, even when Bruce decided that was enough questions,” While Danny seemed put out by Bruce’s intervention, everyone could see the gratitude in his eyes when Bruce stepped in and ended the press conference. Danny might not want to admit it, but he had reached the end of his own patience, no longer used to large crowds hanging on to his every word and wanting answers from him, especially not while airing it live on international television. 

 

“They wouldn’t stop asking questions! Weren’t you tired of them after the first five?” Jason asks, looking unimpressed at the relatively energetic energy Danny still had. 

 

“Well, yeah, some of them were stupid, like if I was the secret mistress to Phantom, but a lot of them were really good! Like that lady, Lois Lane? From the Daily Planet, she had that great question about migration between the Infinite Realms and the living world, and if living people would be welcomed, and allowed to leave if they decide to visit the Infinite Realms. Those are the questions I wanted to answer, not if I was screwing Phantom, and that's how I got my position,” Danny huffs, still pissed at the man who had asked that particular question. 

 

“That was a bad question, I’m pretty sure that he’s never going to be invited back. You did seem like you were enjoying yourself answering all of those questions. You were practically glowing, I think Duke was blinded,” Jason teases and Danny groans, knowing that he had most likely started to glow in his excitement at the prospect of finally getting to share all of the information he had wanted to share for years. 

 

“I just want to sleep now. It was fun while I was there, but I swear I could sleep for half a century and feel like it wouldn’t have made a dent,” Danny groans, complaining as Jason sat and listened, and Alfred flittered around the kitchen. 

 

“You do seem extra tired, and I’m pretty sure your parents this morning didn’t help. Do you have to do anything else today? I mean, we don’t need anything else, but with you going public is there anything else you need to do or can you just go to bed?” Jason asks, relaxing into his chair and watching as disparate washes over Danny, indicating that there is something else he has to do. 

 

“I have reports to review for my internship, I’ve been putting them off for a while, with everything happening,” Danny explains and Jason winces, used to his fair share of paperwork. 

 

“Want any company? I can go get your laptop and we can set up in the living room, set up a movie?” Jason offers and Danny nods, sighing. 

 

”Yeah, that’d be great, thank you. Alfred, can I have some coffee? I haven’t had any today and I’ve got hours of reports to look forward to,” Danny turns pleading eyes on the kindly butler, who simply regards Danny with a raised eyebrow, as if Danny would dare to ask for coffee that late in the day. Jason was already gone, up to get Danny’s laptop, leaving Danny and Alfred alone.

 

“It was my impression you would like to sleep. The reports can wait, I am sure Master Bruce could smooth anything over at work,” Alfred tries to placate, and Danny shakes his head. 

 

“Trust me, I would, but I’ve had some of the reports almost since I started, plus everything I have to do for HR and my health insurance, which has probably been working overtime recently. I’d try and shove it off onto Jason if I could, but I really need to be the one to write them up. Not to mention the spinal bridge that I have to write a report on and maybe submit to the health division of Wayne Enterprises, and everything that goes with putting experimental technology in my body on a space station,” Danny finally ends his tirade, overwhelmed with the amount of work that had truly piled up while he was focused on more important things, like preventing interdimensional war. 

 

“If I make you a pot, will you promise that you’ll stop at just one?” Alfred asks, and Danny looks sheepish. 

 

“Probably not, I have about a mile-high stack of paperwork,” Danny admits and Alfred sighs. 

 

“I’ll make you one pot, and then I’ll decide if you need another, fair?” Alfred asks although Danny knows that even if he didn’t agree, he wouldn’t be changing Alfred’s mind. 

 

“Fair. Maybe instead of the fancy Kona coffee you use, I’ll resort to energy drinks if you cut me off,” Danny threatens playfully, and Alfred, either not caring or not understanding that it was a joke, looked aghast. 

 

“Absolutely not! I may dislike you and the masters drinking excessive coffee, but if you bring one energy drink into my house, I’ll have you on a juice cleanse faster than you can say kiddinng,” Alfred threatens, and Danny throws his hands up in surrender. 

 

“Okay, okay! No energy drinks!” Danny is quick to say, and Alfred seems to relax, happily going to start the coffee without further comment, seeming to pick the lesser of two evils. 

 

“Danny! I’ve got Arthur Christmas playing and your laptop! You should probably get your butt into gear, four alert emails came through in the two minutes I’ve had your laptop open,” Jason yells out for Danny, and Danny looks at the coffee pot, anxiously watching the water just starting to drip through the coffee grounds. 

 

“Go on, I will bring it in once the coffee is finished,” Alfred allows and Danny beams before wheeling himself out of the kitchen. His legs and back were killing him, and he wasn’t interested in hobbling around on crutches when he was already in pain and struggling. There was a reason he hadn’t gotten rid of his wheelchair yet, for the very purpose of using it when he had enough of the crutches or wasn’t able to use them. 

 

One of the best parts of revealing himself, or at least part of himself, he didn’t need any help transferring and he didn’t have to pretend to transfer like anyone else in his position. Jason already had popcorn, his laptop, and his laptop opened and ready, a cord snaking away to a wall plug. And suddenly the pile of work didn’t seem so intimidating. 

 

“You are the best,” Danny announces, quickly moving to cuddle into the pile of blankets and Jason’s side. 

 

“Sure, and Alfred will be the best when he brings in the coffee. So, you said you had reports to do? And stuff from HR? You know Bruce would wave his hand and make all of that go away, right?” Jason asks and Danny nods absently, unlocking his laptop, only to wince when he sees his inbox overflowing. 

 

“I have to do it, a last hurrah at the company. Besides, Angela has been waiting for these reports for way longer then she should have. Plus I have exit forms, health forms, and about a million other forms to fill out so everyone is happy,” Danny explains, and Jason blinks dumbly, stunned. 

 

“Last hurrah? Exit forms? What are you talking about?” Jason asks, looking more than a little concerned. Danny just blinks back in confusion. 

 

“Jason, I am the public face, currently the only public face, of the Infinite Realms. I am serving as an Ambassador and consultant for the Justice League. I don’t have time to work at Wayne Industries in the middle of all that. Technically, I’m taking a sabbatical from Wayne Enterprises while everything settles down. But I’ll be gone long enough that I should get all of my previous work done and complete things with HR. With everything Bruce is making sure I get paid for, I could choose not to work for a year without having to dip into the funds Phantom has at his disposal,” Danny placates, and Jason nods hesitantly. 

 

“Okay, that’s good to know, but where are you going to live? Have you thought about that? You technically live in one of the apartments in Wayne Tower, you probably won’t have access to that anymore,” Jason asks, suddenly concerned, to which Danny can’t help but smile. 

 

“When was the last time I spent a night there?” Danny asks, and Jason seems to think hard before he shrugs. 

 

“I dunno, you’ve either been in Metropolis, Wayne Manor, or the Watchtower. I’m all for you moving in…” Danny is quick to interrupt Jason. 

 

“No, I don’t think I’m going to move in here. I’m getting a small apartment in the city, a nice little place, covered by fifteen layers of security. I’m also arranging for someone else to move my shit from Wayne Tower and set up the apartment. I do not have time to manage that. First I need to find someone I trust to do that, one more thing on the stacks of paperwork. At least most of it is on the computer and I don’t have to be the cause of a few tree's death,” Danny sighs, typing yet another thing onto the long list he already had typed out. 

 

“If I may suggest, I would be more than willing to set your apartment up and move your belongings,” Alfred interrupts, tray of coffee and its fixings in his hands. 

 

“Alfred, I can handle my own affairs, or arrange for someone else to. You certainly don’t have to sort that out,” Danny is quick to refuse Alfred’s offer, already feeling bad about how much work the old man was doing for him. 

 

“Alright, then let me do it. I’ve got more time on my hands than I need, and you trust me with your stuff, right?” Jason asks, and Danny nods before he has quite finished. 

 

“You really wanna move my crap? And doing all the work that needs to be done to set up an apartment? I have nothing besides my clothes,” Danny tries to convince Jason that it was a lot more work than what he was thinking. 

 

“I’ve set up a lot of safe houses containing a crap ton of stuff you can’t just buy at a box store. You’re apartment will be nothing, as long as you don’t plan on needing ballistic armor?” Jason asks, joking and Danny shakes his head. 

 

“No, nothing like that. Just, you know, standard apartment stuff?” Danny isn’t sure what exactly that is, but he trusts Jason to figure it out. 

 

“Huh, and that is?” Jason teases. 

 

“I don’t know, apartment stuff?!?” Danny bursts out and buries his head in his hands, laptop almost going flying. 

 

“Alright, it’ll be a surprise then. What else do you have to do?” Jason asks, both genuinely curious and wanting to get Danny back on task. 

 

“Do you remember that pump design, the one the stupid gala was about? I have a few reports on how I did it, kinda like show your work to the teacher to make sure you aren’t cheating. Then I have all of the health and insurance forms for the whole Metropolis visit and visit to the clinic, then I have more of the same forms for the gas attack after the gala since it happened in a Wayne Enterprises building while I was on the clock, then a modified debrief report about that incident which basically boils down to Amanda Waller got her hands on some really old books that supposedly belonged to a witch, and decided to use a ‘potion’ and ‘magic ingredient’ to get back at me because she was salty I managed to get her in trouble, and it actually worked. Then I have to wrap up and hand off any ‘sensitive’ work I am currently working on, and sign a bunch of forms that I am going on sabbatical, and before you volunteered to help, I had to clear out my room and arrange for another apartment. I am about to fling myself into Gotham Harbor with how many hours this is going to take,” Danny wines, trying to dispel how much he actually had to deal with by using playful humor and trying to inject an upbeat sound into his voice. 

 

“Geeze And I thought Bruce had me doing a lot of paperwork for the foundations,” Jason whistles, trying to categorize how many forms Danny would be stuck doing. 

 

“Foundations?” Danny asks, veering off the course of his own work, much more interested in Jason’s. 

 

“Yup, I convinced B that free clinics and dressing up as a bat wasn’t the only way to help Gotham. It’s just the beginning, but B agreed to some different programs. Legitimate childcare facilities at free or reduced costs, job training centers, food banks, and cheap and safe housing. I think I’ve even got him convinced on a community center for the older kids. Everything I would have wanted or needed when I was a kid. Turns out it's pretty easy to convince your dad to do most things if you bring up when you were a kid on the streets,” Jason breathes out and Danny is left sitting, stunned. 

 

“Wow, so, you’ve totally beat me in work to accomplish, kinda feel bad about complaining now. You were a street kid? How didn’t I know that?” With how popular the Waynes were, and working for their company, Danny feels like he should have known that about Jason. 

 

“It isn’t something that the family brings up a lot, and we try and keep it out of the press. In all honesty, after the initial buzz wore off, I think a lot of people forgot. I wasn’t like Dick as a kid, he was a wild child, I’d prefer to lock myself in the manor library. Then with my death, no one wanted to bring up the fact that the dead kid of Bruce Wayne was a street kid, and the mags that tried Bruce went off on. It's something I want to change. It isn’t something to be ashamed of, and I want to try and help more kids that are in the same position I was,” Jason admits as if this was something he had kept secret for so long and was finally allowed to share. 

 

“Huh, I didn’t think I could like you anymore, you just proved me wrong,” Danny admits, only to immediately flush bright red when a feeling of embarrassment wafts over from Jason. 

 

“Enough about my work, focus on your own. You just listed a massive stack of work for you to do, and I actually want you in bed before midnight,” Jason shoulders Danny, and Danny grins. 

 

“Take me out to dinner first, Jason. I’m not a cheap date,” Danny insists and Jason raises an eyebrow, amused. 

 

“I know you’re just trying to stall doing your work, but don’t think I won’t take you out on the town, once everything’s settled down,” Jason promises, and Danny flushed red again. 

 

“Alright, I’ll hold you to that. You should do some of your own work, since you’re insisting I do my own work,” Danny demands and Jason nods, holding up his own laptop. 

 

“I thought you would say that. I came prepared. Get working, maybe Alfred will have something waiting for you, that isn’t coffee,” Jason suggests, and Danny perks up, knowing that whatever Alfred made always ended up delicious, always good enough to make piles of paperwork worth it. 

 

“Fine, fine, I’ll do my work. But I want you to promise you’ll make me something if Alfred doesn’t,” Danny threatens, and Jason nods. 

 

“Whatever you want,” 

************************

Danny’s eyes were blurred, and his hands ached, but he had about a dozen freshly sent emails and his stack of paperwork was reduced to a single report, which he needed information from the labs at Wayne Enterprises to complete. Jason looked just as exhausted as Danny, slumped down on the couch. Alfred had supplied them with a second pot of coffee, but they had finished it hours ago. It was well past midnight, and Danny was seriously debating staying where he was to sleep, the task of navigating back to his room seeming to be more trouble than it was worth. 

 

“Alright, I’m calling it, I don’t really care if you’re done or not, it’s too late and we’re both falling asleep,” Jason suddenly announces, sitting up straight. 

 

In the past few hours, any sense of put-together had fallen apart. Danny’s suit jacket and tie had come off, with the sleeves rolled up, Jason had actually taken off his jacket, tie, and dress shirt, leaving him in a pair of slacks and a tank top. Both had messed up hair and dark circles. Both should have gone to bed hours before and had pushed themselves, trying to compete to see who could get the most work done. Alfred had long gone to bed, checking in before he retired with an unimpressed look on his face. 

 

“I’m not going anywhere, not tonight, you can stay and sleep, but I’m not going anywhere,” Danny states plainly, and Jason smiles. 

 

“Come on, you’ll wake up in a lot of pain if you don’t. Our couches are comfortable, but not sleep on them over night with a back injury comfortable. I’ll carry you so you don’t have to deal with your chair or crutches if you want,” Jason offers and Danny grins, looking at Jason slyly. 

 

“Are you trying to get me into bed, Jason? You could just ask,” Danny teases, and Jason turns bright red, which is more then amusing on his intimidating frame. 

 

“No! I mean, yes! I mean I don’t want you to sleep on the couch and it’s going to be difficult to get there, I mean…” Jason trails off, lost, and Danny loses it, giggling. 

 

“I’m pulling your leg, Jason. Yes, you can take me to my bedroom. Thank you,” Danny gets himself positioned so Jason can easily scoop down and pick him up in a bridal carry. 

 

“So, how much work did you manage to get done?” Jason asks, breath fanning over Danny’s face, causing a shiver to go up Danny’s spine. 

 

“Most of it, I need some data that I left in the labs that are on paper, so I need to wait until I have access to it to finish my last report. Otherwise, I have everything done. It was a lot of electric signatures and dating things,” It was a lot more than that, but Danny wasn’t one to complain. 

 

“Huh, well, that’s more than a little impressive. I can promise you I didn’t get that much done. So, you’ve got all of your done?” Jason asks and Danny sighs, rolling his eyes. 

 

“Yes Mom, except for that report, but I’ve got everything I can get done,” Which was honestly a feat, something had been nagging at the back of his mind since he came back from the press conference, and he had to keep redirecting himself not to get off track. Now though…

 

”So, what are your bets on how well your family would take the full truth?” Danny blurts out, the words tumbling out after being kept under a tight lid for so long. 

 

“What? You mean everything? Even the stuff you told me on the Watchtower?” Jason asks, surprised. Danny didn’t voluntarily tell him the truth about him being Phantom, and he was under the impression that Danny wanted to limit how many people knew that as much as possible. 

 

“Yeah, no secrets this time. No witch-hunter family, no secret cover story. The whole thing, unedited,” Danny clarifies, tensing and holding his breath. 

 

“I don’t think they would be mad if that’s what you’re asking. They’ll be confused by all the cover stories you made up, but I don’t think they’ll be mad. We all understand the need for secrets,” Jason admits, after a moment to think. 

 

“Okay, um, are you willing to be a buffer in case it goes south?” Danny asks, and Jason immediately nods, mind flashing back to the fight with Bruce that started the horror show of the next few years. 

 

“Of course. I can’t promise they won’t get mad and I can’t promise they won’t do anything, but I’ll do my best to smooth things over. But it’s late, and you just burned your eyes out doing paperwork, maybe now isn’t the best time to be making decisions,” Jason tries to gently suggest, and Danny laughs, nodding. 

 

“I’m not going to tell them tonight if that's what you’re worried about. I’m going to think before I make an actual decision. I just wanted to know what you would think,” Danny says easily, and honestly. 

 

“Okay, yeah, sleep is probably a good idea before more life-altering decisions,” Jason decides with a firm nod, and Danny can’t help but laugh. 

 

“What, some of my best decisions have been made while sleep-deprived, like applying for the internship,” Danny teases and Jason's face takes on a flabbergasted look. They had arrived at Danny’s open-door room, and Jason’s response was to dump Danny on his bed, swallowing thickly while staring at him intensely. 

 

“Bed, before either of us make decisions we shouldn’t,” Jason rushed the words out and fled the room, shutting the door a tad harsher than he meant to behind him. 

 

Danny just watches him rush out, amused. Jason might act like a big strong tough guy, but Danny could feel his emotions and how flustered he had become. It was a strange sort of power he felt, being able to reduce Jason's brain to mush. Then again, Danny wasn’t much better, remembering the way Jason held him and the heat his body put off. 

 

Shaking himself, Danny gets ready for bed, falling asleep before the small part of him that immediately wanted to tell the truth tracked down the rest of the Waynes that night and spills his guts to them. No, that can be a conversation for tomorrow. 

Chapter 28: The Truth, The Full Truth, and Nothing But The Truth

Summary:

Danny is brave and faces some fears. Jason learns something he should have a while ago and I as an author forgot I needed to actually set up. Whoops!

Notes:

Alright folks! We are getting really close to the end! I really enjoyed writing this chapter because it helps set something up that was the inspiration and idea that made me want to write this fic. Hope you enjoy reading it as much as I enjoyed writing it!

Lots of love SSRI!

The next morning was oddly domestic. Not that it was unusual to Danny anymore. The flow of the manor had started to make sense long ago, Alfred in the kitchen, cooking whatever breakfast he had decided the family was going to eat that morning, Bruce sitting at the head of the table, usually with files or a tablet in front of him, breakfast and coffee shoved off to the side, and the chaos of the Wayne siblings and family friends flitting in and out of the kitchen as they each got ready for the day. And somehow, impossibly, Danny had managed to find a way to belong at their table. Jason gave him that, Bruce gave him that, Alfred, Dick, Tim, Cass, Damian, Duke, Steph, and Barbara gave him that, gave him the chance to slot into their messy, complicated family. And Danny feels silly, that he could ever be so afraid of their rejection, that he was afraid they would turn on him like his parents had. 

 

Because he could see now that they wouldn’t do that, they wouldn’t even entertain it. Everyone in the kitchen had their own issues and traumas, every last one. And instead of that working against them, it helped each individual see everyone as they truly were. Hurt, traumatized, full of love and care. It bound them together and that made each and every one of them better for it. And somehow, inexplicitly, Danny had found his way in among them. 

 

It was a rare morning where everyone was present in the kitchen, there was some kind of kerfuffle with one of their usual rouges and every member of the crime-fighting brigade had found themselves in the manor in the morning following, for one reason or another. There really would be no more perfect time to make his announcement, and Danny can’t help but feel a thrum of excitement run through him, cementing his decision. 

 

“So, you know how Phantom possesses me? He actually doesn’t, I’m Phantom,” Danny blurts out, skewering a few breakfast sausages and serving them on his plate. 

 

It isn’t instantaneous like Danny pictured it. Slowly, every member took notice of his exclamation and processed the information, working through it at their own pace. Jason was the first, responding with a beaming smile and resting his hand on Danny’s thigh. Tim actually pulled his nose out of his tablet and set his coffee down, Bruce reacting in a similar manner, both turning their full attention to Danny. Barbara set down her toast and her face took on a calculating look, as if running through facts as she tried to slot them into place with the new information. Damian had a look on his face Danny couldn’t quite place, but would guess it would fall somewhere within confused, impressed, thoughtful, and irritated. Steph let out a loud gasp that quickly transformed into roarous laughter, Dick just sputtered like a fish, gaping at Danny. Cass had one of the most interesting reactions, a quiet, knowing smile, her reaction as to the most interesting one being beat out by Duke, who groaned lowly and lowered his head to smack it against the table repeatedly, and Danny somehow got the feeling he was questioning his life decisions. 

 

But it was Alfred’s reaction that made Danny choke up, tears threatening to spill. The butler simply gave a knowing smile, similar to the one Cass wore, but he undoubtedly had pride bursting out of him, and as Danny watched him, mouthed the words, “Thank you for trusting us,” to which Danny quickly nodded and tried to prevent the tears he would be spilling no matter what he did at that point. 

 

“I…think we are going to need further explanation,” Barbara hesitantly ventures and everyone besides Jason and Alfred agrees quickly in various ways, causing Danny to blush embarrassed at the way he just threw the information out there. 

 

“It was easier, and safer, to let everyone think Phantom and I were two separate individuals, especially those in charge of dismantling the anti-ecto acts and the GIW. I knew that there would still be prejudice against Phantom and the entire Infinite Realms, and thought they would be more receptive to a more… human-appearing negotiator, one that was still mostly human. It was also protection, for myself as Danny. I thought I would be in less danger, it also helped me protect my independence, in a way,” Danny admits, letting his reasoning sink in. 

 

“Holy shit, you’re not just an ambassador, you’re a king,” Tim, helpfully, points out, and Danny flushes further. 

“Yeah, I’ll admit, wanting to keep my involvement and power to a limit was a big factor in wanting to keep the secret that I was Phantom. I can handle people thinking I’m an ambassador, the hype and interest will fade in a few years, and I’ll probably get more of a personal life after that, especially as more ambassadors are appointed. If I was known as king, I’d have to abandon Danny Fenton, not just put his life on pause,” Danny explains, and at this, looks of understanding pass through the kitchen. It was odd, Danny felt like he should feel more afraid, or nervous, but he didn’t doubt that everyone would keep this secret closely guarded, and wouldn’t use it for their own gain. 

 

“So you plan on staying on earth as Danny Fenton? You weren’t getting ready for your permanent departure?” Bruce asks and Danny nods. 

 

“Yeah, that’s what I always wanted, to live out a natural human life here, and then fully take my throne when my human body passed. Circumstances forced me to change those plans, but I’ve still got a few decades left in me, at the least,” 

 

“Wouldn’t the council want you to take your throne? You are king, it is rightfully yours,” Duke asks, and Danny raises his eyebrow. 

 

“Time in the Infinite Realms is funny. An hour could be a year or a single second, depending on where you are and what her mood is. Time means very little in the Infinite Realms, waiting a few decades for my human body to fully die naturally won’t make much difference, and I am available for everything that they really need me for that can’t be done by someone else,” Danny points out, and thoughtful expressions fall over everyone’s face. 

 

“So, you’re immortal?” Steph asks, and Danny swallows thickly, looking at Jason. 

 

They had never discussed this, it had been skirted around and avoided thus far. But it was impossible to avoid now, not with such a pointed and clear question. Dots could have been connected before, but it seems like they had both ignored this very very important fact. Danny had never brought it up and Jason had never asked, even when one of them probably should have. 

 

“In a way, yes. But in the same way, most of you are as well or will be. When you’re contaminated by ectoplasm, or die in an extremely gruesome or emotional way, you’re likely to come back as an infinite Realma being. I’m a little different, already having a ghost form. But yes, Steph, in a way, I am immortal. This body isn’t, but I’m pretty sure that it will age slower than a normal human,” Danny answers, looking at Jason for his reaction. 

 

It wasn’t easy to read Jason, most likely because he was consciously attempting to remain calm, at least physically. Emotionally, Danny could read him like a book. He was a little freaked out, realizing just how long, and how hard to kill, Danny was. But he wasn’t running for the hills or even pulling away from Danny, so Danny would count it as a win. Although Danny really did need to teach him how to reign in his emotional aura, it was fine if Jason only ever interacted with Danny, but that wasn’t likely, and Danny had the feeling that Jason would not appreciate broadcasting his own emotions to any Infinnate Realms being who had the ability to read ones aura, so most of them. 

 

“That, is kinda freaky actually,” Duke mutters and Danny shrugs, not all that bothered. He had years to get used to the fact that his human body would live longer than most, and his Core would essentially be immortal unless he was killed. 

 

“Yeah, I guess it can be unsettling if you aren’t used to it,” Danny admits. 

 

“Wait, you said the same way all of us are. Danny, are you trying to tell us we’re immortal?” Dick asks, almost aghast, and Danny freezes, internally cursing. 

 

The whole kitchen is now looking at him in a terrified, awed, and confused way, and Danny isn’t sure how to answer all of the questions that would no doubt be thrown at him in a very short amount of time. 

 

“Yes, but don’t go jumping off any bridges! Or do but use safety equipment! All I mean is, that half of you are contaminated to varying degrees from the pits, and all of you are basically cryptids in Gotham and beyond. Belief in a thing gives it power, and a lot of people believe in you. It isn’t something you should be worrying about, I shouldn’t have said anything,” Danny puts down firmly, and prays that no one asks any more questions. 

 

It honestly looks like there will be questions asked, right up until Alfred clears his throat, causing everyone to glance at him. He looks to be the calmest one out of everyone, Danny included, and that seems to reassure everyone else. 

 

“It is best not to worry about something that is far off for everyone in this kitchen. Worrying about maybe’s take away from today, which is set to begin very soon for some of you, so I would rush off if you don’t want to be late,” Alfred says pointedly, and there is a mad scramble as most of the table eats the last bites of their food or chugs down the last of their coffee, before running off. Only Bruce, Jason, Alfred, and Danny are left in the kitchen and Bruce seems to be working through something and Jason is clearly trying to control his breathing as he attempts to wrap his head around the truth bomb Danny had just dropped. 

 

“Jason, do you want to go talk?” Danny asks, and Jason nods stiffly, robotically standing. 

 

Danny clambers to his feet, leaning heavily into his crutches as he does so. It was a better mobility day, Danny is able to use crutches instead of his wheelchair. It was better than what yesterday was, but Danny was looking forward to the day he was finally able to walk freely. He had been able to walk a few steps on the parallel bars in physical therapy but had yet to walk without any aids outside of physical therapy. And wasn’t that a bitch, Danny the king of the Infinite Realms, needed something so mundane as physical therapy. 

 

“How about the gardens?” Jason asks, and Danny agrees easily, letting himself be led outside the French doors into the greenery beyond. 

 

Jason doesn’t say anything for the longest time, simply matching his pace to Danny’s as he seemingly thinks. Occasionally, he’ll open his mouth for a second, only to close it as he changes his mind on what to say. Danny lets him, well versed in universe understanding knowledge. 

 

“You’re really not going to die?” Is what Jason finally settles on after their fifth lap of the garden. 

 

Danny swallows thickly, knowing that this conversation is never an easy one to have. He had pictured it in his head before, how he would break the news that no, he wasn’t going to die, not in the way that is understood by most. It was partially why he never considered finding a partner before, the technical immortality being another issue along with the Infinite Realms coming first thing. 

 

“Jason, I’m not even fully alive now. I know I talk about it like some kind of transformation, but I am always half dead and half alive, all at once. It doesn’t make sense to most, but I need you to understand that even now, I’m not fully alive, not like you, Bruce, or anyone else in your family. I’m already dead. This physical body will die, one day, yes. But my Core, my spirit, will live on, and will continue living on unless I am Ended, which is pretty hard to do. I will always live though, there is no dying of old age, not permanently. As long as I am not Ended as a ghost, I will continue to live on, even when the last star goes out in this universe,” Danny tries to get Jason to see, to truly understand what he means. 

 

“So, when you say forever,”

 

“I mean forever, as long as you can comprehend. It’s the same for every Infinite Realms being. The closest to a human death we can get is being Ended, and no one knows what happens after that, much like the conventional human death,” 

“So you never get to rest? You basically keep living, if not a little to the left,” Jason asks, and he somehow seems upset, mad. 

 

Danny attempts to collect his thoughts, to be able to explain it in terms Jason could understand and not freak out at. It was so much easier whenever Infinite Realms beings had the instinctive knowledge built it, it had been hard enough for himself to learn, never mind explain it to someone else. 

 

“Most, if not all Infinite Realms beings have something similar to a grave, or a final resting place. If it’s a personification of a belief or location, the being still has somewhere to rest that is related to their personification or location. They can kind of hibernate there, sometimes as few as a few hours or a few hundred thousand, they can choose how long, and that rest is respected above most everything else in the Infinite Realms. They can go there, for as long as they want, some choose to stay there for most of their time, some don’t, it really depends on what the individual wants,” Danny explains, taking a deep breath. 

 

“And this resting spot is different from a haunt?” Jason asks and Danny nods, taking a calming breath. 

 

“Yes, a haunt is a home in the Infinite Realms, a resting place is…kind of like a temporary grave? It’s hard to explain in human terms, you feel it more than words can describe it. And it isn’t just a resting place, but it can be a place of rememberance, of graditude and thanks. Even though it’s a resting place, it can also be a place of offering. If someone were to leave an offering, the resident can feel it, like a warm hug or the perfect warm drink. It’s sacred, and respected above all else. There aren’t really any more human words to describe what a resting place is,” Danny says thickly, sniffing slightly, refusing to meet Jason’s gaze. That hollow ache was back, the one that gnawed at him and brought down a wave of exhaustion so heavy that it almost knocks Danny to the ground below. 

 

“You can feel offerings? And they feel comforting?” Jason asks and Danny nods, attempting to smile. 

 

“Yes,” 

 

“So, where’s your resting place? Somewhere in Amity Park?” Jason asks and Danny still refuses to meet Jason’s gaze, shaking his head. Danny doesn’t speak up, knowing that his voice would be choked up if he did. He didn’t want to reveal to Jason how much this was effecting him. 

 

“Danny, what’s wrong sweetheart? You don’t have to tell me if you don’t want to, I don’t want to push you. I’m sorry if I said something wrong,” Jason immediately starts worrying, looking down at Danny, who still refused to look at him, and was trembling. Jason felt terrible, Danny being this distressed was the last thing Jason wanted.

 

“No, it’s not that. You didn’t say anything wrong. I-I don’t have one, a resting place. When I died, it…well it wasn’t like the typical death, killed and brought back over and over again, in the same instant. Since I was a mortal that was killed, not a belief or location, my grave should automatically be my resting place…but I don’t have a grave. No one knew I was dead, and there wasn’t a body to bury, because I am basically possessing my own body, if you want to be technical about it,” Danny tries to brush it off, tries to get his voice to be level, but that didn’t change the way his voice wobbles and waivers, clearly upset. 

 

“You…don’t have one?” Jason asks, confused.

“No, I was never given anything like a memorial, nothing similar to a grave. It’s okay though, I’m not fully dead, so I technically don’t need one,” Danny forces himself to smile and tries to shake off the pain of the reality that he doesn’t have a place to rest. He’s human enough to not need one, at least thats what he tells himself, vehemently, over and over again until he finally get it through his thick skull. 

 

Jason wants to object, it seems like such an important thing, but the fragile look in Danny’s eyes prevents him. If Danny wants to force himself believe that, Jason would let him, at least for now. Pushing Danny now would only result in pain for him, and acting like a jerk, but it did make Jason think. Danny, for all that he does for everyone else, rarely was able to do anything for himself without considering how it would effect everyone else around him, even the world at large. It wasn’t fair that Danny didn’t have something so fundamentally important. It was something that should be changed, it certainly was something to think about. 

 

“So, I take it this is not a topic you like discussing?” Jason asks, trying to inject some humor into the situation and Danny clings on to it. 

 

“No, I’m not a fan. But it isn’t something considered taboo at large, just something I don’t like talkin about,” 

 

“Alright, no talk of resting places, how about what your plan for the day is? Because I was planning on going into Wayne Enterprises and doing some foundation paperwork, I don’t know if you want a ride into town or not,” Jason asks, and Danny smiles. 

 

“I need to go in for those papers for that last report and grab the last of my things. I also need to say goodbye to everyone in the labs, try and explain why I had hidden something so important,” Danny shrugs and Jason smiles. 

 

“Well, we should probably head in, for once it’s a good day, we could even take a motorcycle if you want?” Jason offers and a grin lights up Danny’s face, mischief playing in his eyes. 

 

“It must be a family thing than,” Danny teases and Jason cocks his eyebrow, playing along. 

“Oh yeah, whats that?” Jason asks, intrigued. 

 

“Liking bad boys on motorcycles. I should have known my fate the second Jazz had her crush on Johnny,” Jason bursts out in roaring laughter, bending over as he tried to catch his breath. 

 

“Your sister sounds interesting. Why don’t you talk about her more, or talk to her?” Jason asks and Danny smiles, surprisingly unbothered by the question. 

 

“She’s in Oxford now, studying psychology. The time zone difference makes things difficult, and she’s always busy with schoolwork or working. She came back to the states after I broke my back and stayed until I moved to Gotham. She just went back over there after I arrived in Gotham. I should honestly find a way to talk with her, face to face and explain everything going on. I’m sure she’s pretty confused about everything thats happening. Happy, but confused,” Danny smiles, thinking of his sister. 

 

Even though she was on the other side of the world, he was happy for her. She got out and got to study what she wanted to, where she wanted to study. 

 

“You could visit her, although you’ll probably want to go incognito unless you want it becoming a state affair, you are an ambassador after all,” Jason teases, and Danny smiles. 

 

“You should come to. I know we kinda did a meet the parents, but I think we can both agree that went horribly. Besides, Jazz raised me more than either Jack or Maddie did,” Danny says, still smiling. 

 

“Well, than you need to tell me more about her, starting with this bad boy on a motorcycle,” 

 

“Johnny 13! He was a ghost! I tried warning her that he was up to something, but she didn’t listen. He was the first guy she wanted to date, but he just wanted to let his ghost girlfriend posses her. Somehow the three of them are still friends and have had a date here and there, not that I ever want to think about that,” Danny fake shudders and Jason just laughs harder, happy that the bad mood of resting places was left behind. 

 

“She sounds like a character,” 

“Which is funny because I always thought she was one of the most boring people around, always studying and focusing on her school work. I guess that’s why she’s at Oxford and I never went to college,” Danny admits, and Jason hears something off in his voice. 

 

“Do you ever regret that? That you didn’t go to college?” Jason asks and Danny shrugs. 

“Nah, Wayne Enterprises was way more fun. And I can always go back,” Danny shrugs, easily accepting his decisions. 

 

“I’ve been thinking about going to college,” Jason admits and Danny smiles, bumping into Jason’s shoulder. 

 

“You should if you want to. You’d look good in academia,” 

 

“Oh yeah? Sleep deprived, ramen noodle eating college kid?” 

 

“Totally, although I’m pretty sure you could afford more than ramen noodles, Mr. Crime Lord and Wayne family member. Besides if you only ate ramen I’m pretty sure Alfred would string you up by your toes. If you were going back, what would it be for? Criminal justice? It would fit,” Danny pokes at Jason’s night life and Jason smiles. 

 

“I was thinking of English, with a minor in education. I, well, I always thought of maybe being a high school teacher, try and be the one to make a difference in some kids life,” 

 

“That sounds a lot more concrete than maybe. I think that would be perfect, if thats what you want to do. It isn’t to late,” Danny points out and Jason nods, deep in thought. 

 

“Maybe I’ll do a campus visit at Gotham U. You could tag along if you want to, look at the engineering degrees?” Jason offers and Danny shrugs. 

 

“Maybe, one day. I’ve kinda got my hands full being ambassador and part time king though,”

 

“Oh, yeah, there is that. We should head back in and get the day going, paperwork isn’t going to do itself,” Jason pushes slightly, and Danny groans, but still has a smile, clearly joking. 

 

“If I never have to do paperwork again, it’ll be too soon,” 

 

“Nope, you’re cursed with eternal paperwork, just with ghost bureaucracy instead,” 

 

“Alright, maybe Alfred will make his special coffee for us,” Danny tries to joke and Jason nods. 

 

“We can only hope,” 

 

Alfred did agree to the coffee, as long as Danny and Jason went into the offices that day. Something about not just staying in the manor and becoming some sort of cryptids. Whatever, both would listen to Alfred even if it was a tad bit dramatic. Alfred sadly knew that both were beyond cryptic territory and there was no coming back from that. 

 

At least they could be cryptids together. 

Chapter 29: Dig You a Grave to Rest in Gently Love

Six Months Later: 

The sun was bright, for once making its way through Gotham’s clouds. It was a perfect early autumn day, the bright sun offsetting the slight chill the light winds brought. For the first time in two weeks, Danny and Jason’s schedule had finally lined up so they both had a day off. Danny wasn’t stuck shuffling between New York, the Infinite Realms, and any other location meetings were requested, not to mention all of the paperwork those meetings brought. Jason finally didn’t either have various committee meetings, hiring meetings, or meetings with lawyers, social workers, or accountants. That or he was spending as much time as possible renovating one of the first three foundation locations. 

 

So when they finally had a coordinated day off, they were going to take advantage of it. The last six months had been hectic and chaotic for the both of them, especially due to the fact that the apartment Danny had planned to move into had quickly been taken out as an option due to a small faction of the GIW sending a last-ditch attack at it aimed at Danny. After that, everyone had decided there needed to be a location more secure than some apartment in the city, and the issue of an embassy had yet to be decided. Luckily, Tim had stepped in, offering a solution to both the issue of a place to stay and an embassy, offering to sell Drake Manor. Sure, it was beyond unorthodox to put an embassy in a city besides Washington D.C. but Danny didn’t really care. 

 

So, Danny promptly scrapped the apartment and moved into the former Drake Manor, now known as the embassy to the Infinite Realms. And Jason had quickly followed, as soon Danny and him decided that it was rather stupid to keep separate places when they both knew where their relationship was heading, and boy wasn’t that a conversation to have. 

 

But Danny didn’t have to worry about any of that now, finally allowed to lay in bed and let the early morning light filter in through the curtains, Jason curled up behind him, arms wrapped around him, breathing quietly and evenly. 

 

“You know, we should probably get out of bed sometime today,” Danny asks, smiling as Jason’s groan vibrates through the back of his neck, hot breath tickling the back of his neck. 

 

“Says who? We haven’t had a day off together in forever,” Jason complains and Danny laughs. 

 

“Fair. So, do you want to do anything besides lay in bed all day? We could do anything we want, go anywhere. Paris, Thailand, Bruce’s?” Danny teases, and Jason shoots up, looking aghast and slightly offended. 

 

“Bruce’s!? He’s next door! I love him as much as you do, but I am not spending our one day off getting lectured that we should take more days off,” Jason puts his foot down and Danny laughs, rolling over and taking Jason with him. 

 

“I was teasing love, not about Paris, I was serious about Paris, or Thailand, or anywhere else really,” Danny asks, and Jason smiles, staring up at Danny with that dopy smile Danny loved. 

 

“Hm, let's leave international travel for another day, maybe when we have more time. What about a day in? I uh, I’ve been planning something, for a while actually. I’m hoping you’ll let me show it to you, and not get upset. Because I didn’t do it to upset you, at all! I actually wanted to make you feel better! But I don’t want to overstep and-”

 

“Whoa, whoa, calm down, love. I know you wouldn’t do anything to purposefully hurt me, okay? If you want to show me today, I would love to see it. If you don’t want to, today or even ever, that's okay too. We can take this however you want,” Danny offers and Jason somehow falls further in love with him. 

 

“Let me make you breakfast first, get you in a good mood,” Jason teases, shaking off the earlier tension and Danny laughs, leaning down and kissing Jason, smiling the whole time. 

 

“Well, you don’t have to worry about that, I’m already in a good mood,” 

 

“Oh yeah? Wanna show me?” Jason asks, and Danny laughs, rolling the two of them over, their laughter ringing through the bedroom. 

*************************

“So, a pretty great wakeup call, loaded waffles for breakfast, and the fancy coffee. You’re either really excited or really nervous,” Danny asks, gently rubbing his thumb on the back of Jason’s hand as they walk together, out towards the back of the property.

 

Jason certainly looks nervous and excited, and kind of like he’s going to be sick. It certainly made Danny curious as to what exactly Jason had planned. 

 

“Do you remember how you explained to me the difference between a haunt and a resting place?” Jason asks, and Danny nods uncertainly, unsure of where Jason is going with this. 

 

“Yes, of course,”

 

“You told me you didn’t have a resting place, since no one ever gave you a grave, or a memorial of any kind. You seemed upset about that, and I was upset that no one had given you something so important. It didn’t seem fair, just because you didn’t have a typical death doesn’t mean you shouldn’t have a memorial. I’ve been working on this since then, I talked with a few people, I hope you don’t mind that. They gave me some ideas and I had some of my own,” Jason explains and Danny raises his eyebrows, surprised at what he thinks Jason is explaining. 

 

“If you want anything changed, or added, just tell me and I can get it changed,” Jason rushes and tugs Danny forward, and they end up walking through the treeline and into a small clearing. 

 

The entire back half of the property was wild and untamed, the trees and brush growing wildly and untamed after the sprawling lawns ended, leading to a practically solid wall. Which made it easy to see how Jason had hidden the clearing beyond for so long. 

 

It was beautiful, the space beyond the tree line. The forest had been cut out into a large circle, leaving the grass plush and green, clearly meticulously tended. Around the clearing edge looked to be various fruit trees if Danny had to guess. In the very center of the clearing is a red brick circle set into the ground, ringed by three layers of flowers with a walkway, all different types planted with no clear pattern beyond looking pretty. On top of the brick circle was a sturdy-looking telescope, pointed up at the sky as the sun glinted off the metal fixtures. It looked functional and ready to be used at any moment. 

 

Danny freezes for a moment before walking forward hesitantly, speechless. At the base of the telescope was a small alter, most likely to place offerings but not in the way of the telescope's functionality. Still holding Jason’s hand in one hand, Danny’s other hand came up to trace the words inscribed on the outside of the scope of the telescope, fingers barely brushing the sun-warmed surface. 

 

For the one who loves the stars and brought their light to this world

 

Danny’s breath catches and he swallows thickly, forcing his eyes from the telescope to look around the clearing one last time before coming to rest on Jason. Jason who is standing stock still and looking very nervous, teeth worrying his bottom lip as he carefully judged Danny’s reaction. Danny didn’t know what to say, swallowing thickly as he tried to process the special 

 

“You-you did this, for me? All of this?” Is what Danny is finally able to settle on, words choked and strangled as Danny tried not to cry. 

 

“Yes. I had help, but it was my idea,” Jason admits still looking nervous as he watches Danny’s eyes mist up, taking in his surroundings. 

 

“All of this, just for me?” Danny asks again, as if he couldn’t believe it. 

“All for you, you deserve it all and more,” Jason assures, and a small sob escapes Danny, and Jason panics for a moment before he sees the smile underneath. 

 

“Marry me,” Danny blurts out, suddenly pulling close to Jason, who is more than stunned. 

 

“What?” He dumbly asks and Danny finds it in himself to laugh at the stunned look on Jason’s face. 

 

“Marry me, Jason Peter Todd-Wayne. Please, make me the happiest being alive, dead, and in between,” Danny asks, begs, and waits as error signs no doubt flash across Jason’s vision as he visibly tries to reboot, processing Danny’s request. 

 

“Why? Why me?” Jason asks dumbly, almost numb hands fumbling for Danny’s. 

“Because you heard me, you listen, you understand, and a million other things. Because I can’t image a day without you in it and I never want to,” Danny nearly begs and Jason swallows around the lump in his throat, eyes misting just as much as Danny’s, if not more so. To be wanted so wholely, with all the cards on the table, it was an easy answer, even if the words were hard to get out.

 

“Yes, yes! Please yes,” Jason begs back, just as earnestly, and Danny lunges forward, their foreheads cracking together before their lips meet, laughter and tears spilling out between the two of them. 

 

They sunk to the ground, surrounded by flowers and sun, and felt at peace, wrapped up in each other's safety. Throughout their entire lives, they had each faced impossible tasks, tasks that they thought would break them, that would keep them from ever finding happiness, and yet they were here together and with each other, impossibly and improbably. Nothing else mattered to them at that moment, no possible responsibilities, no possible backlash or negative response, no wondering of their family’s reactions, just the two of them, perfectly content to be together, forever, at last. 

Notes:

Oh my, that was hard to write. I have been writing this story for over a year, and it has changed so many times. Plots I thought I would use thrown out and plots I thought I wouldn't use thrown in. I always knew I wanted to end the story like this, ultimately. Getting there was the hard part. I had the rough outline of this ending scene written before I even started the story, it's what inspired the story in the first place, and I hope I have done it justice, and I hope it was everything you as readers wanted to read.

I have enjoyed writing this story immensely, and I have loved every minute of it. It is so hard to end something you have loved for so long, but I hope that this is a natural conclusion that fits, even if it is somewhat painful and sad for me to end something I have spent so long working on and loving. I was tearing up writing this entire chapter, even if that sounds silly, to finally finish something that has taken so much energy and love to create. I can only hope you have enjoyed reading this a fraction as much as I enjoyed writing it. So, good morning, good afternoon, good evening, and good night, whichever one it may be for you.

Lots of Love, SSRI!